SlideShare a Scribd company logo
MANUAL
of QUALITY
ANALYSES
for SOYBEAN
PRODUCTS
in the FEED
INDUSTRY
MANUAL
of QUALITY
ANALYSES
for SOYBEAN
PRODUCTS
in the FEED
INDUSTRY
J.E. van Eys(1), A. Offner(2) and A. Bach(3)




(1) Global Animal Nutrition Solutions Inc., Corresponding author.

      24 Av. de la Guillemotte, 78112 Fourqueux, France ; Jvaneys@cs.com.
(2)   Cybelia, 104, Avenue du président Kennedy,
      75781 Paris cedex 16, France ; anne.offner@cybelia.fr
(3)   ICREA, IRTA-Unitat de Remugants, Edifici V,
      Campus Universitari de Bellaterra, 08193 Bellaterra, Spain ; alex.bach@irta.es
CONTENTS
   1. Introduction                                                  5
   2. Soybeans, soybean products and production processes           7
   3. Definitions and applications of soybeans and soy products     9
   4. Chemical and nutritional composition of soybean products     17
   5. Official standards of some soybean products                  21
   6. Sampling soy products                                        27
   7. Physical evaluation and equipment                            30
   8. Chemical analyses                                            32
      8.1. Moisture                                                32
      8.2. Ash                                                     34
      8.3. Protein                                                 34
      8.4. Protein quality                                         37
          8.4.1. Urease Index                                      38
          8.4.2. KOH protein solubility                            39
          8.4.3. Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI)                40
          8.4.4. Protein quality in ruminants                      42
                 8.4.4.1. In situ technique                        42
                 8.4.4.2. In vitro technique                       43
      8.5. Amino acids                                             44
      8.6. Crude fiber                                             45
      8.7. Neutral Detergent Fiber (NDF)                           46
      8.8. Acid Detergent Fiber (ADF)                              48
      8.9. Lignin                                                  49
          8.9.1. Klason lignin                                     49
          8.9.2. Permanganate lignin                               50
      8.10. Starch                                                 51
          8.10.1. Polarimetric starch determination                51
          8.10.2. Enzymatic or colorimetric starch determination   53
      8.11. Non Starch Polysaccharides (NSP) and Monosaccharides   55
      8.12. Ether Extracts                                         57
      8.13. Lipid quality                                          57
          8.13.1. Moisture                                         58
          8.13.2. Insoluble impurities                             58
          8.13.3. Unsaponifiable matter                            59
          8.13.4. Iodine value                                     61
Contents




         8.13.5. Acid value                                  62
         8.13.6. Lipid oxidation                             62
             8.13.6.1. Peroxide value                        64
             8.13.6.2. Thiobarbituric acid (TBA)             65
             8.13.6.3. Anisidine value                       65
             8.13.6.4. Lipid stability tests                 66
                   8.13.6.4.1. AOM (Active Oxygen Method)    66
                   8.13.6.4.2. OSI (Oil Stability Index)     66
         8.13.7. Fatty acid profile                          67
     8.14. Minerals                                          68
         8.14.1. Calcium                                     68
         8.14.2. Phosphorus                                  69
         8.14.3. Sodium chloride                             70
     8.15. Isoflavones                                       71
     8.16. Antinutritional factors                           72
         8.16.1. Trypsin inhibitors                          72
         8.16.2. Soy antigens                                74
         8.16.3. Lectins                                     75
     8.17. Mycotoxins; rapid tests                           77
         8.17.1. Ochratoxin                                  78
         8.17.2. Zearalenone                                 78
         8.17.3. Fumonisins                                  78
         8.17.4. Aflatoxins                                  79
         8.17.5. Deoxynivalenol                              79
     8.18. Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO)              80
 9. NIR analyses                                             82
10. Data management                                          87
    10.1. Sample statistics                                 87
    10.2. Quality indicators                                91
    10.3. Significance of parameter estimates               93
    10.4. Control charts                                    96
    10.5. Follow-up and application of analytical results   98
11. References                                              100
12. Annex                                                   106
1. INTRODUCTION
           The use of soybean products in the feed and food industry has increased
       steadily over the past decennia. Fifty years ago world soybean production was
       estimated to be 17 million tons with China being the major producer (UNEP,
       1999). A little more than 50 years later and the production for 2003 is expected
       to reach more than 190 million tons with the major centers of production being
       the USA, Brazil and Argentina (USDA, 2003). The USA remains the largest
       producer of soybeans and soybean meals but its production is leveling off
       while Brazilian production and crushing of beans is increasing rapidly.

           Of the total world production of soybeans, less than 10 % is directly used for
       human consumption. The overwhelming majority is used in animal feed in the
       form of various types of soybean meals or specialty soy products. The current
       world production of soybean meal is estimated to be in excess of 130 million mt
       (USDA, 2003). With global animal feed production estimates approximating
       1.100 mt (Speedy, 2002), and compound feed production well above the
       600 million mt (Gill, 2003), soybean meals represent the dominant source of
       protein in animal diets. However, total use and importance of soybeans or
       soybean products is likely to be higher than indicated by major statistics as a
       plethora of different soybean products are entering the feed and food chain.

           This dominant position of soybeans and their products is no doubt
       associated with their high quality especially with respect to protein and amino
       acid profile. Following proper treatment or extraction, digestibility of the protein
       fraction is high and the amino acid profile provides a close match with cereals
       to meet animal requirements. Nevertheless, in their untreated form, soybeans
       contain a number of factors that have the potential to seriously diminish their
       nutritive value - to the point of decreasing animal performance and health
       (Liener, 2000). A treatment of soybeans to eliminate these anti nutritional
       factors (ANF) is thus necessary especially in the case of monogastric diets.
       These treatments, combined with varietal differences in the production process
       of soybean meals or other products lead to potentially large variations in quality.

           While basic standard specifications for soybean meals have been established
       (NOPA, 1997) no official specifications exist for other soy products that are
       routinely used in the feed industry. Furthermore the NOPA specifications only
       refer to four chemical characteristics. Current evaluations of soy products are
       based on a much larger array of tests allowing a more accurate evaluation of the



5
1. Introduction




    nutritive value of the different products. However, under practical conditions of
    feed production the choice of tests differ greatly among producers and feed
    compounders and not all tests are applied on a regular basis (West, 2002).
    It is most likely that in the future more analyses of greater complexity will be
    needed. Developments in the technological modification of soybean products,
    along with a better understanding of the effects on performance and health
    of relatively unknown compounds, such as isoflavones, will add value to soy
    products. Accurate analysis to measure the effects of new treatments and the
    relatively unexplored compounds will be of great importance.

         In order for results of quality tests to have real value and to be comparable
    between producers it is important that tests are standardized in method as well
    as equipment. This standardization is becoming increasingly important as trade
    in soybean products grows more global and competition amongst suppliers
    increases. Identity preservation and traceability associated with detailed quality
    characterization are issues of major importance in the (future) trade of soy
    products. Accurate and consistent quality procedures and analyses along
    with precise descriptions of the product are necessary. These tests must be
    reproducible at different levels of the supply chain. Furthermore, the increasing
    demands of the implemented quality systems (HACCP, ISO or GMP) will dictate
    the establishment of more detailed quality procedures and a larger analytical
    capacity. For the information that is generated at the various production
    stages to be consistent and comparable it is important that a single reference
    is available.

        This quality manual intends to provide clear directives and explanations for
    the quality analysis needed at all stages of the soy protein supply chain in the
    feed industry. The objective is to supply information that is applicable at all
    levels of operation, from the crusherto the compounder and from the quality
    operator in the plant to the nutritionist. Applications of the methods and
    analyses presented will enhance the value of soy products through improved
    knowledge and application resulting in improved performance and health.



                                                                                              CONTENTS




6
2. SOYBEANS,
       SOYBEAN PRODUCTS and
       PRODUCTION PROCESSES
           A large number of soybean varieties exist, producing soybeans that vary greatly
       in shape and color. For the complete range of soybeans shapes vary from flat to
       spherical and colors range from yellow to green, brown and black. Modern varieties,
       mainly grown for their oil content, are generally spherical in shape with a yellow or
       green as the accepted seed coats. These characteristics logically will affect many of
       the soybean products obtained from these beans. Official limits have been set on
       the minimal size requirements for the beans (see below) but generally soybeans
       grown for industrial purposes will weigh between 18 – 20 g per 100 beans.


           The soybean consists of two cotyledons which represent approximately 90 % of
       the weight, a seed coat or hull (8% of weight), and two much smaller and lighter
       structures the hypoctyl and the plumule. The cotyledons contain the proteins and
       lipids (oils) that constitute the main nutritional components of the soybean products
       obtained from soybeans. They are also the main storage area for the carbohydrates
       and various other components of importance, most notably the enzymes
       (lipoxygenase, urease) and the ANF. The various soybean products are obtained
       through the separation or extraction of the different component of the soybean.


           A large array of different manufacturing processes is applied to obtain the many
       soy products used in animal and human nutrition (Berk, 1992). Figure 1 provides a
       schematic representation of the transformation from soybean into the various
       products. In the “crushing” process of soybeans, which includes a series of
       preparatory operations, crude oil is obtained as a major product. The crude oil is
       refined and separated into lecithin and refined oil used in human as well as animal
       nutrition; especially in young animal diets.


           The soybean meals, which on a volume basis are the most important products
       obtained from soybeans, have the defatted flakes as an intermediary product that
       requires further treatment. Two main processes are used to extract the oil and obtain
       the defatted flakes: the expeller process (mechanical extraction of the oil by a screw
       press) or solvent extraction where non-polar solvents (commonly hexane and
       hexane isomers) are used to extract the oil. Solvent extraction is the most efficient
       and widely used process at present. In the case of solvent extraction the flakes are
       desolventized. All flakes are toasted in order to eliminate the heat-labile anti
       nutritional factors. Sometimes the hulls obtained in the preparatory steps are added



7
2. Soybeans, Soybean Products and Production Processes




         back to the toasted flakes. This is done in variable degrees resulting in soybean
         meals with variable levels of fiber and crude protein. When no hulls are added the
         high protein meals are obtained. These are the meals used predominantly in poultry
         diets. Flash desolventization or heat vacuum drying of the defatted flakes produces
         the white flakes that are higher in protein quality (solubility) and do not have the
         undesirable darker color. Through a series of different extraction and precipitation
         process soy protein isolates (SPI) or soy protein concentrates (SPC) are produced.
         Whereas SPI production is fairly standardized, different methods of extraction are
         used to obtain the SPC resulting in slightly different compositional characteristics.
         SPC but also the white flakes can be further elaborated (grinding, texturizing;
         separation on basis of molecular weight) to obtain a large array of products used in
         human nutrition. SPI and SPC are used in animal nutrition but are limited to specialty
         diets due to the relatively high cost. The use of these ingredients in animal diets is
         mainly as a replacement of high quality protein sources such as animal or milk
         proteins or as a replacement of fishmeal in aquaculture diets.

    Figure 1
    Schematic representation of the manufacturing of soybean products


                                                      Drying & tempering*
      Soybean                    cleaning, cracking, dehulling (optional), conditioning, flaking
                                                       cooking/toasting


                                 Expelling or solvent extraction                           • soy hulls
                                                                                           • full-fat soy flour or grits

            Crude oil                                                    Defatted flakes


           • refined oil          Desolventizing, toasting
           • lecithin               Soy hulls added (optional)
                                                                                  Flash de-solventization
                                                                                  or heat vacuum drying
                      Soybean meals

                                               De-fatted soy flour or grits              White flakes



                              Soluble carbohydrates                     Extraction               Extraction, precipitation

                                   • soy molasses                      soy protein                      soy protein
                                   • isoflavones                    concentrates (SPC)                 isolates (SPI)

              processes                 intermediary products

    italics and green are final soy products                                  * only in the case of solvent extraction


                                                                                                                           CONTENTS


8
3. DEFINITION and
       APPLICATION of SOYBEANS
       and SOY PRODUCTS
           The number of soy products currently being used in the feed industry is large,
       and an exhaustive review is hardly possible. Recent years have seen a dramatic
       expansion of specialty products based on soybeans. Classical, commodity products
       such as raw soybeans and soybean meals are relatively well defined with thorough
       descriptions and specifications. This is not necessarily the case for some of the recent
       modifications or adaptations of these products (i.e. Rumen-protected soybean meal)
       or further elaborated products (i.e. soy concentrates). These evolved, value-added
       products may differ significantly among producers with each producer applying
       proprietary knowledge and specialized treatments. Typically, value–added products
       must be evaluated on the basis of the entity that produces them taking into account
       the guarantees provided by the manufacturer or distributor. Consistent analysis of
       these producer-specific products allows classification and the building of a database
       along with confidence about the product. This increased level of knowledge will
       allow an analysis schedule of decreased intensity and increase inclusion rates in diets.

           Commodities as well as the value-added products can be classified in a specific
       class or group of products for which a sufficiently specific description can be
       developed. For an efficient and correct use - as well as a meaningful interpretation
       of analytical results - a precise and generally agreed upon definition of the product
       is needed. Trading, purchasing, formulation, and the entire operation of feed
       manufacturing depend on the precise referencing of a raw material and the
       consistent use of the correct name and description. Also the quality control
       mechanisms that have been introduced in the feed industry require a precise
       description and classification for all ingredients.

           Although many databases and ingredient tables have their own classification
       system, the most widely recognized system is probably the IFN system (International
       Feed Name and number) (INFIC, 1980). In this system, ingredients have been divided
       into eight fairly arbitrary feed classes on the basis of their composition and use (NRC,
       1982). The system is widely used in the UK, the US and in Canadian feed composition
       tables but less so in other countries.

           In the IFN system, ingredients are assigned a six digit code with the first digits
       denoting the International Feed Class number. With the exception of soybean hay,
       soybean hulls (class 1), lecithin, soybean mill run and soybean mill feed (class 4),
       soy products listed in table 2 (page 16) fall in the class of protein supplements (5) defined
       as products that contain more than 20 % crude protein on a dry matter basis. The five



9
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




     digits following the class number is the link between the INF and chemical and
     biological data in the USA databank (NRC, 1982). The number appears generally on
     official US ingredient specifications and, although the system may not be used by all
     feed producers or manufacturers, it provides an easy and systematic reference for
     quality systems and formulation purposes.

         A brief and general description is available for many soy products. This
     description has the advantage of providing information that is not generally
     captured in compositional tables. It also provides for a general appreciation of the
     origin and quality and thus the potential applications or uses in a feed. Although
     these definitions might differ slightly between different sources, they are in general
     sufficiently similar to use them interchangeably. AAFCO publishes at regular intervals
     reference specifications for soybean products (AAFCO, 2001). These definitions have
     been used as a basis for the specifications listed in Table 1.

     Table 1
                     Description and classification of soybean products *

     1. Condensed Soybean Solubles is the product obtained by washing soy flour or
        soybean flakes with water and acid at a pH of 4.2-4.6. The wash water is then
        concentrated to a solid content of not less than 60%. IFN 5-09-344.
     2. Dried Soybean Solubles is the product resulting from the washing of soy flour
        or soybean flakes with water and acid; water, alkali and acid; or water and alcohol.
        The wash water is then dried. IFN 5-16-733.
     3. Ground Extruded Whole Soybeans is the meal product resulting from
        extrusion by friction heat and/or steam of whole soybeans without removing any
        of the component parts. It must be sold according to its crude protein, fat and fiber
        content. IFN 5-14-005.
     4. Ground Soybean Hay is the ground soybean plants including the leaves and
        beans. It must be reasonably free of other crop plants and weeds and must contain
        no more 33% crude fiber. IFN 1-04-559.
     5. Ground Soybeans are obtained by grinding whole soybeans without cooking
        or removing any of the oil. IFN 5-04 -596.
     6. Heat Processed Soybeans (Dry Roasted Soybeans) is the product resulting from
        heating whole soybeans without removing any of the component parts. It may be
        ground, pelleted, flaked or powdered. It must be sold according to its crude protein
        content. Maybe required to be labeled with guarantees for maximum crude fat,
        maximum crude fiber and maximum moisture (CFIA 2003). IFN 5-04-597.
     7. Kibbled Soybean Meal is the product obtained by cooking ground solvent
        extracted soybean meal, under pressure and extruding from an expeller or other
        mechanical pressure device. It must be designated and sold according to its
        protein content and shall contain not more than 7% crude fiber. IFN 5-09-343.


     * In alphabetical order; adapted from the AAFCO Official Publication 2001 and the CFIA. 2003.


10
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




      8. Protein Modified Soybean is a product that has been processed to primarily
         modify the natural protein structure by utilizing acids, alkalies or other chemicals
         and without removing significant amounts of any nutrient constituent. The
         defined name under section 84 of the applicable soybean product so modified
         shall be declared in the product name. IFN 5-26-010.
      9. Soy Flour is the finely powdered material resulting from the screened and
         graded product after removal of most of the oil from selected sound cleaned
         and dehulled soybeans by a mechanical or solvent extraction process. It must
         contain not more than 4.0% crude fiber. Some organisms also require labeling
         guarantees for minimum crude protein and maximum crude fat and moisture.
         IFN 5-12-177.
     10. Soy Grits is the granular material resulting from the screened and graded
         product after removal of most of the oil from selected, sound, clean and dehulled
         soybeans by a mechanical or solvent extraction process. It must contain not
         more than 4% crude fiber. Soybean grits mechanical extracted: IFN 5-12-176.
         Soybean grits solvent extracted: IFN 5-04-592.
     11. Soy Lecithin or Soy Phosphate is the mixed phosphatide product obtained
         from soybean oil by a degumming process. It contains lecithin, cephalin and
         inositol phosphatides, together with glycerides of soybean oil and traces of
         tocopherols, glucosides and pigments. It must be designated and sold according
         to conventional descriptive grades with respect to consistence and bleaching.
         IFN 4-04-562.
     12. Soy Protein Concentrate is prepared from high quality, sound, dehulled
         soybean seeds by removing most of the oil and water soluble non-protein
         constituents from selected, sound, cleaned, dehulled soybeans (CFIA 2003) and
         must contain not less than 65% protein on a moisture-free basis. It shall be
         labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat,
         maximum crude fiber, maximum ash and maximum moisture.
         IFN Number: 5-08-038.
     13. Soy Protein Isolate is the major proteinaceous fraction of soybeans prepared
         from dehulled soybeans by removing the majority of non-protein components,
         and contains not less than 90% protein on a moisture-free basis. The CFIA (2003)
         adds that the original material must consist of selected, sound, cleaned, dehulled
         soybeans and that it shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude
         protein (90%), maximum ash and maximum moisture. IFN Number 5-08-038
         (CFIA lists this product with the IFN Number 5-24-811.
     14. Soybean Feed, Solvent Extracted is the product remaining after the partial
         removal of protein and nitrogen free extract from dehulled solvent extracted
         soybean flakes. IFN 5-04-613.
     15. Soybean Flour Solvent Extracted (or Soy flour) is the finely powdered
         material resulting from the screened and graded product after removal of most
         of the oil from dehulled soybeans by a solvent extraction process. It shall contain
         less than 4 percent crude fiber. It shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum




11
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




           crude protein, maximum crude fat, maximum crude fiber and maximum
           moisture. IFN 5-04-593.
     16.   Soybean Hulls consist primarily of the outer covering of the soybean.
           IFN-1-04-560.
     17.   Soybean Meal, Mechanically Extracted is the product obtained by grinding
           the cake or chips which remain after removal of most of the oil from soybeans
           by a mechanical extraction process. It must contain not more than 7% crude
           fiber. It may contain an inert, non-toxic conditioning agent either nutritive or
           non-nutritive or any combination thereof, to reduce caking and improve
           flowability in an amount not to exceed that necessary to accomplish its intended
           effect and in no-case exceed 0.5%. The name of the conditioning agent must be
           shown as an added ingredient. IFN 5-04-600.
     18.   Soybean Meal, Dehulled, Solvent-Extracted is obtained by grinding the
           flakes remaining after removal of most of the oil from dehulled soybeans by a
           solvent extraction process. It must contain not more than 3.3% crude fiber.
           It may contain an inert non-toxic conditioning agent either nutritive or non-
           nutritive or any combination thereof, to reduce caking and improve flowability in
           an amount not to exceed that necessary to accomplish its intended effect and in
           no-case to exceed 0.5%. The name of the conditioning agent must be shown as
           an added ingredient. IFN 5-04-612. It may also be required to be labeled with
           guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat and maximum
           moisture(CFIA 2003).
     19.   Soybean Meal, Solvent-Extracted, is the product obtained by grinding the
           flakes which remain after removal of most of the oil from soybeans by a solvent
           extraction process. It must contain not more than 7% crude fiber. It may contain
           an inert, non-toxic conditioning agent either nutritive or non-nutritive and any
           combination thereof, to reduce caking and improve flowability in an amount not
           to exceed that necessary to accomplish its intended effect and in no-case exceed
           0.5%. It shall contain less than 7 percent crude fiber. The CFIA (2003) specifies
           that it shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum
           crude fat and maximum moisture. IFN 5-04-604.
     20.   Soybean Mill Feed is composed of soybean hulls and the offal from the tail
           of the mill which results from the manufacture of soy grits or flour. It must
           contain not less than 13% crude protein and not more than 32% crude fiber.
           IFN 4-04-594.
     21.   Soybean Mill Run is composed of soybean hulls and such bean meats that
           adhere to the hulls which results from normal milling operations in the
           production of dehulled soybean meal. It must contain not less than 11% crude
           protein and not more than 35% crude fiber. IFN 4-04-595.
     22.   Soybean Oil consists of the oil from soybean seeds that are commonly
           processed for edible purposes. It consists predominantly of glyceride esters of
           fatty acids. If an antioxidant(s) is used, the common name or names shall be
           indicated on the label. It shall be labeled with guarantees for maximum




12
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




         moisture, maximum insoluble matter, maximum unsaponifiable matter and
         maximum free fatty acids. IFN 4-07-983.
     23. Soyflour Chemically and Physically modified is the product resulting from
         treating soy flour by chemical and physical (heat and pressure) means. It shall be
         labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat,
         maximum crude fiber and maximum moisture. IFN 5-19-651.


         The list in Table 1 gives an overview of the large diversity of soy products and
     different methods of producing them. It provides a brief description of how the
     product is obtained and for some products, compositional reference points.
     The common name and IFN is provided which allows for a consistent and non-
     equivocal use of ingredients, important in quality systems. The description gives
     an adequate back ground of the products for trading and classification purposes,
     references in quality systems and production purposes. It is sufficiently precise to
     provide clear reference points for product definition and contract agreements but
     general enough to cover a substantial variation in composition and production
     processes. For proper use of an ingredient additional analytical data should
     complement the information provided in the description. However, for analytical
     purposes the descriptions provide general back ground information as to what
     can be expected and how analysis should be carried out or what results may be
     expected. For formulation objectives the description only serves as a classification
     aide and more precise compositional data will be necessary.


         The products listed in Table 1 only represent the major soy products produced.
     At present, a large number of additional specialty products are marketed and the list
     does not adequately reflect the acceleration seen in the development of new soy
     products; mostly branded products. Many new, more elaborated products have come
     on the market over the past 10 - 20 years. The most important examples of these are
     the different types of soy protein concentrates and soy isolates. These products,
     characterized by strongly reduced anti-nutritional factors, can effectively be used in
     diets for young animals, pets and aquaculture, replacing other protein sources such
     as milk or animal proteins (fish meal). Additional new soy products have often been
     developed with applications in human or pet food nutrition in mind. In this area
     special importance is attached to the functional properties of soybean proteins
     which include the ability of the proteins to increase viscosity, emulsify, form gels,
     foam, produce films and absorb water and/or fat. Specific applications allow the
     production of texturized structures, a much sought after property in certain human
     and pet food products. The functional properties of soy proteins are related to the
     amino acid composition and sequence (primary structure) as well as the spatial
     configuration of the protein molecule and the inter-molecular forces (secondary and


13
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




     tertiary structures). Soybean protein products with unique functional properties may
     constitute important tools in the formulation of the so-called specialty diets used in
     animal nutrition. However, these techniques and products remain insufficiently
     explored in the production of specialty diets for domestic livestock, with economic
     considerations probably being the major limiting factor at present.


         The most important products in terms of volume of use are soybean meals
     (SBM) solvent extracted or dehulled (18 and 19) resulting from the original use of
     soybeans i.e. the removal of oil. This is also the case for the mechanically extracted
     SBM (17) although this type of SBM is much less common. Fullfat soybeans in
     ground, extruded or heated form are defined and their use is increasing due to their
     high energy content, especially in formulations where previously animal products
     (meat and bone meals and fats) were of interest. Two fiber-rich products are included
     in the list: ground soybean hay (4) and soybean hulls (16). While soybean hay has
     little application in the compound feed industry, the interest in soybean hulls is
     important and increasing. Soy flour and soy grits are primarily products destined for
     human consumption although minor amounts may find an application in specialty
     diets. Technological modifications of these products have produced different types
     of flour and grits. They are further classified and commercialized according to their
     application objectives with the main differences being the level of fat content
     or heat treatment.


         The remaining products are mainly modifications of different types of soybean
     meal with the objective of rendering the product more digestible; either through
     the modification of the protein structure or a removal of the ANF. The specifications
     do not make reference to these factors leaving the decision as to how the product
     compares in this respect to the interpretation of the nutritionist or guarantees
     provided by the producer. Quality analysis must provide a more precise indication
     of the product in terms of these characteristics in order to assure that the diet meets
     proper nutritional and animal performance objectives.


         With the increased complexity of production processes aimed at removing ANF
     and improving protein digestibility, a clear understanding of the products and the
     production process becomes more important and adapted quality procedures/
     analysis more critical. Quality differences between producers/suppliers for these
     products can be substantial, especially for the more evolved products. These
     differences need to be verified and understood at the feed manufacturer’s level.
     Nevertheless, it remains the responsibility of the user to carry out the needed quality
     analysis and classify suppliers and products accordingly. Reliable manufacturer’s
     information is, of course, important but verification remains the basis of this tool and


14
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




     of the overall quality assurance program. The quality of the information provided by
     the manufacturer must be an integral part of the “supplier classification process”
                                                                                      .


         The quality of ingredients play a determining role in the level at which these
     ingredients are used in animal diets. Quality criteria used to determine the inclusion
     level for an ingredient go beyond the standard nutrient levels, and have often more
     to do with residual ANF, storage and contaminations (see Chapter 5) and the
     physiological characteristics of the animal. The inherent variation in quality and
     chemical characteristics associated with these ingredients make repeated quality
     analyses necessary which in turn will determine more precisely the inclusion levels
     employed. The nutritionist’s experience and interpretation of the quality analyses
     play a major role in defining the final inclusion level used in particular diets. Table 2
     gives thus only general estimates of maximum inclusion levels of each product
     under practical conditions of diet formulation. The inclusion levels suggested are for
     inclusion in complete diets and are thus necessarily general. They will also need to be
     adjusted to the specific diet (inclusion of other ingredients) and feeding objectives.
     Also, the precise nutrient and ANF concentrations and the diet requirements (the
     ability of the animal to use nutrients or deal with anti nutritional factors) will need
     to be taken into consideration. Fine tuning of inclusion levels for each product is
     very much a company-specific decision reflecting depth of understanding of the
     formulation complexities and confidence in proprietary data relative to the
     ingredients. The suggestions listed in Table 2 must therefore be regarded as general
     recommendations that need to be further defined for each feed manufacturer, the
     manufacturing process and the feed being formulated.


         Some of the maximums suggested are not defined by any inability of the
     animal to use the nutrients in a given product, but rather by the effects of specific
     nutrients on carcass or product quality. Such is for instance the case for whole heat
     treated soybeans or soybean oil. Other maximums are controlled by economic
     considerations. While higher inclusions in diets may be possible, those levels will
     inevitably lead to additional costs with no or limited gain in performance.


         Some soy products listed in Table 1 are not included in the recommendations for
     use in animal diets. This is the case of “protein modified” soybean meal, soy flour or
     grits. Although these ingredients could be used in animal diets (and they actually
     may be when quality is not sufficient to include in human diets) they are primarily
     produced for utilization in human foods. Included in small amounts, they may
     convey major nutritional or technological advantages to certain food items (Liu,
     1997). Evaluation of these products in pet foods or certain specialty diets merit
     consideration.


15
3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products




     Table 2
                                     Application of soybean products(1)
                                                                            Species(2)
      Product                                                 Po      Sw         R       A       Pe       Level (%)(3)
        1. Condensed Soybean Solubles                                            √                            10
        2. Dried Soybean Solubles                                                √                            15
        3. Ground Extr. Whole Soybeans                         √        √        √                            35
                                                                                         √        √             5(4)
        4. Ground Soybean Hay                                                    √                            20
        5. Ground Soybeans                                                       √                            15
        6. Heat Processed Soybeans                             √        √        √                            15
        7. Kibbled Soybean Meal                                √        √                                     10(Y)
                                                                                         √        √             7
        8. Soy Lecithin or Soy Phosphate                       √        √        √       √        √             3
        9. Soy Protein Concentrate                             √        √        √                              7(Y)
                                                                                         √        √            5(4)
      10. Soy Protein Isolate                                  √        √        √                            10(Y)
                                                                                         √        √           15(4)
      11. Soybean Feed, Solvent Extracted                      √        √        √                              5(Y)
                                                                                         √        √             3
      12. Soybean Flour Solvent Extracted                      √        √        √                            40
      13. Soybean Hulls                                                 √        √                            25
      14. SBM Mechanically Extracted                           √        √        √                            30
      15. SBM Dehulled Solvent Extracted                       √        √        √                            35
      16. SBM Solvent Extracted                                √        √        √                            35
      17. Soybean Mill Feed                                    √        √        √                            10
      18. Soybean Mill Run                                     √        √        √                            10
      19. Soybean oil                                          √        √        √(5)             √             8

     (1) Suggested upper-use levels in diets of different domestic species; this will vary with age of animal, quality,
         composition and analysis of product; does not include young animal diets unless specifically indicated.
         Detailed and extensive analyses will allow discretionary changes in usage level.
     (2) Species: Production diets (growing/finishing) for Poultry (Po), Swine (Sw), Ruminants (R), Aqua (salmonids) (A);
         Pets (dogs) (Pe).
     (3) On a diet dry matter basis.“Y” indicates primarily in young animal diets.
     (4) Higher levels may be used in salmon and trout grower, finisher diets.
     (5) Maximum inclusion of oil in Ruminant diets should not exceed 2%.

                                                                                                                            CONTENTS




16
4. CHEMICAL and NUTRITIONAL
        COMPOSITION of SOYBEAN
        PRODUCTS
            The compositional data provided in the Tables 3 (p.19) and 4 (p.20) (with
        additional details in Appendix Tables 1, 2) are better descriptors of the nutritional
        characteristics of soybean products. They require however, a more in-depth
        understanding of the chemical, analytical and nutritional aspects of the
        products. The composition data also provide an indication of the specific
        processes that have been used to obtain the product. This is especially true for
        the data in Table 4. Along with the general description provided above, these
        data give thus a rather complete picture of the various properties and potential
        applications for each product. The total number and types of soybean products
        commercialized is clearly much larger that the ones listed in the tables.
        The tables only provide values for the main products. A large variety of different
        soy products are produced by different companies and for a large number of
        specific applications. Soy protein concentrates or heat or formaldehyde treated
        products for ruminant diets are an excellent example of this. The nutritional
        concentration as analyzed may not differ significantly from an ingredient listed
        but the nutritional value (due to a change in digestibility or degradability)
        may vary greatly. Since the tables only report composition that can be directly
        analyzed, such differences do not show up and are therefore not included.

            The nutrient concentration of the different soy products in Tables 3 and 4 are
        compiled from a wide range of official sources and publications (NRC 1982, 1998,
        2001; INRA-AFZ 2002; CVB 2000; FEDNA, 1994 and others). Besides completing
        the descriptive information provided in Table 2 the major purpose of the
        composition tables is to provide reference values that can be used to either
        evaluate the analytical data that are obtained in the laboratory or to further
        classify a specific ingredient. Since the data are obtained from a wide range of
        publications, the user may want to refer to the original publications if the sample
        corresponds more closely to one of the sources in his region. This is especially
        true in the case of soybean meals or soy by-products where crushing and further
        handling of the ingredient determine to a large extent the nutrient quality
        of the products.

            The table values provide means based on a large number of samples
        covering many years and a wide range in origin. They cannot be used as
        standard values but only as reference points around which analysis of individual
        samples should be situated if they are to be identified by the specific ingredient
        name. Most individual samples will be within an acceptable statistical range of



17
4. Chemical and Nutritional Composition of Soybean Products




     these means (see Chapter 10). This level of precision is adequate for classification,
     storage and trading agreements, as those are generally based on a small set of
     analyses (proximate analysis or just humidity, protein and fat). More detailed analyses
     concerning the more difficult to determine nutrients may show larger variations from
     the means and possibly inconsistencies with some values above and others below
     the table values. This is often the case for amino acids or micro minerals. As such they
     may point to consistent differences in the production process of a given supplier or,
     alternatively, reflect problems in the analytical procedure. The experience and
     know-how of a lab technician in interpreting the result is here of great value.
     Cross-checking of values known to be affected in a similar fashion by a production
     process or a laboratory procedure may provide an explanation of a discrepancy
     and confirm the true value and classification for the ingredient.

         For most users of soy products the detailed nutrient concentrations serve
     as a basis to formulate diets and to calculate total nutrient supply to animals.
     Since animal performance is determined by nutrient concentration and the
     relationship between nutrients, knowing the precise nutritional composition of the
     ingredients that make up the diet allows the prediction of animal performance and
     thus a detailed estimation of the value of each ingredient. Clear compositional
     descriptions of soy products are thus not only necessary for quality control reasons,
     but also for the evaluation in a diet or feeding operation. For precise formulations
     the analytical data on the ingredient in the plant should be used. The use of the table
     values, especially because of the large contribution that soy products make to the
     protein and amino acid supply, may lead to significant variations in nutrients
     between the formulated value and the real diets.

          The compositional data in Table 4 includes nutrients that can be directly analyzed
     in a large and well equipped laboratory. Routine analyses, as carried out in standard
     quality control procedures or smaller laboratories, mainly concern the proximate
     analysis, the van Soest fiber components (with the exception of lignin) and the
     minerals calcium and phosphorus. These analyses (especially the proximate) are most
     often used to derive other nutrient values such as amino acids or energy. In advanced
     formulation systems they are generally combined with estimates of digestibility for
     each individual nutrient. No digestibility data are included here as this information is
     not necessarily the result of direct observations but rather of literature compilations
     and research conducted by feed compounders. Thus digestibility data used in
     formulationsystems can differ considerably among users and are generally
     considered proprietary information. In the Appendix tables (1, 2) specific energy
     values have been included however, because of their importance as descriptive
     parameters for individual soy products and because of their importance in classifying
     and referencing ingredients.



18
4. Chemical and Nutritional Composition of Soybean Products




     Table 3
            Composition of some soy protein ingredients used in animal feeds
                                           Heat                  SBM       SBM       SBM
                                       processed     SBM        solvent solvent solvent                   Soy       Soy
                                       FF soybean mechanically extracted extracted extracted   Soybean protein protein
                               Unit       seeds extracted         44        48        50        hulls concentrate isolate

      Dry matter                %       89.44      89.80       88.08      87.58     88.20      89.76     91.83     93.38
      Crude protein             %       37.08      43.92       44.02      46.45     48.79      12.04     68.60     85.88
      Crude fiber               %        5.12       5.50        6.26      5.40       3.42      34.15     1.65      1.32
      Ether extracts            %       18.38       5.74        1.79       2.1       1.30      2.16      2.00      0.62
      Ash                       %        4.86       5.74        6.34      6.02       5.78      4.53      5.15      3.41
      NDF                       %       12.98      21.35       13.05      11.79      9.95      56.91     13.50       -
      ADF                       %        7.22      10.20        8.76      7.05       5.00      42.05     5.38        -
      ADL                       %        4.30       1.17        0.75      0.90       0.40      2.05      0.40        -
      Starch                    %        4.66       7.00        5.51      5.46       3.28      5.95          -       -
      Total sugars              %          -          -         9.06      9.17       9.29      1.40          -       -
      Gross energy           kcal/kg    5013          -        4165       4130       4120      3890      4280      5370
      Lysine                    %        2.34       3.50        2.85      2.89       3.00      0.73      4.59      5.26
      Threonine                 %        1.53       2.21        1.80      1.84       1.90      0.73      2.82      3.17
      Methionine                %        0.52       0.80        0.62      0.63       0.67      0.14      0.87      1.01
      Cystine                   %        0.55       0.77        0.68      0.73       0.73      0.16      0.89      1.19
      Tryptophane               %        0.49       0.74        0.56      0.63       0.65      0.12      0.81      1.08
      Calcium                 g/kg       2.62       2.96        3.12      3.07       2.68      4.96      2.37      1.50
      Phosphorus              g/kg       5.70       6.64        6.37      6.37       6.36      1.59      7.63      6.50
      Magnesium               g/kg       2.80       2.84        2.72      3.03       2.88      2.23      1.85      0.80
      Potasium                g/kg      15.93      20.28       19.85      22.00     20.84      12.15     12.35     2.75
      Sodium                  g/kg       0.29       0.33        0.18      0.18       0.88      0.10      0.55      2.85
      Linoleic acid C18:2       %        9.70       2.87        0.64      0.80       0.56      1.21          -       -

     FF Soybean = Full Fat Soybean; SBM = Soybean meal. For more detailed compositional data on soybean
     products see Appendix table 1, 2.
     Source: compilation of NRC, INRA-AFZ, CVB, FEDN and selected suppliers
     NDF = Neutral detergent Fiber; ADF= Acid Detergent Fiber; ADL = Acid Detergent Lignin (Klason Lignin)



         Protein quality analyses (Urease Index, KOH soluble N, or PDI) are also not
     included as these do not generally differ among soy protein products. A number
     of these analyses do exist and they are important in evaluating soy protein quality
     especially in terms of digestibility of amino acids. Methods and optimal values for
     these tests are detailed further in Chapter 8. In many respects they refer to the
     residual values for the ANF listed in Table 5 (p. 22) but only the heat labile ones
     such as trypsin inhibitors, lectins and goitrogens (Liener, 2000). There is no proven


19
4. Chemical and Nutritional Composition of Soybean Products




     relationship between heat stable ANF and protein quality indexes. For many diets,
     especially in the case of diets for young animals, aquatic species and pets, the
     application and use of soy products depends to a much larger extent on the residual
     ANF than on the nutrient concentration. In such diets the more elaborated soy
     products such as SPC or SPI are more frequently used. Accurate analyses for most of
     these ANF are difficult to carry out and under most practical conditions the suppliers’
     guarantees are accepted. As Table 5 indicates, the range in some of these ANF is
     considerable and a thorough supplier classification is thus important. In many cases,
     if an analysis for a specific ANF is indicated, the choice to use external laboratories
     may be advised. External, specialized, laboratories will provide reliable results and
     generally are in a position to give advice as to the quality and level of an ANF relative
     to other samples of a similar product. If preference is given to install an analysis for
     ANF (generally trypsin inhibitor) in a laboratory the adherence to a ring test or
     systematic comparisons of results with a well established laboratory is necessary.

     Table 4
           Analytical characteristics of common types of soy protein products
                                                                             Enzyme Alcohol
                                              Soybean                        treated extracted
     Product type                  Unit        seeds             SBM           SPC      SPC                 SPI
     Humidity                %      10 - 12                    10 - 12          6-7             6-7         6-7
     Crude protein           %      33 - 17                     42 - 50       55 - 60         63 - 67       >85
     Fat                     %     17 - 20                     0.9 - 3.5         2.5          0.5 - 3.0   0.1 - 1.5
     Ash                     %     4.5 -5.5                    4.5 - 6.5      6.2 - 6.8       4.8 - 6.0    2 - 3.5
     Oligosacharides         %        14                          15             <1             <3.5        <0.4
     Stachyose               %      4 - 4.5                     4.5 - 5         <0.3            1-3         <0.2
     Raffinose               %      0.8 - 1                     1 - 1.2         <0.2            <0.2        <0.1
     Trypsin inhibitor TIA mg/g CP 45 - 60                       4-8            1-2             2-3          <1
     Glycinin               mg/g 150 - 200                     40 - 70          <0.1            <0.1       <0.01
     ß-conglycin            mg/g   50 - 100                     10 - 40         <0.1            <0.1      <0.005
     Lectins                ppm    50 - 200                    50 - 200          <1              <1          <1
     Saponins                %        0.5                         0.6             0               0           0
     Phytic acid bound P     %        0.6                         0.6            0.6             0.6          -
     SBM = defatted soybean meal; SPC = soy protein concentrate; SPI = soy protein isolate.
     Adapted from: Hansen (2003) and Peisker (2001)


         Anti-nutritional factors decrease in concentration as the elaboration increases
     and the soy product becomes richer in protein. The increased concentration of
     protein associated with a lower level of ANF increases the value of soy products in
     a proportionally greater fashion than the increase in cost of production. They are
     therefore much sought after products in specialty diets. However, they remain
     uneconomical in diets of older livestock animals as those animals are less sensitive
     to the ANF and their protein requirements can be met with lower concentrations
     and/or quality of proteins.
                                                                                                                  CONTENTS
20
5. OFFICIAL STANDARDS
        of SOME SOYBEAN
        PRODUCTS
            While a large number of compositional tables and publications for soybean
        products exist, those data cannot be considered as standard values, especially
        not for trading purposes. For trading and contractual purposes they are too
        detailed and thus unpractical. Furthermore, they do not provide the required
        borderline minimum or maximum values for limited number readily identifiable
        parameters.


            A limited number of official standards have been published to start with the
        basic material: whole, untreated soybeans or seeds (IFN 5-04-610). As is the case
        for all other grains and seeds the USDA publishes official standards for soybean
        grains as defined under the United States Grain Standards Act. These standards
        do not generally change much over time and under the act soybeans are
        defined as grains that consists of 50 percent or more of whole or broken
        soybeans (Glycine max (L) Merr.) that will not pass through an 8/64’’round hole
        sieve (3183 microns) and does not contain more than 10.0 percent of other
        grains for which standards have been established under the United States Grain
        Standards Act (USDA, 1999).


            For trading purposes – especially in view of specific applications and export
        requirements – additional specifications are provided by dividing soybeans into
        classes and grades. Only two classes of soybeans have been defined (yellow
        soybeans and mixed soybeans) but 5 grades are specified. The grades and grade
        requirements for the major export countries (USA, Brazil and Argentina) are
        similar. However, while Brazil and Argentina have a special export grade, the
        United States does not define a specific export grade as soybeans are exported
        from the US at any pre-defined specification or grade. The USDA (1999)
        description of grades is provided in 5.


            Next to whole soybeans only three soybean products (two soybean meals
        and soybean oil) have standard values. Used as official references standards they
        have been developed by the National Oil Processors Association (NOPA, 1997)
        and are also published by the American Soybean Association (ASA, 1998) in the
        Soy Importers Handbook. These standards are now widely accepted and provide
        minimums or maximums on only a few, easily identifiable, key parameters. In the
        case of soybean meals their main purpose is the classification of soybean meals
        into two main categories: solvent extracted SBM and dehulled, hipro SBM.



21
5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products




     Table 5
                           US grades and grade requirements for soybeans
                                   Minimum
                                  test weight                            Maximum limits of:
                                                        Damaged kernels                                Soybeans
                                 per          per         Heat                  Foreign                 of other
                               bushel          hl       damaged       Total     material Splits          colors
       Grade                    (lbs)         (kg)         %           %           %      %                %

       U.S. No.1                   56          72            0.2       2.0           1.0        10.0        1.0
       U.S. No.2                   54          69            0.5       3.0           2.0        20.0        2.0
       U.S. No.3 (1)               52          67            1.0       5.0           3.0        30.0        5.0
       U.S. No.4 (2)               49          63            3.0       8.0           5.0        40.0      10.0
       U.S. Sample
       grade (3)

     (1)   Soybeans that are purple mottled or stained are graded not higher than U.S. No 4.
     (2)   Soybeans that are materially weathered are graded not higher than U.S. No 4.
     (3)   Soybeans that do not meet the requirements for U.S. Nos. 1,2,3 or 4, or
           i) Contain 8 or more stones which have an average weight in excess of 0.2% of the sample weight, 2 or more
           pieces of glass, 3 or more Crotalaria seeds, 2 or more castor beans, 4 or more particles of an unknown
           substance(s), 10 or more rodent pellets, bird droppings or equivalent quantity of other abnormal filth per
           1,000 grams of soybeans; or
           ii) Have a musty, sour or commercially objectionable foreign odor (except garlic odor);
           iii) Are heating or otherwise of distinctly low quality.
     See also: USDA, 2001: http://www.usda.gov/gipsa/reference-library/brochures/soyinspection.pdf




             For soybean oil the NOPA standards refer to crude degummed soybean oil
     mainly with food application purposes in mind. These standards serve as a
     general guide for transactions, thus assuring a minimal degree of quality and
     consistency in at least the three main types of soy products being traded.
     However, the standards and trading guidelines proposed by NOPA are not
     binding. Organizations, companies or individuals participating in a transaction
     involving soybean meals are free to adopt, modify or disregard the NOPA rules.
     They principally serve the trading and marketing of US soybean products within
     the USA but due to their wide acceptance, their impact goes well beyond US
     meals (and oils) as they are generally applied to compare and benchmark
     soybean products from other origins.


22
5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products




         Solvent extracted soybean meal can be the result of blending back soybean hulls
     in the dehulled meal. The blending of different types of soybean meals or
     soybean components at the point of shipping is allowed under NOPA regulations
     and standards for minimum blending procedures are provided. As a matter of fact,
     this can be the source of a significant variation in quality and chemical composition.
     However, blending of soybeans is not permitted. For soybean meals only soy hulls,
     soybean mill run and soybean mill feed are permitted to be blended with soybean
     meals before the point of sampling. The blending must lead to a meal of uniform
     quality representative of the contract terms.

     Table 6
      Specifications for solvent extracted and dehulled soybean meals (%)

                                                         Solvent              Dehulled
                                     Min/Max          extracted SBM             SBM


        Moisture                       max.                  12                   12
        Protein                         min.                 44                47.5 - 49
        Fat                             min.                 0.5                  0.5
        Crude fiber                    max.                   7                3.3 - 3.5
        Anti-cacking agent             max.                  0.5                  0.5


                                                                                  NOPA, 1997




     For SBM, the NOPA standards clearly aim at providing a minimum number of
     primary quality characteristics and as such are only a basis for contract specifications
     (Table 6). The only characteristics defined are moisture, crude protein, fat and crude
     fiber with a maximum tolerance for an anti-caking agent. Beyond purchasing
     and possibly storage allocations these specifications have little impact on normal
     feed milling operations; neither from a specific quality point of view nor from a
     formulation perspective. They do not provide a sufficiently detailed overview of the
     nutritional characteristics required for proper quality management or further use.
     Meals purchased under NOPA contract specifications will therefore still need
     additional analysis. In order to provide greater quality assurances and meet the
     nutritional requirements of the feed compounder or nutritionist additional
     recommendations have been added by NOPA (Table 7- next page).




23
5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products




         These are, again, only recommendations that apply in a non-binding manner to
     all soybean meals. Rather than guidelines they should be regarded as further sugges-
     tions to both producers of soybean meal and buyers, provided in an effort to improve
     the quality of US soybean meals. Under practical conditions there remains a large
     variation around these recommendations and from a feed compounder’s point of
     view, information on quality requirements for SBM needs to be still more detailed.
     Also, new parameters have been added and more recently evaluations have changed
     slightly. For instance there is a definite tendency for KOH values to shift to the high
     end of the established range (close to the 85 % value).

     Table 7
            Recommended additional specifications for soybean meal

       Lysine                                2.85 % (basis 88 % dry matter)
       Ash                                   < 7.5 %
       Acid insoluble ash (silica)           <1%

       Protein solubility in 0.2 % KOH       73 - 85 %
       Urease activity                       0.01 - 0.35 pH unit rise
       Bulk density                          57 - 64 g/100 cc

       Screen analysis (mesh)                95 % thru # 10, 45 % thru #20, 6 % thru # 80
       Texture                               Uniform, free flowing, no lumps, cakes, dust
       Color                                 Light tan to light brown

       Odor                                  Fresh - not musty, sour, ammonia, burned
       Contaminants                          No urea, ammonia, pesticides, grains, seeds,
                                             molds

                                                                                  NOPA, 1997


         The Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI), an additional measure of protein quality,
     has been added as a routine quality evaluation. This follows the general application
     of this method in evaluating protein quality in products for human consumption
     (AACC, 1976). The results of this method are considered to be superior to the KOH
     solubility especially where it concerns cases of inadequate heat treatments (Batal et
     al., 2000). The KOH solubility index is considered better to estimate overheating of
     SBMs. Nevertheless, consistent application of the recommendations in Table 7 would
     go a long way in meeting product quality and nutritional requirements.


         An additional degree of detail is necessary for the regular and detailed
     formulation changes that are required to meet the performance guarantees of


24
5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products




     animal diets and the constant cost-reduction objectives. The generation of this
     information is, at present, considered to be the responsibility of the in-house quality
     control and analytical services organization of the feed compounder. As a matter
     of fact, this is often regarded as part of the proprietary know-how by feed
     manufacturers. It does, however, offer the crusher an opportunity to provide a more
     consistent and better quality product and therefore a means to add value to a
     commodity. As identity preservation (IP) and traceability tools improve, a greater
     detail and guarantee on nutritional characteristics will be possible.


         The NOPA standards for soybean oil have the same objectives as those for SBM
     i.e. providing a framework for trading and contract negotiations. However the
     emphasis is on oil for human consumption as the designated types are for edible oil
     (officially referred to as crude degummed soy oil). As a matter of fact, no standards
     for oil used in animal feed is available and most feed companies or users of oil in
     animal feed have developed in-house standards for oils and fats or mixtures of both.
     These proprietary standards for animal feed will generally be slightly more relaxed
     (see Table 8) but information for additional parameters such as iodine and peroxide
     numbers are often required. On the other hand, information on P levels and flash
     point are not considered. This difference in standards allows for the use of soy oils
     which are rejected for human consumption to be used in animal feed provided they




     Table 8
                   Standards for edible crude degummed soybean oil
                           and vegetable oils in animal feed
                                                                               NOPA1         Feed2
        Analytical parameter                                      Unit          Max           Max

        Unsaponifiable matter                                      %             1.5           1.5
        Free fatty acids (as Oleic acid)                           %            0.75            1
        MIU (Moisture, Isolubles, Volatile matter)                 %             0.3            1
        Flash point                                                °F            250            –
        Phosphorous                                                %            0.02            –
        Iodine value                                          g/100g EE           –        130 - 1363
        Peroxide value                                          Meq/kg            –             2

        1,2 NOPA, 1999; Feed refers to common values for vegetable oil.
        3 Range for soybean oil.




25
5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products




     meet the still stringent formulation and feed quality guarantees. In general, soy oil
     usage in animal feed is reserved for specialty feeds often for those diets where highly
     digestible energy sources are needed. This is typically the case in young animal diets.


         Besides the basic products (soybeans, soybean oil, solvent extracted SBM and
     dehulled SBM) there are no published requirements or recommendations for the
     large array of other soy products that are marketed in various forms and conditions.
     This leaves it up to the user to set internal quality control measures. Those may
     include most of the criteria considered for the 3 main (basic) products but they
     will need to go beyond this and include a measure of anti-quality components
     (anti-nutritional factors – ANF), expanded amino acid profiles, in vitro digestibility
     and measures of microbial contamination. It is interesting to notice that no specific
     requirements have been published on the degree of microbial presence in soybeans
     or SBM. The end user will therefore have to apply industry norms as established by
     local governments or organizations.
                                                                                                   CONTENTS




26
6. SAMPLING SOY
        PRODUCTS
            The quality of any analysis carried out on feed or the feed ingredients stands or
        falls with the sampling tools and procedures. It seems evident - but is not necessarily
        recognized under routine operating conditions - that in order for any subsequent
        analytical work and interpretation to make sense, the collection of a correct,
        representative sample is fundamental.


            The objective of any sampling procedure, no matter what the subject to be
        evaluated may be, is collection of a truly representative sampling; a sample that
        represents to the greatest possible degree the composition and characteristics or
        the material to be analyzed or studied. This always leads to a compromise between
        cost of sampling and analysis and the degree or precision or confidence that is
        acceptable. Statistical tools have been developed to asses the minimal number of
        samples needed to achieve a given level of confidence regarding the composition of
        the ingredients (see Chapter 10). As the number of samples that have been collected
        and analyzed increases and variation for a particular nutrient and ingredient is better
        understood, a more precise number of samples and sampling frequency can be
        established. In the animal feed business, separate estimates of the number of
        samples per supplier are not only recommended but are routine procedures for
        many feed producers.


            The sampling techniques and procedures vary with the ingredient, the form or
        particle size of the ingredient, the conditioning and size of the consignment,
        methods of loading or unloading and storage conditions. The soy products that are
        used in animal feeds cover the entire range of physical forms from seeds to flakes
        and powder and sampling methods will therefore need to be adapted to the specific
        ingredient that enters a feed plant. Details to this extent need to be included in
        quality control (QC) procedures and do now appear routinely on QC documents.
        These techniques are fairly standard throughout the world and a detailed description
        of sampling techniques for grains and seeds have been provided by Herrman (2001).
        They apply to the majority of the soy products, in bag or bulk. Also NOPA has
        published basic rules for the sampling of soybean meal at vessel loading facilities
        using an automatic sampling device (see Appendix 3 - 6). These procedures are
        practical and can be implemented under almost any condition or operating
        procedure. A small degree of local adaptation may be necessary and may even be
        advisable to assure the collection of a truly representative sample. The experience



27
6. Sampling Soy Products




     and training of the samplers and persons in charge of the quality program will
     determine to a large extent the efficacy of the sampling program and thus the
     precise way to sample.


         Prior to sampling soybean products a sampling scheme or frequency has to be
     established. For a given ingredient this will depend to a large extent on the supplier
     and the information received prior to delivery. Additional considerations are
     laboratory capacity and availability, analytical cost, size of the consignment and
     the use of the soy product (in which feed it will used as an ingredient and at which
     percentage). In general, random sampling of different consignments (corrected for
     experience or prior knowledge about the supplier and ingredient) is combined
     with systematic sampling of the vessel, truck or container. To this purpose a pre-
     determined sampling grid is established. Details on the sampling of open containers
     with soybean products are taken from Herrman (2001) and GIPSA (1995) and are
     summarized in Appendix 3- 6. A first, rapid evaluation of the material to be sampled
     and of the sample is considered part of the sampling procedure. The total load (bags,
     container or carrier) is evaluated for homogeneity and possible local damage during
     loading or transport. In the case of a homogeneous delivery a pre-established
     sampling grid is applied and samples are collected accordingly (Appendix 3A).
     Separate sampling schemes have been developed to allow sampling of sound
     versus damaged areas (Appendix 3B).


         The tools that are used to sample depend on the material and form in which the
     ingredient has been transported. While automatic sampling of trucks or containers is
     increasingly implemented, hand-sampling remains a dominant means of obtaining
     sample of soy products. In the case of hand- sampling, slotted grain probes can be
     used to correctly sample soy beans and meals from a bag or a container (Appendix 4
     - Figure 1A). Tapered bag triers (Appendix 4 - Figure 1B) are used to sample powder
     and granular material, such as SPC and SPI from bags. For the sampling of soybeans
     or soybean meals from a conveyer belt or a discharging truck, a Pelican Probe
     sampler can be used (Appendix 4 - Figure 1D). The sampler is pulled through a
     stream of falling grain or meal, collecting a sample into a leather bag. NOPA has
     established special procedures for sampling soybean meals at vessel loading facilities
     (Appendix 6).


         The sampling of oil follows principles of sampling of other liquid feed
     ingredients. A bomb or zone sampler (Appendix 4 - Figure 1 C) is used to collect
     liquids such as soy oil from bulk containers. This sampler consists of a closed cylinder
     (30 to 40 cm long by 4.5 to 7.5 cm in diameter) which is lowered at pre-defined



28
6. Sampling Soy Products




     places in an oil tanker and filled with a 100 to 1000 ml sample of oil. Drums are
     sampled using a glass or stainless steel tube 1 – 1.5 cm in diameter and 50 – 100 cm
     long (Herrmann, 2001). A minimum of 500 ml sample of liquid must be obtained for
     storage and sub-sampling.


         The size of the sample depends on the homogeneity of the load (or lack thereof ),
     and - again - previous experience is of importance. A larger sample should be
     collected than that what is ultimately retained for further analysis and storage
     (for the minimal legally required period). A minimum sample size of 2 kg is
     recommended. In order to reduce the sample to the minimal required size, the
     sample is passed through a gated riffle sample splitter (25 mm riffles) or a Boerner
     divider (Appendix 6 - Figure 2 A and B respectively). This is done repeatedly until
     the sample is homogeneous. A sub-sample (minimum 500 g) is obtained for further
     analysis and storage.


         The sample obtained prior to reduction as well as the final sample is rapidly
     evaluated for test or specific weight and a number of physical and organoleptic
     characteristics. The reduced sample is divided in two portions of roughly equal size
     (250 g). Both are stored in airtight containers. One container is dispatched to the
     laboratory for further analysis; the second container is stored in a dry storage area,
     reducing to a minimum any type of chemical changes due to deterioration as the
     sample may be used for subsequent analysis in the case of claims.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS




29
7. PHYSICAL EVALUATION
        and EQUIPMENT
             Following the sampling, three types of evaluations are carried out on soybean
        products. These are: Physical, Chemical and Microbiological. The Physical examination
        of the material aims at establishing the general soundness of the product, its origin
        and a rapid, general approximation of nutritive quality. This is a series of tests the
        merchandise has to pass in order to be accepted by the buyer. The chemical analysis
        will establish the nutritive value of the product. The specific analysis carried out may
        differ according to future use (animal species). Results of these analyses aim at
        providing the basis for a detailed nutritional profile possibly resulting in adaptations
        in the formulation matrix. As such they establish the maximum and minimum level of
        use in a feed as well as a precise price: quality relationship for the ingredient and the
        individual nutrient supplied by the ingredient. The micro-biological evaluation
        intends to reveal any specific microbial, fungal or yeast contamination. It mainly
        refers to levels of salmonella and specific mycotoxins (mainly zearalenone and
        ochratoxins). Exceeding pre-set (often legal) limits will lead to a rejection of the
        material for further use or modifications in the inclusion level and/or the production
        technology. All measures - physical, chemical and biological – when found to be
        outside the contractual or legal limits may lead to claims and or changes in the
        contractual agreement.


             Soybean products are evaluated for a number of physical and organoleptic
        criteria. A first evaluation of this type is carried out prior to sampling, but is repeated
        on the original sample. In general a vessel, container, truck or bag is inspected
        before unloading and a sample is taken. Only when the merchandise is considered
        acceptable - upon general evaluation and a rapid analysis of the sample - will
        unloading proceed. This inspection approaches the more detailed physical evaluation
        of the sample and requires a certain level of expertise of the quality control person.
        Inspection criteria should be part of a pre-established quality system. Most important
        are those referring to the physical characteristics provided in Tables 5 and 7.
        More stringent in-house standards or requirements may apply. At this stage the
        important criteria for whole soybeans and soybean meals are: contamination or
        foreign materials, bulk density, texture, particle size or screen analysis, color and odor.


            The latter, color and odor are rapidly evaluated on the entire load by a trained
        person. They are the first evaluation but are of crucial importance. Deviations from
        the standard colors indicate excessive contamination with foreign material or
        excessive or inadequate heat treatment. Deviations from the characteristic odor may



30
7. Physical Evaluation and Equipment




     confirm the visual observations but will also provide a first idea of the past storage
     conditions, contamination with other substances (especially liquids) and the
     excessive presence of molds.


          All further physical evaluations should be carried out at a plant laboratory or
     special QC area. A first appreciation of the degree of contamination with foreign
     material is obtained visually. A detailed count is obtained from the sample by
     physically (hand-) separating a sub sample and weighing the various fractions. It is
     recommended at this stage to take a sample for light microscopic analysis. Evaluation
     of a sub-sample under a microscope permits a more detailed analysis of the material
     and the contaminants. In general a wide field stereoscopic microscope with a
     magnification of 20 to 40 times is adequate. Additional equipment required for
     microscopic evaluation is a microscope-illuminator, forceps or probe and in the case
     of large clumps a mortar and pestle. Precise analysis of contamination is possible
     with a microscope but requires an experienced operator and may require additional
     techniques specific to light microscopy in feed analysis.


         Bulk density is measured by taking a liter of material (in an official container –
     kettle) and weighing the content. Bulk density (expressed in lbs/bu, g/100 cc or
     kg/hl) is a first appreciation of various attributes of the received ingredient namely:
     the moisture content, texture and level of damage or contamination. The range of
     required bulk density (test weight) for soybeans increases with the grade from
     63 kg/hl for grade 4 to 72 kg per hl for grade 1 (Table 5). For soybean meals a single
     range of 57 to 64 kg/hl is recommended (Table 7). The importance of this measure
     has come under some criticism, especially from foreign operators. While it is widely
     used in North America, only a minor number of processors or compounders outside
     the USA use test weight on a regular basis. The equipment required for these
     measures is relatively simple. Besides the kettle used to measure bulk density, a
     balance with a minimum accuracy of + 0.1 grams is required (ASAE, 1993).


         Texture may be considered as primarily a visual observation (verifying the
     absence of lumps, cakes or coarse particles). A first rapid evaluation can be carried
     out by hand-sieving a sample in a 0.525 Tyler (0.530US standard equivalent; 13.5 mm)
     sieve. For a more precise and objective estimation of particle size (especially the
     presence of small or dust particles) an analysis with an official particle separator
     needs to be conducted. Special equipment for particle size separation exists.
     Generally, a RoTap Sieve Shaker is used for this purpose. This allows separation of
     particles to a size down to 150 micron (0.0059 inch) covering adequately
     requirements for standards advised for soybean meal (see Table 7).
                                                                                                CONTENTS




31
8. CHEMICAL ANALYSES
            The nutritional quality of a feed ingredient, and thus soybean products, is
        dependent on the content of several chemical elements and compounds which
        carry a nutritional function. These elements and compounds are referred to as feed
        nutrients. When feeding animals, nutritionists select a combination of ingredients
        that supply the right amounts of a series of feed nutrients. Therefore, when preparing
        rations, ingredients are treated as carriers of feed nutrients. Thus, the quality and
        value of a given ingredient will largely depend on the concentration of its nutrients.
        Because determining the content of all feed nutrients is extraordinarily time
        consuming and almost impossible, nutritionists use different systems for estimating
        or approximating the nutritional value of a feed. The most common system is the
        so-called Weende system (developed in Germany more than 100 years ago).
        The system measures water or humidity, crude protein, crude fat, crude fiber, ash and
        nitrogen-free extract. This method has been proven to be useful for assessing the
        value of ingredients, however, as with any system, it has a number of shortcomings.
        The most important one refers to the crude fiber fraction (and consequently the
        nitrogen-free extract which is not directly determined but calculated by difference).
        Nowadays, as will be discussed later in this chapter, there are improved methods to
        determine nutrients within the fibrous fraction of soybean products.

             Soybean meal is one of the most consistent (least variable) and highest quality
        protein source for animal nutrition. However, some variation does occur in both
        the nutrient concentration (chemical determination) and quality (digestibility or
        bioavailability) among different samples and sources of soybean meal. These
        variations can be attributed to the different varieties of soybeans, growing
        conditions, storage conditions and length, and processing methods. Because
        soybean products, especially soybean meals, are such an important fraction of feeds
        (in poultry they can account for 35% of the total formula) it is crucial to monitor the
        quality of soybean products. Small changes in quality might translate into important
        changes in animal performance due to their high inclusion rate in the ration.
                                                                                                  CONTENTS




        8.1 Moisture
        Moisture content is one of the simplest nutrients to determine, but at the same time
        is one of the most important. The moisture content of soybean products is important
        for three main reasons:



32
8. Chemical Analyses




       1. To establish the appropriate acquisition price based on the concentration of the
          nutrients on a dry matter basis and thus not paying more than necessary for
          water.
       2. A wrong determination of moisture will affect the rest of the nutrients when
          expressed on a dry matter basis, potentially leading to erroneous
          concentrations of nutrients in formulated diets.
       3. To assure that mold growth cannot occur.

        In general, samples with moisture content above 12.5% present a high risk of
     molding, and should be accepted with caution and correspondent penalties for
     quality. However, moisture is not evenly distributed across the sample particles.
     A sample batch containing an average of 15.5 percent moisture may, for example,
     contain some particles with 10 percent moisture and others with 20 percent
     moisture. The particles with the highest moisture content are the ones most
     susceptible to mold growth. Consequently, at the early stages of development mold
     growth is often concentrated in specific areas of a batch of soy products underlining
     the importance of good sampling methods. To determine moisture content it is
     necessary to have a forced-air drying oven, capable of maintaining 130°C (± 2°C),
     porcelain crucibles or aluminum dishes and an analytical balance with a precision
     of 0.01 mg.

       The official method (AOAC, 1990) to determine the moisture content of soybean
     products consists of:
     • Hot weighing porcelain crucibles and registering their tare.
     • Placing 2 ± 0.01 g of ground sample in a porcelain crucible and drying
       at 95-100°C to a constant weight (usually about 5 hours is sufficient).
     • Hot weighing crucible and sample.
     • Calculating the moisture content as a percentage of original weight:
                         Original weight – Final weight
        Moisture, % =                                    x 100
                                Original weight
        and
        Dry matter, % = 100 –moisture, %

         An alternative, but less accurate method that has the advantage of being fast and
     simple is the determination of moisture with a microwave. In this method a sample of
     100 g is placed in a microwave oven for about 5 minutes. It is important not to run
     the microwave for more than 5 minutes to avoid burning the sample. Reweigh and
     record the weight, and place the sample in the microwave for 2 more minutes.
     Repeat the process until the change in weight is less than 0.5 g than the previous
     one. This weight would be considered the dry or final weight. The calculations are
     performed as indicated above.



33
8. Chemical Analyses




         In feed plants, for routine QC procedures, moisture is often determined by the
     Brabender test. Like the microwave method, this test is rapid, simple and considered
     less accurate than the oven dried reference method. This test requires a small,
     semi-automatic Brabender moisture tester, a scale and aluminum dishes. For most
     soy products the thermo-regulator of the Brabender moisture tester is set to 140°C
     with the blower on. Allow the unit to stabilize (± 0.5°C). Tare an aluminum dish on
     the analytical balance. Weigh ~10 g of sample in the dish and record exact weight.
     Place the dish (or dishes, up to 10) in the oven, close door. Start timing when
     temperature returns to 140°C and then dry for one hour. Re-weigh the sample hot
     after the specified drying time. Calculate moisture with equation above.
     Moisture can also be determined by near infrared spectroscopy (see Chapter 9).
                                                                                              CONTENTS




     8.2 Ash
        Ash determination requires a muffle furnace, porcelain crucibles, and an
     analytical balance (precision of 0.01 mg).

         The ash content of soybean products is determined by weighing 2 ± 0.1 g of
     sample in a tared porcelain crucible and placing it in a furnace at 600°C for 2 hours.
     The oven is turned off, allowed to return to room temperature and the crucible plus
     ash weighed. To obtain the ash content of the sample, the final weight should be
     divided by the initial weight and then multiplied by 100 to express it in a percentage
     basis. The ash content is thus calculated as:
                      Final weight
        Ash, % =                      x 100
                    Original weight

         Monitoring ash content is not only a way to assess the nutritional quality of
     soybean products but also to detect possible contaminations, especially soil.
     For example, the ash content of soybean meal should not exceed 7%.
                                                                                               CONTENTS




     8.3 Protein
         Protein is no doubt the most important and frequently analyzed nutrient in soy
     products. The protein content of soybean products is estimated as total nitrogen in
     the sample multiplied by 6.25. This assumes that protein in soybean products has
     16% nitrogen; however, the actual amount of nitrogen in soybean protein is 17.5%.
     Nevertheless, like for most other ingredients used in feed formulation, the standard
     value of 6.25 is used. Determining crude protein from nitrogen content has the


34
8. Chemical Analyses




     drawback that part of the nitrogen present in soybean products is considered to
     be part of proteins (or amino acids), which is not the case as there is nitrogen in
     the form of ammonia, vitamins and other non-protein compounds. However, the
     nitrogen fraction that is not in the form of amino acids or protein in soybean
     products is very small and corrections for the difference in N content in soybean
     products relative to other ingredients are carried out at the amino acid level.

         The most accurate method for determining the nitrogen content of soybean
     products is the Kjeldahl method. This method consists of digesting the sample in
     sulfuric acid (H2SO4) and a copper and titanium catalyst to convert all nitrogen into
     ammonia (NH3). Then, the NH3 is distilled and titrated with acid. The amount of
     nitrogen in the sample is proportional to the amount of acid needed to titrate the
     NH3. The Kjeldahl method requires:
     • A digestion unit that permits digestion temperatures in the range of 360 – 380°C
        for periods up to 3 hours.
     • Special Kjeldahl flasks (500 – 800 ml).
     • A distillation unit that guarantees air-tight distillation from the flask with the
        digested sample into 500 ml Erlenmeyer flasks (distillation receiving flask).
     • A buret to measure exactly the acid that needs to be titrated in the receiving flask
        to neutralize the collected ammonia hydroxide.
     • All Kjeldahl installations require acid-vapor removing devices. This may be by a
        fume removal manifold or exhaust-fan system, water re-circulation or a fume
        cupboard.

     The chemical needs for the procedure are as follows:
     • Kjeldahl catalyst: contains 10 g of K2SO4 plus .30 g of CuSO4.
     • Reagent grade, concentrated H2SO4
     • Mixed indicator solution: 3125g methyl red and .2062 g methylene blue in 250 ml
       of 95% ethanol (stirred for 24 hours).
     • Boric Acid Solution: 522 g U.S.P. boric acid in 18 l of deionized water. Add 50 ml of
       mixed indicator solution and allow stirring overnight.
     • Zinc: powdered or granular, 10 mesh.
     • Sodium hydroxide: 50% wt/vol. aqueous (saturated).
     • Standardized .1 N HCl solution.

     The procedure is as follows:
     • Weigh a 1 g sample and transfer into an ash free filter paper, and fold it to prevent
       loss of sample.
     • Introduce one catalyst in the Kjeldahl flask.
     • Add 25 ml of reagent grade, concentrated H2SO4 to each Kjeldahl flask.
     • Start the digestion by pre-heating the digester block to 370°C, and then place the
       Kjeldahl flaks on it for 3 hours.
     • After removing flasks from the digester, and once they are cool, add 400 ml of
       deionized water.



35
8. Chemical Analyses




     •   Prepare the receiving flask for steam distillation by adding 75 ml of prepared boric
         acid solution to a clean 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask and place on distillation rack shelf.
         Place delivery tube from condenser into the flask.
     •   Turn the water on the distillation system and all the burners on.
     •   Prepare the sample for distillation by adding approximately .5 g of powdered zinc
         to flask, mix thoroughly and allow to settle.
     •   After digest has settled, measure 100 ml of saturated, aqueous NaOH (50% wt/vol)
         into a graduated cylinder. Slant Kjeldahl flask containing prepared digest solution
         about 45° from vertical position. Pour NaOH slowly into flask so that a layer forms
         at the bottom. All these operations need to be performed wearing gloves and a
         face mask.
     •   Attach flask to distillation-condenser assembly. Do not mix flask contents until
         firmly attached. Holding flask firmly, making sure cork is snugly in place, swirl
         contents to mix completely. Immediately set flask on heater. Withdraw receiving
         flask from distillation-condenser delivery tube momentarily to allow pressure to
         equalize and prevent back suction.
     •   Continue distillation until approximately 250 ml of distillate has been collected in
         receiving flask.
     •   Turn heater off. Remove receiving flask partially and rinse delivery tube with
         deionized water, collecting the rinse water into receiving flask.
     •   Replace receiving flask with a beaker containing 400 ml of deionized water.
         This water will be sucked back into the Kjeldahl flask as it cools, washing out the
         condenser tube.
     •   Titrate green distillate back to original purple using 0.1 N HCl and record volume
         of acid used in titration.
     •   It is recommended to use a couple of blanks and controls or standards on every
         run. Blanks - Kjeldahl reagents generally contain small amounts of nitrogen, which
         must be measured and corrected for in calculations. Prepare blanks for dry
         samples by folding one ash free filter paper and placing it into the Kjeldahl flask.
         Treat blanks exactly like samples to be analyzed.

     Standards: weigh two 0.1 g samples of urea, transfer into an ash free filter paper and
     treat exactly like the rest of samples. Calculate percent recovery of nitrogen from
     urea and make sure the obtained result is the one expected.

     The calculation is:
                              (ml of acid – ml of blank) x normality x .014 x 6.25 x100
         Crude protein, % =                                                             x 100
                                                   Original weight

         A more recent and alternatively way to determine nitrogen content is by the
     Dumas method. The method requires very little sample but the sample size will differ
     with the type of ingredient to be analyzed. Sample size depends largely on the
     expected level of crude protein in the material. In the case of soybean products a
     sample size of 50 – 150 mg is recommended (AOAC, 2000). The sample is placed in a


36
8. Chemical Analyses




     tin foil cup for subsequent burning at 850 - 900°C to determine the amount of N2
     by nitrometer. This method has the advantage over the Kjeldahl that is faster, better
     suited for automation and creates little residues. However, the Kjeldahl method
     continues to be the reference method. Total Dumas nitrogen can be slightly higher
     than values obtained with the classical Kjeldahl method. However, for most purposes,
     especially in the case of soy products, the difference is extremely small.

        Crude protein can also be predicted by NIR, with an acceptable relative standard
     deviation of about 0.42% (see Chapter 9).
                                                                                                CONTENTS




     8.4 Protein quality
         Protein quality is a function of the amino acid profile and the proportion of each
     amino acid that is available to the animal. When soybean meals are intended for
     monogastric feeding it is well known that proper heat processing has a dramatic
     positive effect on amino acid digestibility, consequence of the destruction of anti-
     nutritional factors (Table 1). However, over-heating can result in a decrease in both
     concentration (Table 9) and digestibility of several amino acids, especially lysine.
     The reduction in digestibility is due to the Maillard reaction which binds free amino
     acids to free carbonyl groups (i.e., from carbohydrates). The Maillard reaction-end
     products are not bio-available for all livestock species.


     Table 9
           Effect of heat processing on amino acid digestibility of raw
       soybeans in poultry (adapted from Anderson-Haferman et al., 1992)
       Autoclaving (minutes)         Lysine           Methionine          Threonine
                    0                  73                  65                  64
                    9                  78                  70                  68
                 18                    87                  86                  82


     Table 10
             Effect of heat-processing soybean meals on amino acid
                concentration (adapted from Parsons et al., 1992)
     Autoclaving (minutes)      Lysine %      Methionine %      Cystine % Threonine %
                0                  3.27            0.70            0.71             1.89
               20                  2.95            0.66            0.71             1.92
               40                  2.76            0.63            0.71             1.87

     There are several methods (Table 12-page 41) to determine protein quality of soybean
     products for monogastric species.
                                                                                                CONTENTS

37
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.4.1. Urease Index
       The urease index (AOCS, 1980) is the most common test used to evaluate the
     quality of the soybean processing treatment. The method requires a pH meter,
     volumetric flasks (250 ml), a small water bath that allows maintenance of
     temperature at 30°C for at least 30 minutes, test tubes and a pipette.

        The method determines the residual urease activity of soybean products as
     an indirect indicator to assess whether the anti-nutritional factors, such as trypsin
     inhibitors, present in soybeans have been destroyed by heat processing.
     Both enzymes, urease and trypsin inhibitor, are deactivated during heating.
     The laboratory method for urease involves mixing soybean meal with urea and
     water for one minute.
       Procedure:
       • Place 0.2 g of soybean sample in a test tube.
       • Add 10 ml of a urea solution (30 g of urea into 1 l of a buffer solution,
          composed of 4.45 g of Na2HPO4 and 3.4 g of KH2PO4).
       • Place the test tube in a water bath at 30°C for 30 minutes.
       • Determine pH and compare it with the original pH of the urea solution.

        The test measures the increase in pH consequence of the release of ammonia,
     which is alkaline, into the media arising from the breakdown of urea by the urease
     present in soybean products (urea is broken down into ammonia and carbon
     dioxide). Depending on the protocol used, the endpoint is determined differently.
     In the American Oil Chemists Society (AOCS, 1980) method, the endpoint is
     determined by measuring the increase in pH of the sample media. In the EEC
     method, the endpoint reflects the amount of acid required to maintain a constant
     static pH. Results of these two methods differ slightly from one another.

        The optimum pH increase is considered to be between 0.05 (McNaughton et al.,
     1980) and 0.20 (Waldroup et al., 1985). Usually, all overheated samples yield urease
     indexes below 0.05, but that does not imply that all samples with urease tests
     below 0.05 have been overheated. It is recommended that, when using soybean
     products for swine or poultry the increase in pH is not greater than 0.35 (Waldroup
     et al., 1985). Animal performance is severely impaired with urease indexes above
     1.75 pH units.

        The urease test is useful to determine whether the soybean has been
     sufficiently heated to deactivate anti-nutritional factors, but it is not a good
     indicator to assess whether the soybean product has received an excessive heat
     treatment.
                                                                                              CONTENTS




38
8. Chemical Analyses




       8.4.2. KOH Protein Solubility
       This method consists of determining the percentage of protein that is solubilized
       in a potassium hydroxide (KOH) solution (Araba and Dale, 1990). The method
       requires volumetric flasks (250 ml), a small magnetic stirrer, filtering funnels or a
       centrifuge, and the Kjeldahl equipment to measure nitrogen.
         Procedure:
         • Determine nitrogen content of soybean sample using official methods.
         • Place 1.5 g of soybean sample in 75 ml of a 0.2% KOH solution (.036 N,
            pH 12.5) and stir at 8,500 rpm for 20 minutes at a temperature of 22°C.
         • Then, about 50 ml is taken and immediately centrifuged at 2500 x g for
            15 minutes.
         • Take aliquot of about 10 ml to determine nitrogen content in the liquid
            fraction by Kjeldahl method.
         • The results are expressed as a percentage of the original nitrogen content
            of the sample.

          The KOH protein solubility is not sensitive enough to gauge the level of heat
       processing that a soybean product has undergone, but it is effective in
       differentiating overheated products from correctly processed ones.

     Table 11
             Effect of autoclaving soybean meal on chick performance
               (1-18 days), KOH protein solubility and urease activity
                        (adapted from Araba and Dale, 1990)
       Autoclaving        Weight                         KOH protein Urease Index
         (120°C)           gain          Feed : gain      solubility  (pH units
         minutes            g               ratio             %        change)
            0              450a             1.79c             86.0             0.03
             5             445a             1.87bc            76.3             0.02
            10             424a             1.83bc            74.0             0.00
            20             393b             1.89b             65.4             0.00
            40             316c             2.04b             48.1             0.00
            80             219d             2.55a             40.8             0.00

       a, b, c, d Means within a column with common superscripts are not significantly
       different (P < 0.05).

         The solubility values have been correlated with growth rates in poultry and swine
     (Lee and Garlich, 1992; Araba and Dale, 1990), with a clear decline in performance
     with solubility values below 72%. Raw soybeans and well heat-processed soybean
     products should have a protein solubility around 90% (that is 90% of the protein
     present in the product is solubilized in a KOH solution).
                                                                                                 CONTENTS

39
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.4.3. Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI)
        Among the available tests for determining protein quality in soybean products,
     the PDI is the simplest, most consistent, and most sensitive method. This test
     measures the solubility of soybean proteins in water and is probably the best
     adapted to all soy products. The PDI method measures the amount of soy protein
     dispersed in water after blending a sample with water in a high-speed blender.
     The water solubility of soybean protein can also be measured with a technique
     called Nitrogen Solubility Index (NSI). Thee two methods differ in the speed and
     vigor at which the water containing the soybean product is stirred. In animal
     nutrition the PDI method is used.

       Both methods require a blender (8,500 ppm), filtering funnels or a centrifuge,
     and the routine Kjeldahl equipment for N analysis.
       Procedure:
       • Determine nitrogen content of soy sample using official methods.
       • Place a 20 g sample of a soybean product in a blender.
       • Add 300 ml of deionized water at 30°C.
       • Stir at 8,500 rpm for 10 minutes (AOCS, 1993a).
       • Filter and centrifuge for 10 minutes at 1000g.
       • Analyze nitrogen content of the supernatant.
       • The results are expressed as a percentage of the original nitrogen content of
          the sample.

         The NSI method uses a 5 g soybean sample into 200 ml of water at 30°C
     stirred at 120 rpm for 120 minutes (AOCS, 1989). With either method, the final step
     consists of determining the nitrogen content of the liquid fraction and the results
     are expressed as a percentage of the original nitrogen content of the sample.

        Nowadays, most soybean producers and users of soy products advocate the
     PDI method as the best for assessing protein quality in soybean meals. Because
     this test is more recent it is often used as a complement to the urease and KOH
     solubility measurements. As a matter of fact, the PDI method has proven to be
     especially useful in determining the degree of under heating soybean meals to
     remove ANF. Furthermore, Batal et al. (2000) described a greater consistency in
     the results of heating of soy flakes obtained with the PDI procedure than those
     from urease or protein solubility. Since the work of Batal et al. (2000) which
     recommended PDI values below 45 % recommendations have shifted slightly
     under the influence of practical experience. Consequently, current
     recommendations are for soybean meals with PDI values between 15 and 30 %,
     KOH solubilities between 70 and 85 % and a urease index of 0.3 pH unit change
     or below. These meals are considered adequately heat processed, without
     under- nor over-processing.



40
8. Chemical Analyses




     Table 12
                A brief description of available methods to determine
                           protein quality of soybean meal

      Urease Index
        1. Mix 0.2 g of soybean meal with 10 ml of urea solution (3% of urea)
        2. Place in 30°C water bath for 30 minutes
        3. Determine pH
        4. Calculate pH increase (final pH - initial pH)

      KOH Protein Solubility
        1. Mix 1.5 g soybean meal with 75 ml of 0.2% KOH solution and stir for
           20 minutes
        2. Centrifuge at 2,500 x g for 20 minutes
        3. Measure soluble nitrogen in the liquid fraction

      Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI)
        1. Mix 20 g of soybean meal with 300 ml of deionized distilled water
        2. Blend at 8,500 RPM for 20 minutes at a temperature of 22°C.
        3. Centrifuge (1000 x g for 10 minutes) or filter and measure nitrogen content
           of the liquid fraction

      Nitrogen Solubility Index (NSI)
        1. Mix 5 g of soybean meal with 200 ml of water
        2. Stir at 120 RPM for 120 minutes at 30°C
        3. Centrifuge at 1,500 RPM and measure soluble nitrogen in the liquid fraction

      Absorbance at 420 nm
        1. The supernatant (if centrifuged) or the liquid fraction (if filtered) from the
           PDI technique is diluted 80 times.
        2. Filter through .2 µm pore size filter.
        3. Read the absorbance of the clear filtrate at 420 nm with a spectrophotometer.

                                                               (Adapted from Dudley-Cash, W.A, 1999)



           All these assays will give slightly different results depending on the particle size
       of the sample used, temperature of the solutions and centrifugation speeds and
       times. For example, protein solubility indexes will yield greater values as mean
       particle size decreases (Parsons et al., 1991; Whitle and Araba, 1992). Therefore, it
       is recommended to grind the sample at a consistent mesh size (1 mm), and to
       maintain (at least within the same laboratory and company) rigorously the same
       duration for treating the samples in the respective solutions and for
       centrifugation.
                                                                                                       CONTENTS




41
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.4.4. Protein quality in ruminants
       For ruminants, protein quality of soybean meals will depend on its rumen
     degradation and its intestinal digestion. The trypsin inhibitor factors present in
     soybeans are irrelevant in ruminants, as they are mostly inactivated in the rumen
     (Caine et al., 1998).

        Amino acids are supplied to the duodenum of ruminants by microbial protein
     synthesized in the rumen, undegraded dietary protein, and endogenous protein.
     Microbial protein usually accounts for a substantial portion of the total amino
     acids entering the small intestine. Ruminal degradation of protein from dietary
     feed ingredients is one of the most important factors influencing intestinal amino
     acid supply to ruminants. Soybean meal is extensively degraded in the rumen,
     providing an excellent source of degradable intake protein for the ruminal
     microbes, but not enough undegradable protein to meet the demands of high
     producing ruminants. Because soybeans contain a high quality protein with a
     good amino acid profile and they are highly digestible in the small intestine,
     various processing methods and treatments have been used to increase its
     undegradable protein value. The most common methods for protecting soybean
     proteins from ruminal degradation are heat application, incorporating chemicals
     such as formaldehyde or a combination of heat and chemicals such as
     lignosulfonate combined with xylose.

        To assess the extent of protein degradation of a soybean product several
     techniques are available.
                                                                                             CONTENTS



      8.4.4.1. In situ technique

        Although this technique is relatively expensive, labor intensive, and requires
      access to rumen cannulated animals, it is very useful to determine the rate of
      degradation of proteins from soybeans. This technique requires consecutive
      times of ruminal incubation of the samples under study so that the rate of
      protein degradation can be determined. The in situ technique determines
      degradation of the insoluble fraction only. The soluble fraction is considered to
      be totally and instantaneously degraded. To accurately predict rate of protein
      degradation, sufficient time points must be included in early as well as later
      stages of degradation (Figure 2).




42
8. Chemical Analyses




     Figure 2
     Protein disappearance from soybean meal and curve peeling processa


                               100 –




                                70 –
       CP remaining, % of CP




                                                                                   Crude protein disappearance
                                                                                   Rapidly degradable pool
                                50 –                                               Slowly degradable pool
                                                                                   Observed values


                                20 –




                                 0 –I                 I                  I                  I                     I
                                    0                20                40                  60                    80
                                                                  Time ( hours)

                                                                                                Adapted from Bach et al. (1998).


                                After ruminal incubation, the data are fitted to different models to determine the
                               rate of protein degradation in the rumen. Bach et al. (1998) studied the effects of
                               different mathematical approaches (curve peeling, linear and nonlinear regression)
                               to estimate the rate of protein degradation in soybean samples and concluded
                               that using curve peeling (Shipley and Clark, 1972) allowed for the best separation
                               of the different protein pools in soybean proteins.                                          CONTENTS




                                8.4.4.2. In vitro technique

                                 There are several in vitro methods that require the use of rumen fluid, such as the
                               Tilley and Terry (1963) technique, or the in vitro inhibitor technique (Broderick,
                               1987). Like the in situ technique, these two methods present the disadvantage that
                               they require access to cannulated animals. The in vitro technique consists of
                               incubating a small feed or ingredient sample with strained rumen fluid and a
                               buffer under anaerobic conditions in a test tube or container. The test tube or
                               container is located in a water bath that is maintained at 37 – 38°C throughout the
                               incubation.



43
8. Chemical Analyses




       At regular, pre-determined intervals a sample is removed from the incubator,
       centrifuged and analyzed for dry matter and nitrogen disappearance (using the
       Kjeldahl method). Data are analyzed as described for the in situ technique.

         There are a number of enzymatic techniques which have the important
       advantage that they are completely independent of the animal, and should result
       in less variation, making this technique relatively simple to standardize.

         The most common enzymatic techniques are the Ficin technique (Poos-Floyd et
       al., 1985) and the Streptomyces griseus technique (Nocek et al., 1983). The biological
       value of the results from these techniques may be limited due to incomplete
       enzymatic activity compared with the ruminal environment. Mahadevan et al.
       (1987) found large differences when comparing digestion of different protein
       sources using protease from Streptomyces griseus with an extract of ruminal
       microbial enzymes. Chamberlain and Thomas (1979) reported that, although rate
       constants can be calculated using these proteases, these results do not always
       rank proteins in the same order as degradabilities estimated in vivo. When using
       enzymatic techniques to predict microbial fermentation in the rumen, it is crucial
       that the enzyme concentration is sufficient to saturate the substrate.
       Some researchers have attempted to use near infrared reflectance spectroscopy
       (NIR) to estimate protein degradation of feedstuffs in the rumen. Tremblay et al.
       (1996) evaluated NIR as a technique for estimating ruminal CP degradability of
       roasted soybeans and found a coefficient of determination between NIR and
       undegraded protein estimated by the inhibitor in vitro technique of .70. However,
       the use of NIR for this purpose would require continuous access to cannulated
       animals to maintain the prediction equations.
                                                                                                CONTENTS




     8.5. Amino Acids
         Determining the amino acid composition of proteins is essential to characterize
     their biological value. The greater the proportions of essential amino acids the
     greater the biological value of a protein.

       The amino acid analysis requires the use of high performance liquid
     chromatography (HPLC) or the combination of commercial kits and gas
     chromatography (GC). The analysis involves four steps:
     • Hydrolysis (using HCl or barium hydroxide); this breaks the peptide bonds and
       releases the free amino acids.
     • Separation; column chromatography separates amino acids on the basis of their
       functional groups.


44
8. Chemical Analyses




     •   Derivatization; a chromogenic reagent enhances the separation and spectral
         properties of the amino acids and is required for sensitive detection.
     •   Detection; a data processing system compares the resulting chromatogram,
         based on peak area or peak height, to previously known and calibrated standard.

         HPLC analysis for amino acids is a highly specialized laboratory procedure
     requiring skilled personnel and sophisticated equipment. For amino acid analysis the
     sample preparation is critical and differs with the type of ingredient and the amino
     acid of major interest. Most amino acids can be hydrolyzed by a 23 or 24 h hydrolysis
     in HCl (6 mol/l). For sulfur amino acids hydrolysis should be preceded by performic
     oxidation and for tryptophane a hydrolysis with barium hydroxide (1.5 mol/l) for 20 h
     is required. In general it is recommended to use a specialized laboratory to conduct
     the amino acid analysis.
                                                                                                  CONTENTS




     8.6. Crude Fiber
        The original method was intended to quantify the materials in the feed that form
     part of the cell wall and provide relatively low energy as their digestibility is usually
     low. Thus, the technique was meant to quantify cellulose, certain hemicelluloses and
     lignin. However, later it was shown that crude fiber also included pectines, and that
     not all the lignin was recovered in the crude fiber fraction. The major disadvantage
     of this technique is that hemi-cellulose, lignin and pectines are inconsistently
     accounted for.

     The method requires the following reagents:
     • Sulfuric acid solution, .255N, 1.25 g of H2SO4/100 ml.
     • Sodium hydroxide solution, .313N, 1.25 g of NaOH/100 ml, free of Na2CO3.
     • Alcohol - Methanol, isopropyl alcohol, 95% ethanol, reagent ethanol.
     • Antifoam agent (n-octanol).

     Equipment:
     • Digestion apparatus.
     • Ashing dishes.
     • Desiccator.
     • Filtering device (Buchner filter).
     • Suction filter: To accommodate filtering devices. Attach suction flask to trap
       in line with vacuum source.
     • Vacuum source with valve to break or control vacuum.



45
8. Chemical Analyses




     The procedure described by the AOAC (1980) can be summarized as follows:
     • Weigh 2 g of sample (A). Remove moisture and fat using ether (removing fat is not
       necessary if the sample has less than 1% ether extract).
     • Transfer to a 600 ml beaker, avoiding fiber contamination from paper or brush.
       Add approximately 1 g of prepared asbestos, 200 ml of boiling 1.25% H2SO4 ,
       and 1 drop of diluted antifoam. Avoid using excessive antifoam, as it may
       overestimate fiber content.
     • Place beaker on digestion apparatus with pre-adjusted hot plate and boil for
       30 minutes, rotating beaker periodically to prevent solids from adhering to sides.
     • Remove beaker and filter as follows:
       – Filter through Buchner filter and rinse beaker with 50 to 75 ml of boiling water.
       – Repeat with three 50 ml portions of water and apply vacuum until the sample
         is dried. Remove mat and residue by snapping bottom of Buchner against top,
         while covering stem with the thumb and replace in beaker.
       – Add 200 ml of boiling 1.25% NaOH, and boil 30 more minutes.
     • Remove beaker and filter as described above. Wash with 25 ml of boiling 1.25%
        H2SO4, three 50 ml portions of H2O, and 25 ml of alcohol.
     • Dry mat and residue for 2 h at 130°C.
     • Remove, place in desiccator, cool, weigh and record (B).
     • Remove mat and residue, and transfer to an ashing dish.
     • Ignite for 30 minutes at 600°C. Cool in desiccator and reweigh (C).
     • Calculate crude fiber content on dry matter basis as:
                         weight after acid and base extraction (B) – weight after ashing(C)
      Crude fiber, % =                                                                        x 100
                                        Original weight (A) x % dry matter
                                                                                                        CONTENTS




     8.7. Neutral Detergent Fiber (NDF)
         Neutral detergent fiber (NDF) accounts for the cellulose, hemicellulose and lignin
     content of soybean products. These fractions represent, most of the fiber or cell wall
     fractions of soybean products, with the exemption that pectines are not included in
     the NDF fraction.

         The neutral detergent fiber (NDF) was first described by Goering and Van Soest
     (1970) and later modified by Van Soest et al. (1991). The NDF determination requires
     a refluxing apparatus 600 ml and Berzelius beakers.
     The technique is as follows.
        Reagents:
        • NDF solution: dilute 30 g of sodium lauryl sulfate, 18.61 g of disodium
           dihydrogen ethylene diamine tetra acetic dihydrate, 6.81 g of sodium borate


46
8. Chemical Analyses




           decahydrate, 4.56 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate, 10 m of triethylene
           glycol 65 in 1 l of deionized water.
       •   Acetone.

       The Goering and Van Soest (1970) procedure for NDF determination is as follows:
       • Weigh 0.5 to 1.0 g sample (to precision of ± 0.0001 g) in a 600-ml Berzelius
          beaker (A).
       • Add 100 ml of neutral detergent fiber solution.
       • Heat to boiling (5 to 10 min). Decrease heat as boiling begins.
          Boil for 60 minutes.
       • After 60 minutes, filter contents onto a pre-weighted, ash-free filter paper (B)
          under vacuum. Use low vacuum at first, and increase it as more force is needed.
       • Rinse contents with hot water, filter, and repeat twice.
       • Wash twice with acetone.
       • Dry at 100°C in forced air oven for 24 h.
       • Cool filter paper and sample residue in desiccator; weigh and record (C).
       • Fold filter paper and place in a pre-weighted aluminum pan.
       • Ash in muffle at 500°C for 4 h.
       • Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record (D).
     The NDF content on a dry matter basis is then calculated as:
                 (Weight of NDF residue, C – Weight of filter paper, B) - Weight after ashing, D
      NDF, % =                                                                                     x100
                                 Original weight of sample, A x % Dry matter

      For the Ankom system the following procedure applies:
      • Number filter bags.
      • Weigh 0.5 g sample in filter bag, record exact weight (± 0.0001 g) (A) and one
        blank bag (included in extraction to determine blank bag correction).
      • Seal bags within 0.5 cm from the open edge.
      • Spread sample uniformly inside the filter bag by shaking and lightly flicking the
        bag to eliminate clumping.
      • Pre-extract soybean products containing more than10% fat with acetone
      • Place bags containing samples in a 500 ml bottle with a screw cap. Fill the bottle
        with acetone into bottle to cover bags (at least 15 ml/bag) and secure top.
        Swirl gently after 3 and 6 min has elapsed and allow bags to soak for a total of
        10 min. Repeat with fresh acetone.
      • Pour out acetone, press bags gently between two layers of absorbent paper, and
        place bags in a hood to air dry for at least 15 min.
      • Place 24 bags in the suspender, putting 3 bags per basket.
      • Stack baskets on center post with each basket rotated 120°C.
      • Include one standard and one blank.
      • Place duplicate samples in separate batches and in reverse order of top to bottom


47
8. Chemical Analyses




       •  Bring center post with bags in the vessel and agitate lightly to remove air.
       •  Close the vessel and boil at 100°C for 60 minutes.
       •  Drain liquid from vessel.
       •  Add 2 liter of boiling water to vessel along with 4 ml thermamyl and continue
          to boil for 5 minutes. Drain and repeat this part of the procedure with 2 ml of
           thermamyl.
       • Drain, remove bags and squeeze excess water carefully.
       • Clean bags with acetone and again squeezing bags carefully.
       • Leave bags to air dry for 30 minutes.
       • Dry bags for 8 hours at 103°C and cool afterwards in desiccator. Weigh (B).
       • Weigh blank bag (C).
       • Ash bags on pre-registered and weighed aluminum pan (D); Db for blank) for
          6 hours at 550°C in muffle furnace, cool, place in desiccator and weigh blank (E)
       and pans with samples (F).
     The NDF content (dry matter basis) is then calculated as:
                (B – C) – (F –D) – (E – Db)
     NDF, % =                               x100
                   A x % Dry matter
                                                                                                 CONTENTS




     8.8. Acid Detergent Fiber (ADF)
          It is recommended that ADF is determined sequentially, that is using the residue
     left from NDF determination. If not done sequentially, some fractions of pectines
     and hemicellulose could contaminate and overestimate the ADF fraction. For doing
     sequential analysis, the Ankom procedure is recommended. Like for the NDF
     procedure the ADF analysis requires 600 ml Berzelius beakers, a fiber digestion
     apparatus and a filtering flask. Also sintered glass crucibles of 40 to 50 ml with coarse
     porosity are required.
        Reagents needed are:
        • Acid Detergent Solution. For this add 27.84 ml of H2SO4 to a volumetric flask
            and bring to 1 l volume with deionized water (it is recommended that before
            adding the acid, some water is placed in the volumetric flask). Then add 20 g of
            CH3(CH2)15N(CH3)3Br to this solution.
        • Acetone.
        • 72% H2SO4 standardized to specific gravity of 1.634 at 20°C.
        Extraction of sample
        • Transfer 1 (± 0.0001) g air-dried sample to Berzelius beaker (A).
        • Add 100 ml acid detergent solution.
        • Heat to boil (5 to 10 minutes), and then boil for exactly 60 minutes.
        • Filter with light suction into previously tared crucibles.

48
8. Chemical Analyses




       •  Wash with deionized hot water 2 to 3 times.
       •  Wash thoroughly with acetone until no further color is removed. Suction dry.
       •  Dry in oven at 100°C for 24 h.
       •  Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record weight (B).
       •  Ash in muffle at 500°C for 4 h.
       •  Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record (C).
     The ADF content on a dry matter basis is then calculated using the following
     equation:
                 Weight of ADF residue and crucible, B – Weight after ashing, C
      ADF, % =                                                                  x100
                             Original weight , A x % Dry matter

                                                                                                 CONTENTS




     8.9. Lignin
     Lignin is a polymer of hydroxycinnamyl alcohols that can be linked to phenolic acids,
     and also non-phenolic compounds. Lignin acts like a shield that prevents the action
     of enzymes and bacteria, by physical means. Lignin, not only is totally indigestible,
     but also limits digestion of some nutrients (especially fiber fractions) of soybean
     products. The determination of lignin is thus, important to estimate the digestibility
     and energy value of certain, fiber-rich, soybean products.
     There are two methods to determine lignin, the Klason lignin and the permanganate
     lignin. The method of choice is the Klason lignin.
                                                                                                CONTENTS



       8.9.1 Klason lignin
         Klason lignin requires 72% sulfuric acid and sintered glass crucibles.
       The technique consists of adding 25 ml of sulfuric acid to the residue of an ADF
       determination (without ashing), filtering and adding distilled water three times.
       Procedure:
       • Place ADF crucible in a 50 ml beaker on a tray. For the original weight use same
         as for ADF analysis (A).
       • Cover contents of crucible with 72% H2SO4. (Fill approximately half way
         with acid).
       • Stir contents with a glass rod to a smooth paste.
       • Leave rod in crucible, refill hourly for 3 h, each time stirring the contents of
         the crucible.
       • After 3 h, filter contents of crucible using low vacuum at first, increasing
         progressively as more force is needed.
       • Wash contents with hot deionized water until free of acid (minimum of
         five times).

49
8. Chemical Analyses




       •  Rinse rod and remove.
       •  Dry crucible in oven at 100°C for 24 h.
       •  Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record weight (B).
       •  Ash in muffle at 500°C for 4 h.
       •  Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record (C).
     Calculate Klason lignin (on dry matter basis) as:
                    Weight of lignin residue and crucible, B – Weight after ashing, C
      Lignin, % =                                                                     x100
                                  Original weight , A x % Dry matter
                                                                                                      CONTENTS




       8.9.2. Permanganate lignin
              The permanganate lignin requires 80% ethanol, a permanganate buffer
       solution, acetone, fiber crucibles and a Fibertec apparatus or a vacuum system.
       The permanganate buffer solution consists of 2 parts of potassium permanganate
       and one part of lignin buffer solution. The lignin buffer solution in turn is made
       up of : 300 ml of distilled water, 18 g of ferric nitrate, .45 g of silver nitrate, 1.5 l of
       glacial acetic acid, 15 g of potassium acetate and 1.2 l of tertiary butyl alcohol.
       • Determine ADF following the above-described procedure using crucibles (not
          Ankom) (B). For the original weight, use same as for ADF analysis (A).
       • Place crucibles with ADF digested samples (not ashed) on an enamel pan.
       • Fill the pan with distilled water to the bottom of the filter plate of the crucible.
       • Place a stirring rod in each crucible and gently break the matt residue with
          a little of distilled water.
       • Fill the crucibles about half way, with the permanganate-buffer solution.
          Stir, and keep filling crucibles as solution drains out.
       • Leave the permanganate solution on for 90 minutes, stirring occasionally.
       • Filter the permanganate using the vacuum system of the Fibertec.
       • Place crucibles on another enamel pan.
       • Fill crucibles with distilled water (avoiding overflow) and refill as necessary.
       • Add demineralizing solution to the samples and leave until they turn white.
       • Place on cold extractor and filter the demineralized solution using vacuum.
       • Wash with 80% ethanol 2 to 3 times.
       • Rinse with acetone. Air dry.
       • Place in a 105°C oven overnight.
       • Place in desiccator, cool, weigh and record weights (C).
     Calculate Permanganate lignin (on dry matter basis) as:
                    Weight of ADF residue and crucible, B – Weight after oxidation, C
      Lignin, % =                                                                     x100
                                  Original weight , A x % dry matter
                                                                                                      CONTENTS




50
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.10. Starch
         Starch occupies only a small part of most soy products but the nitrogen free
     extract (NFE) fraction- with which it is often identified – may represent a large part of
     the product. Chemically speaking, starch is defined as a polymer of linear alpha-1,4
     linked glucose units (amylose) or alpha-1,5 branched chains of alpha-1,4 linked
     glucose units (amylopectine).

           The starch content of soybean products can be determined with a large number
     of methods of which the most common methods are the polarimetric method and
     the enzymatic. The polarimateric method, also referred to as the Ewers method, will
     recuperate free sugars, pectins and a selection of non-starch polysaccharides.
     It is generally recommended not to use this method for samples high in the above
     mentioned substances or rich in optically active substances that do not dissolve in
     ethanol (40%) (v/v). The most common alternative method of starch determination is
     the enzymatic method. This method is based on the selective enzymatic digestion of
     amyloses and amylopectins by an amylo-glucosidase.

         The polarimatric method and the various enzymatic methods do not generally
     provide the same numeric starch value for an ingredient, feed or digesta sample.
     The Ewers value being generally higher. However, the enzymatic method(s) are more
     accurate and are better in discriminating between true starch and related molecules.
     A comparison of starch analysis in the CVB (2000) tables shows that the two
     methods give close to identical results for ingredients high in starch. For raw
     materials with low to intermediate starch levels and ingredients rich in NSPs or cell
     wall components, starch determination is higher with the Ewers method compared
     to the enzymatic method. Consequently, for soy products high in (soluble) sugar
     content (see appendix Tables 1, 2) the polarimatric method will result in higher
     values than the enzymatic method and the enzymatic method should be preferred.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS



       8.10.1 Polarimatric starch determination
          The Polarimetric method requires: Erlenmeyers volumetric flasks, pipettes, filter
       paper, a water bath, and a polarimeter or saccharo-meter plus the following
       reagents:
       • 2.5% HCl.
       • 1.128% HCl (this solution must be verified by titration with a 0.1 N NaOH
          solution in presence of 0.1% (w/v) methyl red in 94% (v/v) ethanol.
       • Carrez solution I: made by dissolving 21.9 g of zinc acetate and 3 g of glacial
          acetic acid into 100 ml of water.



51
8. Chemical Analyses




      •   Carrez solution II: dissolve 10.6 g of potassium ferro-cyanide in 100 ml of
          deionized water.
      •   40% (v/v) ethanol.

        The polarimetric procedure has two parts, the total optical rotation and the
      determination of the optical rotation of the dissolved substances in 40% ethanol:

      Total optical rotation determination:
      • Weigh 2.5 g of soybean sample previously ground through a 5-mm mesh into
        a 100 ml volumetric flask.
      • Add 25 ml of HCl and stir to obtain a homogenized solution and add 25
        additional milliliters of HCl.
      • Immerse and continuously shake the volumetric flask in a boiling water bath
        for 15 minutes.
      • Remove the flasks from the water bath, add 30 ml of cold water and
        immediately cool to 20°C.
      • Add 5 ml of Carrez solution I and stir for 1 minute.
      • Add 5 ml of Carrez solution II and stir, again, for 1 additional minute.
      • Add water to the 100 ml level.
      • Measure the optical rotation of the solution in a 200 mm tube with the
        polarimeter or saccharo-meter.

      Optical rotation determination of dissolved substances in 40% ethanol:
      • Weigh 2.5 g of soybean sample previously ground through a 5-mm mesh into a
        100 ml volumetric flask.
      • Add 80 ml of 40% ethanol and let react for 1 hour at room temperature, stirring
        every 10 minutes.
      • Complete to volume (100 ml) with ethanol, stir and filter.
      • Pipette 50 ml of the filtrate into a 250 ml Erlenmeyer.
      • Add 2.1 ml of HCl and shake vigorously.
      • Place Erlenmeyer (with cooling device) in a boiling water bath for exactly
        15 minutes.
      • Transfer the sample into a 100 ml volumetric flask.
      • Cool and maintain at room temperature.
      • Clarify the sample with Carrez solution I and II and fill to the 100-ml level
        with water.
      • Filter and measure optical rotation in a 200 mm tube with a polarimeter or
        saccharo-meter.
      • The starch content of the sample is then calculated using the following
        equation:
                   2000 x (total rotation – dissolved rotation)
     Starch, % =
                     Specific optical rotation of pure starch


52
8. Chemical Analyses




          The specific optical rotation of pure starch will depend on the type of starch
       used. Table 13 depicts the generally accepted values for some common starch-rich
       ingredients.

     Table 13.
                   Optical rotation of various pure starch sources

                        Starch source                  Optical rotation
                          Rice starch                        185.9º
                         Potato starch                       185.4º
                          Corn starch                        184.6º
                         Wheat starch                        182.7º
                         Barley starch                       181.5º
                           Oat starch                        181.3º


                                                                                           CONTENTS



       8.10.2. Enzymatic or colorimetric starch determination
       The enzymatic method is much longer than the polarimetric one.

       Reagents needed are:
       • Acetate buffer solution, .2 M at pH 4.5.
       • Amyloglucosidase enzyme.
       • Glucose reagent kit containing: NAD, ATP, hexokinase, glucose-6-phosphate,
         magnesium ions, buffer and non reactive stabilizers and filters.
       • Glucose standards. Prepare three solutions of 100 ml each with 100, 300, and
         800 mg/dl of glucose, and 10, 30 and 300 mg/dl of urea nitrogen.

       The total procedure takes three days.
       Day on:
       • Weigh 125 Erlenmeyer flaks are record their weight to the nearest tenth
         of gram.
       • Add 25 ml of distilled water.
       • Add .1 g of soybean product and swirl gently.
       • Place Erlenmeyers with samples on autoclave at 124°C and 7 kg of pressure,
         once these conditions are reached, leave the samples in the autoclave for
         90 minutes.
       • Turn autoclave to liquid cool and leave sample in the autoclave overnight.




53
8. Chemical Analyses




       Day two:
       • Remove from autoclave and cool to room temperature.
       • Add 25 ml of acetate buffer and swirl gently.
       • Add .2 g of amylo-glucosidase enzyme and swirl.
       • Cover tight with aluminum foil caps and put in drying oven at 60°C for 24 hours.
       Day three:
       • Remove flasks from oven and let to cool at room temperature.
       • Remove foil caps and weigh to the nearest tenth of gram and record weight.
       • Pour contents into 50 ml centrifuge tubes and centrifuge at 1000 x g for
         10 minutes.
       • Save supernatant in a plastic scintillation vial.
       • Prepare a standard curve using the standard solutions:

     Table 14.
                  Solutions to prepare standard curve for colorimetric
                                  starch determination
       Working standards                  Combined standards
                  50                      1:1 dilution of 100 mg/dl standard and water
                 100                      Use 100 mg/dl standard
                 200                      1:3 dilution of 800 mg/dl standard and water.
                 300                      Use 300 mg/dl standard
                 400                      1:1 dilution of 800 mg/dl standard and water
                 800                      Use 800 mg/dl

       •   Set up a series of test tubes for the color determination step. Include tubes for
           standards and a blank (i.e. glucose reagent only).
       •   Prepare glucose reagent kit according to the instructions provided by the
           supplier of the kit.
       •   Add 1.5 ml of glucose reagent agent into test tubes.
       •   Read and record absorbance at 340 nm vs water as a reference. This will be
           INITIAL A (the blank) in the calculations.
       •   Add 10 µl of sample to the test tube. Mix gently.
       •   Incubate tubes for 5 minutes at 37°C.
       •   Read and record the absorbance at 340 nm vs water as a reference. This will be
           FINAL A in the calculations.
       •   Subtract INITIAL A from FINAL A to obtain change in absorbance (∆ A in the
           calculations).
       •   Calculate glucose concentration using the following equation:

                                                      FINAL A (sample) – INITIAL A (sample)
     Glucose, mg/dl = standard concentration x
                                                    FINAL A (standard) – INITIAL A (standard)


54
8. Chemical Analyses




       • Calculate the content of alpha linked glucose polymers:
        Alpha-linked glucose polymer, mg/g = Glucose concentration in standard x
                                                  (V/100) x (1/sample weight)
        where, V is the flask volume difference (sample + flask weight - flask weight)

       • Calculate starch content as:
                      Alpha linked glucose polymer, mg/g
      Starch, % =
                                     1.111
                                                                                                  CONTENTS




     8.11. Non starch polysaccharides (NSP) and
           monosaccharides
         A large part of the NFE fraction of soy products may belong to the group of
     non-starch polysaccharides. This group is composed of fairly simple, soluble and
     insoluble sugars, most notably raffinose, stachyose, β-mannans and xylans. A major
     proportion of these sugars are not readily digested, especially by young animals and
     they are thus often considered part of the ANF. Consequently, a correct estimation of
     these sugars or the mono-saccharides that make-up these NSP is important when
     formulating special diets.

         The precise analysis for simple sugars requires HPLC equipment. The first part
     of the procedure requires the elimination of starch from the sample. This is
     accomplished with the following procedure:
     • Weigh 2.5 g of sample in Hungate tubes.
     • Add 2.5 ml of acetate buffer (70 ml 0.1 M sodium acetate and 30 ml of 0.1 M
        acetic acid).
     • Add 2.5 µm of α-amylase.
     • Place in boiling water bath for 1 hour, shaking every 10 minutes.
     • Cool to 40°C.
     • Add 50 µl of glucosidase.
     • Place in water bath at 60°C for 6 hours and shake every 30 minutes.
     • Cool to room temperature.
     • Add 10.5 ml of pure ethanol.
     • Place in refrigerator for 1 hour.
     • Centrifuge at 1000 x g for 5 minutes.
     • Discard the supernatant, rinsing the pellet twice with distilled water.
     • Dry overnight at 40°C.
     The total NSP fraction can be estimated as follows:

      Total NSP, % = 100 – (humidity, % + ash, % + protein,% + lipids,% + NDF,% + starch,%)


55
8. Chemical Analyses




     Once starch has been removed it is necessary to conduct the hydrolysis of sugars.
     • Detach the sample from the tube walls.
     • Add 1.5 ml of sulfuric acid (75 ml of 96% sulfuric acid and 25 ml of water).
     • Vortex.
     • Place in water bath 30°C for 1 hour.
     • Transfer sample into a 100-ml Erlenmeyer and add 40 ml of distilled water.
     • Add 5 ml of myo-inositol (2mg/l) as an internal standard.
     • Cover Erlenmeyer with aluminum foil and autoclave (125°C) for 1 hour.
     • Filter sample.
     • Re-suspend the filtrate into 50 ml of distilled water.

     After hydrolysis, the derivatization needs to be performed:
     • Place 1 ml of filtrate into a 5-ml plastic test tube.
     • Neutralize with 200 µl of 12 M ammonium hydroxide.
     • Vortex.
     • Add 100 µl of 3 M ammonium hydroxide containing 150 mg/ml of KBH4
        (Borate is very toxic; all following steps must be conducted under a hood).
     • Place in a 40°C water bath for 1 hour.
     • Add 100 µl of glacial acetic acid and vortex.
     • Transfer 500 µl into a 30 ml glass tube.
     • Add 500 µl of 1-metilimidazol.
     • 5 ml acetic acid, vortex and wait 10 minutes.
     • Add 1 ml of ethanol, vortex and wait 10 minutes.
     • Add 5 ml of distilled water.
     • Add 5 ml of 7.5 M KOH, vortex, and wait 3 minutes.
     • Add, again, 5 ml of 7.5 M KOH, vortex, and wait 3 minutes.
     • Cover tubes.
     • Take a 1-ml aliquot and transfer into a 5-ml test tube.
     • Add 50 mg of anhydrous sodium sulfate.
     • Decant supernatant into a GLC vial.
     • Dry at 40°C for 8-10 hours
     • Add 0.5 ml of chloroform.

     Chromatography:
     • Run samples against stand and blank through a gas chromatograph following
       equipment-specific procedures.
                                                                                               CONTENTS




56
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.12. Ether Extract
         The ether extract (EE) method measures the proportion of a feed that is soluble
     in ether. It is equivalent to the total amount of lipids present in a feed and it
     represents mostly true fats and oils. However, it also includes some ether-soluble
     material that are not true fats, such as fat-soluble vitamins, carotenes, chlorophylls,
     sterols, phospholipids, waxes and cutins.

         Fatty acids will readily form insoluble complexes with free cations, most notably
     calcium. These reactions may occur in soy products that have a relatively high
     concentration of positively charged minerals. To assure that all the fat components
     are extracted from a mineral rich sample it is recommended to perform an acid
     hydrolysis in hot HCl prior to the ether extraction.

         The EE technique requires a Soxhlet extraction system, funnels, filter paper, HCl
     (3 N), and anhydrous diethyl ether.

     The procedure is as follows:
     • Weight approximately 2 g of sample ground trough 1 mm-mesh into an
       Erlenmeyer.
     • Add 100 ml of 3 N HCl and boil for 1 h.
     • Cool at room temperature.
     • Filter through a filter paper and rinse with distilled water to remove all HCl.
     • Remove the moisture of the sample by drying it in an oven at 105°C for 24 hours.
       (If the sample were not dried the ether would have difficulties penetrating all the
       areas of the ingredient).
     • Place sample with anhydrous diethyl ether in a Soxhlet extractor. Turn the heater
       coil high enough to evaporate 2-3 drops of ether per second in the condenser.
       Extract for 24 hours. After that time, the ether should be removed, and replaced
       with clean ether, leaving the samples in the Soxhlet for 8 more hours.
     • Remove from Soxhlet, air-dry for about 2 hours and oven dry at 105°C for
       12 hours.
     The calculation of crude fat is as follows:
                       Final weight after extraction, g
      Crude fat, % =                                      x100
                              Original weight, g

                                                                                                CONTENTS


     8.13. Lipid quality
        Fat or oil quality depends on the fatty acid profile, specific physical
     characteristics and the oxidation level. While fatty acid characteristics and
     composition determine the physical and nutritional quality of the true lipid fraction,


57
8. Chemical Analyses




     the physical characteristics and oxidation level are the aspects that are of greatest
     importance in the routine QC procedures that are applied when oils or fats enter the
     feed production process. Consequently, the two most common physical tests to
     assess quality of oils are the insoluble impurities and the unsaponifiable matter.
     Along with moisture in the oil or fat sample, these characteristics are collectively
     referred to as the MUI (Moisture, Unsaponifiables, Insolubles) value.
                                                                                               CONTENTS



       8.13.1. Moisture
         Through the crushing and various treatments of soy oil water may settle in oil
       samples especially if these samples have undergone significant temperature changes.
       Generally the moisture content is small but it may have a large effect on the oil
       quality.The procedure is simple but calls for a forced air drying oven capable of
       maintaining 130°C ± 2°C, aluminium sample pans with tight fitting covers and a
       desiccator. Attention, high temperatures may cause the fat sample to ignite.

       The procedure is following:
       • Accurately weigh 5.0 ± 01 g of sample into a tared moisture dish that has been
         previously dried and cooled in a desiccator.
       • Place the dish in a forced air oven and dry it for 30 min at 130°C + 1°C.
         Remove from the oven, cool to room temperature in a desiccator and weigh.

       Repeat until the loss in weight does not exceed 0.05% per 30 min drying period.
                                   Loss in weight, g
        Moisture content, % =                            x100
                                  Weight of sample, g
                                                                                              CONTENTS




       8.13.2. Insoluble impurities
          This is a measure of the content of non-lipid compounds in oil. It should be
       less than 1 %.

       The method is as follows:
       • Place 15 ml of sample into a graduate cylinder (if sample is not liquid it should
         be liquefied applying a mild increase in temperature using a hot plate). Maintain
         in liquid state for the duration of the test. The lower values of the tube should
         be clearly identified to ensure easy reading following the procedure.
       • Let the sample settle in the graduate cylinder for 24 hours.
       • Observe the amount of insolubles that have settled out of the sample and
         collected at both at the top and bottom of the tube.


58
8. Chemical Analyses




     •   The insoluble impurities are then calculated as:
                                 Reading of settled insolubles, ml
     Insoluble impurities, % =                                     x 100
                                  Total sample volume, ml (15)

     •   If no insoluble matter is seen in the tube, report the insoluble matter as < 0.2%.
                                                                                              CONTENTS



     8.13.3. Unsaponifiable matter
        The method measures those substances which cannot be saponified by a
     caustic alkali treatment. It includes compounds such as aliphatic alcohols, sterols,
     pigments and hydrocarbons. They do not have a recognized energy value, and
     thus are of little nutritional interest.

        The technique (AOCS, 1993b) requires Erlenmeyer or Soxhlet flasks, beakers,
     separator funnels, a balance(accuracy of ± .001g), pipettes, a water bath, a reflux
     condenser, an explosion-proof hot plate, a 50ml burette with its stand, a Soxhlet
     fat cup and Soxhlet HT2 system, and a desiccator.

     The reagents for this method are:
     • 85% Ethanol.
     • Petroleum Ether.
     • NaOH, ACS grade.
     • Phenolphthalein indicator solution.
     • 0.2 M HCL standard.
     • Deionized water.
     The procedure is as follows:
     • Accurately weigh 5 ± 0.0001 g of well mixed sample into an extraction flask.
       If the sample is fluid at room temperature, shake to mix well before weighing
       out sample, and if the sample is solid at room temperature, melt the sample in a
       water bath, set at 60°C, until the sample is liquefied. Remove and shake to
       mix well.
     • Add 30 ml of 85% ethanol to the sample.
     • Add 5 ml of 45% aqueous potassium hydroxide.
     • Assemble the extractor by turning on the hot plates and the water taps.
       Reflux the solution gently but steadily for 1 hour or until completely saponified.
     • Quantitatively transfer the solution to a 500 ml separator funnel and rinse the
       flask into the funnel with approximately 10 ml of 85% ethanol.
     • Wash the flask into the separator funnel with approximately 5ml of warm water
       and pour it into the separator funnel.
     • Add approximately 5ml of cool distilled water, swirl and pour it into the
       separator funnel.


59
8. Chemical Analyses




     •   Complete the transfer from the flask by rinsing with approximately 5ml of
         petroleum ether.
     •   Allow the solution to cool to room temperature.
     •   Add approximately 50 ml of petroleum ether.
     •   Insert the stopper and shake vigorously by repetitions of inverting for at least
         one minute. After every few seconds, release the accumulated pressure in the
         funnel by inverting and opening the stopcock.
     •   Allow to settle until the solution has separated into two layers.
     •   Transfer the bottom fat layer back into the original flask and transfer the
         petroleum ether layer into a clean 250ml Erlenmeyer flask.
     •   Repeat the former 4 steps until the petroleum ether layer is clear and colorless
         (about 6 times).
     •   Once the washes are completed, discard the fat portion of the sample in a waste
         container and transfer all of the petroleum ether to the 500ml separator funnel.
     •   Add 30ml of 10% ethanol to the petroleum ether.
     •   Insert the stopper and shake vigorously by repetitions of inverting for at least
         one minute. Release any pressure in the funnel by inverting the funnel and
         opening the stopcock.
     •   Allow the mixture to settle until the solution has separated into two layers.
     •   Draw off the alcohol, or bottom layer, and discard, being careful not to remove
         any of the ether layer.
     •   Continue the alcohol washes until the petroleum ether layer is clear,
         approximately 5 or 6 times or until the bottom layer no longer turns into a pink
         color after addition of 1 drop of phenolphthalein indicator solution.
     •   Transfer 60 ml of the ether layer (top layer) to a previously tared Soxhlet fat cup.
     •   Evaporate the petroleum ether layer.
     •   Repeat the ether evaporation on the Soxhlet system from the same fat cup until
         all petroleum ether has been completely evaporated from the separator funnel.
     •   Place the cup in the oven, set at 100°C, for approximately 20 minutes.
     •   Allow to cool to room temperature in a desiccator and weigh.
     •   After weighing, dissolve the residue in 50 ml of the phenolphthalein indicator
         solution. Heat on a hot plate to the point where the alcohol is just starting to
         boil, then transfer to a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask.
     •   Titrate with standardized 0.02 N sodium hydroxide to a faint pink of the same
         intensity as the original indicator solution. No titration is needed if the sample is
         already pink when poured into the flask. The amount of ml added times 0.0056
         will yield the weight of fatty acids in the sample.
     •   The unsaponifiable matter is calculated as follows:
                                  (Weight of fat cup plus residue – Weight of fat cup) – Weight of fatty acids
     Unsaponifiable matter, % =
                                                               Weight of sample

                                                                                                       CONTENTS




60
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.13.4. Iodine value
        The iodine value is an estimate of the proportion of unsaturated fatty acids
     present in a sample. Iodine will bind to unsaturated or double bonds in fatty acids.
     The greater the amount of iodine bound to the sample the greater the proportion
     of unsaturated fatty acids. The procedure requires the following reagents:
     • Glacial acetic acid.
     • Carbon tetrachloride.
     • Iodine trichloride.
     • Iodine.
     • Potassium iodide (100 g/l aqueous solution).
     • Sodium thiosulfate, 0.1 N (19.76 g of sodium thiosulfate into 230.24 ml of water).
     • Potassium iodate, 0.4 N.
     • starch solution: 10g/l aqueous dispersion recently prepared from natural
        soluble starch.
     • Wijs solution: Add 9 g of trichloride into a brown glass bottle (1500 ml capacity).
        Dissolve in 1 l of a mixture composed of 700 ml of acetic acid and 300 ml of
        carbon tetrachloride.

     The procedure is as follows:
     • Determine the halogen content of the Wijs solution by taking 5 ml of the solution
       and adding 5 ml of the potassium iodide and 30 ml of water. Then add 10 ml of
       pure iodine and dissolve by shaking. Determine again the halogen content as
       previously described.The titer should now be equal one and half times that of the
       first determination. If this were not the case, add a small amount of iodine until
       the content slightly exceeds the limit of one and half times. Let the solution stand,
       then decant the clear liquid into a brown glass bottle.
     • Place about 100 g of sample in a flask with 15 ml carbon tetrachloride and
       25 ml of Wijs reagent. Insert a stopper and shake gently.
     • Let sample sit in a dark location for 60 min for fats with expected iodine
       numbers below 150, and for 120 min for fats with expected iodine values
       above 150.
     • Remove the flask from the dark and add 20 ml of the aqueous potassium iodide
       solution and 150 ml of distilled water.
     • Titrate the solution with 0.1 N sodium thio-sulfate until the yellow color has
       mostly disappeared.
     • Add 1 to 2 ml of starch indicator solution and continue the titration until the
       blue color has just disappeared after vigorous shaking.

     Determine the iodine value using the following equation:

                      12.69 x 0.1 x (ml titration of blank – ml titration of sample)
     Iodine Value =
                                      Weight of original sample, g


61
8. Chemical Analyses




       The iodine test can also be useful as an indicator of lipid oxidation by
     comparing the initial iodine value and monitoring it across time. The oxidation
     process destroys the double bonds or reduction of di-enoic acids (see later in this
     chapter), and thus if the iodine value decreases with time it is an indication of lipid
     oxidation in the sample under study.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS



     8.13.5. Acid value
        The acid value is a measurement of the proportion of free fatty acids in a given
     sample. It is determined by measuring the milligrams of potassium hydroxide
     required to neutralize 1 g of fat. Oxidation is not involved directly in free fatty acid
     formation, but in advanced states of oxidation, secondary products such a butyric
     acid may contribute to FFA formation (Shermer et al, 1985).

       The technique requires the following reagents: Solvent mixture (95%
     ethanol/diethyl ether, 1/1, v/v), 0.1 M KOH in ethanol accurately standardized
     with 0.1 M HCl (pure ethanol may be also used if aqueous samples are analyzed),
     1% phenolphthalein in 95% ethanol.
      The procedure is as follows:
       • Weigh 0.1 to 10 g of oil (according to the expected acid value) in glass vial
           and dissolve in at least 50 ml of the solvent mixture (if necessary by gentle
           heating).
       • Titrate, while shaking, with the KOH solution (in a 25 ml burette, graduated in
           0.1 ml) to the end point of the indicator (5 drops of indicator), the pink color
           persisting for at least 10 seconds.
       • The acid value is calculated by the formula:
                                           ml of KOH
      Acid value = 56.1 x KOH x
                                   Weight of original sample, g
                                                                                                  CONTENTS


     8.13.6. Lipid Oxidation
        Lipids, especially oils, can undergo oxidation, leading to deterioration. In feeds,
     these reactions can lead to rancidity, loss of nutritional value, destruction of
     vitamins (A, D, and E) and essential fatty acids, and the possible formation of toxic
     compounds and changes in color of the product.

        The important lipids involved in oxidation are the unsaturated fatty acid
     moieties, oleic, linoleic, and linolenic. The rate of oxidation of these fatty acids
     increases with the degree of unsaturation. The overall mechanism of lipid



62
8. Chemical Analyses




          oxidation consists of three phases: (1) initiation, the formation of free radicals; (2)
          propagation, the free-radical chain reactions; and (3) termination, the formation
          of non-radical products. Chain branching consists in the degradation of hydro-
          peroxides and the formation of new hydroxyl radicals which will then induce a
          new oxidation. During the process, there are secondary products being formed
          from the decomposition of lipid hydro-peroxides producing a number of
          compounds that may have biological effects and cause flavor deterioration in feed.
          These compounds include aldehydes, ketones, alcohols, hydrocarbons, esters,
          furans and lactones (Figure 3).

     Figure 3
        Auto-oxidation of linolenic acid


                                    X•       XH


              14        11
                                    Initiators
                                                                                O2
              Linolenate                                         OO•                                   OO•

                              α-Tocopherol
                                                             A                       LH

                        O O
                                                                 OOH                 L•                OOH

                    B
                         LH                   12(13) – OOH       Monohydroperoxides            9(16) – OOH
                                                  (25%)                                           (50%)
                   O2                                                       LH
                         L•
                                                                       L•             O2
                        O O       OOH
                                                  OOH OOH                        OOH                 OOH
                                                                            +
                    C
        Hydroperoxy Epidioxides
                                                             D                             E
                (25%)                                             Dihydroperoxides




             Soybean products are relatively sensitive to oxidation because they are rich in
          unsaturated FA especially linoleic acid. If soybeans are cracked or ground they
          become more susceptible to oxidation, as fat becomes exposed to oxygen and
          light. The finer the soybeans are ground, the greater the exposure and thus, the
          greater the risk of oxidation. Evidently, soybean oil in its pure form (no additives) is
          very susceptible to oxidation.



63
8. Chemical Analyses




       There are several techniques to determine the oxidation state of a soybean
     product or soybean oil. These tests can be classified according to the type of
     oxidation compound quantified:
     • Determination of primary products of oxidation: peroxide value.
     • Determination of secondary products of oxidation:
       – Colorimetric methods: TBA and anisidine value.
       – Volatile compounds determination: Chromatography.
     • Stability tests: AOM and OSI.
                                                                                             CONTENTS

       8.13.6.1. Peroxide value

           The peroxide value is an indicator of the products of primary oxidation
       (peroxides). They can be measured by techniques based on their ability to
       liberate iodine from potassium iodide, or to oxidize ferrous to ferric ions.

            The peroxide value is determined by the amount of iodine liberated from a
       saturated potassium iodine solution at room temperature, by fat or oil dissolved
       in a mixture of glacial acetic acid and chloroform (2:1). The liberated iodine is
       titrated with standard sodium thiosulfate, and the peroxide value is expressed in
       milli-equivalents of peroxide oxygen per kilogram of fat.
       Procedure:
       • Place 5 g of sample in a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask and add 30 ml of the acetic
          acid-dodecane solution.
       • Swirl until the sample is dissolved and add 0.5 ml of a saturated potassium
          iodide solution (150 g potassium iodide to 100 ml).
       • Allow the solution to stand with occasional shaking for exactly one minute,
          and then add 30 ml of distilled water.
       • Titrate with 0.01N sodium thiosulfate adding it gradually and with constant
          and vigorous shaking. Continue the titration until the yellow color has almost
          disappeared, and add 1 ml of a starch indicator solution. Continue the
          titration until the solution acquires a blue color.
      The calculations are as follows:
      Peroxide value, milliequivalents/1000 = Titration (ml used) x Acid normality x 1000

           Although the peroxide value is applicable to peroxide formation at the early
       stages of oxidation, it is, nevertheless, highly empirical. During the course of
       oxidation, peroxide values reach a peak and then decline. Consequently the
       accuracy of this test is sometimes questionable as the results vary with the
       duration of the procedure used. Thus, a single peroxide value cannot be
       indicative or the real oxidation state of a product. Also, this test is extremely
       sensitive to temperature changes potentially leading to poor repeatability of
       this test.
                                                                                              CONTENTS


64
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.13.6.2. Thiobarbituric acid (TBA)

          TBA is the most widely used test for measuring the extent of lipid
     peroxidation in foods due to its simplicity and because its results are highly
     correlated with sensory evaluation scores. The thio-barbituric acid has a high
     affinity to carbonyl substances (aldehydes and ketones) and its reaction with
     aldehydes (especially with malon-aldehyde, secondary oxidation product of
     fatty acids with three or more double bonds) forms a colorimetric complex
     with maximum absorbance at 530 nm.

          The basic principle of the method is the reaction of one molecule of
     malon-aldehyde and two molecules of TBA to form a red malon-aldehyde-TBA
     complex , which can be quantified with a spectrophotometer (530nm).
     However, this method has been criticized as being nonspecific and insensitive
     for the detection of low levels of malon-aldehyde. Other TBA-reactive
     substances including sugars and other aldehydes could interfere with the
     malon-aldehyde-TBA reaction.

          The procedure was first described by Witte et al. (1970). The technique
     requires a spectrophotometer, a water bath, pipettes, test tubes and the
     following reagents:
     • TBA solution: 0.02 M (1.44 g/500 ml of distilled water) 4,
         6-dihydroxypyrimidine-2-thiol.
     • m-phosphoric acid solution 1.6% (v/v).
     • Standard solution: 1,1,3,3-tetraethoxipropyl (TEP) 10.2 M (0.2223 g/100 ml
         of TCA solution).
     • Construct calibration curve using several dilutions.
     The procedure is as follows:
     • Place 5 g of sample in a beaker and add 50-ml of a 20% tri-chloro-acetic acid
       and 1.6% of m-phosphoric acid solution for about 30 minutes.
     • Filter the slurry.
     • Dilute the residue with 5 ml of freshly prepared 0.02 M (1.44 g in 500 ml of
       distilled water) 4, 6-dihydroxypyrimidine-2-thiol and mixed.
     • Tubes are then stored in the dark for 15 hours to develop the color.
     • The color is measured by a spectrophotometer at a wavelength of 530 nm.
                                                                                          CONTENTS



     8.13.6.3. Anisidine value

         The principle of this technique is the preparation of a test solution in
     2,2,4-trimethylpentane (iso-octane). Reaction with an acetic acid solution of
     p-anisidine and measurement of the increase in absorbance at 350 nm.


65                                                                                                     13
8. Chemical Analyses




     The anisidine value is mainly a measure of 2-alkenals. In the presence of acetic
     acid, p-anisidine reacts with aldehydes producing a yellowish color and an
     absorbance increase if the aldehyde contains a double bond.
                                                                                           CONTENTS

       8.13.6.4. Lipid Stability tests

         Lipid stability tests are either predictive or indicative tests. They measure
       the stability of lipids under conditions that favor oxidative rancidity. The
       predictive tests use accelerated conditions to measure the stability of an oil or
       fat. Indicator tests are intended to quantify the rancidity of an oil or fat. The
       most important tests to determine lipid stability are the Active Oxygen
       Method (AOM) and Oxygen Stability Index (OSI).
                                                                                           CONTENTS

       8.13.6.4.1. AOM (active oxygen method)

         This method predicts the stability of a lipid by bubbling air through a
       solution of oil using specific conditions of flow rate, temperature and
       concentration. It measures the time required (in hours) for a sample to attain
       a predetermined peroxide value (in general 100 mEq/kg oil) under the specific
       and controlled conditions of the test. The length of this period of time is
       assumed to be an index of resistance to rancidity. Peroxide value is
       determines as under 8.13.6.1.

         The more stable the lipid (oil) the longer it will take to reach the
       predetermined value (100 mEq/kg). For products other than oils such as full
       fat soybeans, the oil must first be gently extracted. The method is very time-
       consuming since stable oil or fat may take 48 hours or more before reaching
       the required peroxide concentration. While still being used today, the AOM
       method is being replaced by faster, automated techniques.
                                                                                           CONTENTS

       8.13.6.4.2. OSI (oil stability index)

         The OSI method is similar in principle to the AOM method, but it is faster
       and more automated. Air is passed through a sample held at constant
       temperature. After the air passes through the sample, it is bubbled through
       a reservoir of deionized water. Volatile acids produced by the lipid oxidation
       are dissolved in the water. These organic acids are the stable secondary
       reaction products when oils are oxidized by bubbling steam. They are
       responsible for an increase in conductivity of the water. This conductivity is
       monitored continuously and the OSI value is defined as the hours required
       for the rate of conductivity change to reach to pre-determined value.
       A major advantage of this method is that multiple samples can be tested
       simultaneously.
                                                                                           CONTENTS



66
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.13.7. Fatty acid profile
        The fatty acid (FA) profile is, from a nutritional point of view, the most important
     characteristic of oils. The FA composition of the oil is often a fingerprint for the
     origin, treatment and storage of the oil and it determines largely the quantity that
     can be used in specific animal diets. On average, palmitic, stearic, oleic, linoleic and
     linolenic acid proportion of total fatty acids in soybeans is about 10, 4, 25, 51.5 and
     7.5% respectively. However, there seems to be a recent trend for oil from soybeans
     to be richer in palmitic, stearic and oleic acids, and poorer in linoleic and linolenic
     acids. Part of this decrease has been attributed to global warming, as high temper-
     atures induce a reduction in poli-unsaturated acids in soybeans. However, this
     assumption will need further substantiation.

        The fatty acid profile can be determined by gas or liquid chromatography. The
     most common is the gas liquid chromatography procedure (GLC). For this analysis
     a pure sample of oil is used after removal of moisture, insoluble impurities and
     unsaponifiable substances. Sample preparation requires the following reagents:
     • Metanolic-HCl (5% v/v): Add 10 ml of acetyl chloride into 100 ml of anhydrous
        methanol.
     • 6% K2CO3: 15 g of K2CO3 into 250 ml of distilled water.

     Procedure to prepare samples for GLC (adapted from Sukhija and Palmquist, 1988):
     • Weight 0.15 g of sample into 10 ml test tubes.
     • Add 0.5 ml of an internal standard (i.e. 2mg of C19 per 1 ml of toluene).
     • Add 0.5 ml of toluene.
     • Add 1.5 ml of metanolic-HCl.
     • Close tubes to avoid sample loses.
     • Vortex for 1 min.
     • Place in water bath at 70°C for 2 hours.
     • Cool at room temperature.
     • Add 2.5 ml of the K2CO3 solution.
     • Add 1 ml of toluene.
     • Vortex 30 for seconds.
     • Centrifuge at 3000 rpm for 5 minutes.
     • Keep the supernatant and add 0.5 g of anhydrous Na2SO4.
     • Vortex for 30 seconds.
     • Centrifuge at 4000 rpm for 10 minutes.
     • Collect the supernatant and place in gas chromatography (GC) vial
       for subsequent C analysis.




67
8. Chemical Analyses




          For operation of the GC equipment and analyses of fatty acids it is
       recommended to follow the specific procedure provided by the manufacturer
       of the chromatographic equipment. The chromatography methods are based on
       the separation and quantitative measurement of specific fractions, such as volatile,
       polar, or polymeric compounds or individual components such as pentane
       or hexane.
                                                                                                CONTENTS




     8.14. Minerals
         Mineral composition of soy products can vary considerably among and within
     products. The concentration of minerals depends greatly on a number of factors
     most notably the origin and crop-growing conditions of the soybean, the variety and
     the different types of extraction processes that are applied to obtain the soy product.
     Although a measure of the concentration of these minerals is important for most
     feed applications, under routine feed production conditions table values are used
     to formulate. Generally, in feed production, formulators count on the contribution of
     the minerals in the premix to cover mineral requirements of animals. This is especially
     the case for the micro-elements. Regular analyses are generally only considered
     necessary for the macro minerals calcium and phosphorus. For these elements, rather
     than table values analytical values are used to formulate.

          In certain regions, especially in areas of intensive animal production, the
     regulatory limits on phosphorus use and excretion by animals make a precise
     estimate of this element in the feed necessary. Phosphorus concentrations in soy
     products are high and with the exception of soybean hulls and soybean mill feed,
     P levels in these products are a multiple of Ca levels. This makes analyses for P, both
     from a regulatory and nutritional point of view important. In addition to Ca and P,
     salt (NaCl) analysis may be carried out on a routine basis for QC purposes.

        Routinely, under more sophisticated laboratory conditions, most minerals are
     analyzed by atomic absorption or flame emission. However, this requires a
     considerable amount of investment and expertise. For normal QC objectives, classical
     wet chemistry can be used to estimate the content of the most important minerals.

                                                                                                CONTENTS


       8.14.1. Calcium
          The determination of calcium by wet chemistry requires a set of porcelain
       dishes, volumetric flasks (250 ml), beakers (250 ml), filter paper and funnels, and
       a burette.


68
8. Chemical Analyses




     The following reagents are needed:
     • Hydrochloric acid (1 to 3 v/v).
     • Nitric acid (70%).
     • Ammonium hydroxide (1 to 1 v/v).
     • Methyl red indicator (Dissolve 1 g in 200 ml alcohol).
     • Ammonium oxalate (4.2% solution).
     • Sulphuric acid (98%).
     • Standard potassium permanganate solution (0.05N).

          Ca is determined as follows: weigh 2.5 g finely ground material into a
     porcelain dish and ash (see section 8.2; alternatively use residue from ash
     determination). Add 40 ml hydrochloric acid and a few drops of nitric acid to
     the residue, boil, cool and transfer to a 250 ml volumetric flask. Dilute to volume
     and mix.

           Pipette a suitable aliquot of the solution (100 ml for cereal feeds; 25 ml for
     mineral feeds) into a beaker, dilute to 100 ml and add 2 drops of methyl red.
     Add ammonium hydroxide drop-wise until a brownish orange color is obtained,
     then add two drops of hydrochloric acid to give a pink color. Dilute with 50 ml
     water, boil and add - while stirring - 10 ml of hot 4.2% ammonium oxalate solution.
     Adjust pH with acid to bring back pink color if necessary. Allow precipitate to
     settle out, and filter, washing precipitate with ammonium hydroxide solution
     (1 to 50 v/v). Place the filter paper with precipitate back in beaker and add a
     mixture of 125 ml water and 5 ml sulphuric acid. Heat to 70°C and titrate against
     the standard permanganate solution.

     Calculation:
                     ml, permanganate solution         Aliquot used (ml)
     Calcium (%) =                                 x                     x 0.1
                           wt. of sample, g                  250
                                                                                              CONTENTS




     8.14.2. Phosphorus
        The method for phosphorus analysis requires a spectrophotometer able to read
     at 400 nm, volumetric flasks (100 ml) and the following reagents:
     • Molybdo-vanadate reagent. To obtain this dissolve 40 g ammonium molybdate
        4H0 in 400 ml hot water and cool. Dissolve 2 g ammonium meta-vanadate in
        250 ml hot water, cool and add 450 ml 70% perchloric acid. Gradually add the
        molybdate to the vanadate solution with stirring and dilute to 2 liters.
     • Phosphorous standards. Prepare stock solution by dissolving 8.788 g potassium
        di-hydrogen ortho-phosphate in water and making up to 1 liter. Prepare the


69
8. Chemical Analyses




       working solution by diluting the stock 1 in 20 (working concentration =
       0.1 mg P/ml).

           To determine phosphorus: pipette an aliquot of the sample solution
     prepared as for the calcium determination into a 100 ml flask and add 20 ml of
     the molybdo-vanadate reagent. Make up to volume, mix and allow to stand for
     10 minutes. Transfer aliquots of the working standard containing 0.5, 0.8, 1.0 and
     1.5 mg phosphorus to 100 ml flasks and treat as above. Read sample at 400 nm
     setting the 0.5 mg standard at 100% transmission. Determine mg phosphorus
     in each sample aliquot from a standard curve.
                                                                                             CONTENTS



     8.14.3. Sodium chloride
        The reagents used for the determination of salt in feed samples or feed
     ingredients are:
     • Standard 0.1N silver nitrate solution.
     • Standard 0.1N ammonium thio-cyanate solution.
     • Ferric indicator - saturated aqueous solution of ferric aluminum.
     • Potassium permanganate solution - 6% w/v.
     • Urea solution - 5% w/v.
     • Acetone (A.R. grade).

        The method consists of: weighing a 2 g sample into a 250 ml conical flask.
     Moisten the sample with 20 ml water and then pipette, 15 ml 0.1N silver nitrate
     solution - mix well. Add 20 ml concentrated nitric acid and 10 ml potassium
     permanganate solution and mix. Heat mixture continuously until liquid clears
     and nitrous fumes are evolved. Cool. Add 10 ml urea solution and allow to
     stand for 10 minutes. Add 10 ml acetone and 5 ml ferric indicator and back titrate
     the excess silver nitrate with the 0.1N thio-cyanate solution to the red brown
     end point.

     Calculation:
                 15 – ml 0.1 N NH4CNS x 0.585
     NaCl(%) =
                        wt. of sample, g

     For rapid, routine QC procedures, Quantabs, a bench-top test kit is used.
                                                                                            CONTENTS




70
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.15. Isoflavones
         In many diets, human as well as animals, soybean products are the main dietary
     source of isoflavones. These secondary metabolic compounds may play an important
     role in preventing cancers and reducing risk of cardiovascular diseases. There is also
     an increasing interest in the role and use of isoflavones in animal production as these
     compounds have been implicated in enhancing immunity and improving growth
     performance and carcass traits (Cook, 1998; Payne et al., 2002; Kerley and Allee, 2003).

          Two forms of isoflavones can be determined: the bound glucoside form (genistin,
     daidzin, glycitin) and the free aglycone form (genistein, daidzein, glycitein). Lee et al.
     (2003) reported that the total isoflavone contents in soybean cultivars grown in
     Korea ranged from 110 to 330 mg 100 g–1. The USDA and Iowa State University (2002)
     have developed a database on isoflavones from scientific articles. The analysis of
     isoflavones was carried out according to the method of Wang and Murphy (1994)
     using high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC).
     For the analysis of isoflavones the following reagents are needed:
     • Acetonitrile.
     • HCl (0.1 N) or phosphoric acid.
     • Isoflavone standards (commercial source).

         Besides normal laboratory equipment the essay requires an HPLC instrument
     with a YMC-pack ODS-AM-323 column (10 µm, 25 cm x 10 mm i.d.).

          The procedure consists of an Isoflavone extraction and an HPLC quantification
     step. For the extraction two grams of ground soybean products are mixed with 2 ml
     of HCl and 10 ml of acetonitrile in a 125 ml flask, stirred for 2 hours and filtered. The
     filtrate is dried under vacuum at a temperature below - 30°C and then re-dissolved in
     10 ml of 80 % HPLC grade methanol in distilled water. The sample is then filtered
     through a 0.45 mm filter unit and then transferred to 1 ml vials.

         The HPLC quantification of isoflavones requires a column temperature of 25°C
     and a mobile phase employing a linear HPLC gradient using 0.1 % glacial acetic acid
     in distilled water (solvent A) and 0.1 % glacial acetic acid in acetonitrile (solvent B).
     Following the injection of 20 µL of the sample, solvent B is increased from 15 to 35 %
     over 50 min and then held at 35 % for 10 min. The recommended flow rate is 1 ml
     min–1 and the detection wavelength: 200 - 350 nm.
     The content of each isoflavone is expressed on a w.w–1 basis.
                                                                                                  CONTENTS




71
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.16. Antinutritional factors (ANF)
         One of the most important restrictions on the use of soybeans and their products
     in animal diets is the presence of a relatively large number of antinutritional factors.
     The presence of these factors is also the main reason why different technological
     treatments are applied to soybeans or their products. The ANF in soybeans include
     compounds classified as protease inhibitors, phyto-hemaglutins (lectins), urease,
     lipoxygenases and antivitamin factors which can relatively easily be destroyed by
     heat application or fermentation (Liener, 2000). The methods referred to under
     section 8.4 provide a relative estimate of the effectiveness with which they have
     been destroyed. The effect of heat treatment on ANF is a direct function of the
     degree and duration of the heat application along with particle size and moisture
     level. ANFs that are not destroyed by heat are the poorly digested carbohydrates,
     Saponins, Estrogens, Cyanogens and Phytate (Liener, 2000). In the case of soybean
     products, the most important and best known ANF is the trypsin inhibitors.
     The quality of technological treatment to destroy ANF is mainly related to this
     specific factor.

         To analyze for any ANF a large number of different methods and procedures
     are available ranging from instrumental (HPLC, GC, CE) to thin-layer chromatography
     (TLC) and immuno-assays. The reliability and accuracy of results obtained with
     these methods varies and no preferred method has been defined for all ANF. When
     possible, and for practical routine QC purposes, the use of ELISA (enzyme-linked
     immuno-sorbent assay) tests are recommended.

          The ELISA tests rest on the principle that the compound called the antigen (in
     this case an ANF obtained by extraction from the feed or ingredient) will bind with
     enzyme-linked antibodies. Upon this reaction, the enzyme-linked antibodies will be
     released from the surface to which they were attached (this maybe a stick, plate or
     tube). The enzyme-linked antibodies are then washed away and an enzyme substrate
     is added to allow a reaction with the remaining enzyme-linked antibodies.
     This procedure results in a color change which is inversely related to the antigen
     concentration. Thus, the deeper the color, the smaller the antigen (ANF)
     concentration since less antibody-antigen complexes have been formed and
     washed away leaving more enzyme-linked antibodies to react with the color
     causing enzyme substrate.
                                                                                                CONTENTS



       8.16.1. Trypsin inhibitors
            The residual trypsin inhibitor in soy products combines with the trypsin in
       the small intestine and forms an inactive complex thus reducing digestibility of



72
8. Chemical Analyses




     protein. In addition to the negative effect on protein digestibility, the trypsin
     inhibitor induces pancreatic hypertrophy and leads therefore to an increase in
     secretion of trypsin (endogenous nitrogen). The combined effect on the animal is a
     reduction in nitrogen retention, growth and feed conversion.

          The procedure described to determine trypsin inhibitors activity is based on
     the ability of the inhibitors to form a complex with the enzyme and thus to reduce
     the enzyme activity. Uninhibited trypsin catalyzes the hydrolysis of a synthetic
     substrate BAPNA, forming a yellow-colored product and thus producing a change
     in absorbance. The reference procedures proposed by the American Oil Chemists'
     Society (AOCS) and the French Association for Normalization (AFNOR) are based
     upon the work of Kakade et al. (1969, 1974). Here, the AOCS (1997) procedure is
     summarized but the only difference with the AFNOR (1997) procedure is the
     composition of the extraction buffer, which is alkaline whereas it is acid in the
     other case. Still, these procedures are not very well adapted for routine QC use,
     and a well equipped lab with skilled technician is necessary.

            For practical reasons, the method described measures total trypsin inhibitors.
     It reflects thus the concentration and effects of two distinctively different types of
     inhibitors namely the KTI (Kunitz trypsin inhibitor) and the BBI (Bowman-Birk
     inhibitor).

     Reagents needed are:
     • Hexane or petroleum ether.
     • Sodium hydroxyde solution (0.01 N).
     • Tris buffer: dissolve 6.05 g tris (hydroxyl-metyl)-amino-methan and 2.94 g
       calcium chloride in 900 ml of water, adjust to pH 8.2 and dilute to 1 L.
       Bring to 37°C before using.
     • Trypsin solution: dissolve 4 mg, accurately weighed, twice-crystallized, salt-free
       trypsin in 200 ml hydrochloric acid (0.001 N).
     • BAPNA solution: In a water bath, dissolve 40 mg N α-benzoyl DL-arginine
       p-nitroanilide (BAPNA) in 1 ml dimetyl sulfoxide. Dilute to 100 ml with tris buffer
       (at 37°C). Prepare new solution daily. Maintain at 37°C for use.
     • Acetic acid solution (30 %): mix 30 ml glacial acetic acid and 70 ml water
       (caution).

          Equipment required: a grinding mill, with screen size 0.15 mm or smaller and
     a Spectrophotometer capable to read at 410 nm.

     The procedure is as follows:
     • Samples should be finely ground without excessive heating. Samples with
       more than 5 % fat should be defatted with hexane or petroleum ether and
       desolventized before grinding.



73
8. Chemical Analyses




     •   One gram of ground sample is subsequently weighed into a beaker containing
         a magnetic stirring bar. 50 ml sodium hydroxide solution is added and the
         suspension is agitated slowly. After 3 hr, the pH is measured; pH should range
         between 8.4 and 10.0.
     •   An aliquot of suspension should be taken with a serological pipette and diluted
         with distilled water so that soybean trypsin inhibitor concentration is sufficient
         for 40 - 60 % trypsin inhibition. When it is not possible to estimate the expected
         trypsin inhibitor units, more than one dilution should be made.
     •   With serological pipettes, 0, 0.6, 1.0, 1.4 and 1.8 ml of the diluted suspension is
         added to duplicate sets of test tubes. Water is then added to bring the volume
         to 2 ml in each tube.
     •   With a regular time interval for the different tubes, 2 ml trypsin solution is
         added to each tube and quickly mixed on the Vortex stirrer and placed in the
         37°C water bath. 5 ml BAPNA is added to each tube, mixed on Vortex stirrer.
         The samples are incubated for 10 min at 37°C. After exactly 10 min, the reaction
         is stopped by addition of 1 ml acetic acid solution followed by mixing on the
         Vortex stirrer.
     •   Prepare a blank sample as above, except that trypsin is added after acetic acid.
     •   The contents of each tube are filtered and absorbance is measured at 410 nm.

           Calculation of trypsin inhibitors activity. One trypsin unit is arbitrarily defined
     as the amount of enzyme, which will increase absorbance at 410 nm by 0.01 unit
     after 10 minutes of reaction for each 10 ml of reaction volume. Trypsin inhibitor
     activity is defined as the number of trypsin units inhibited (TIU).
                         Absorbance blank – absorbance sample
         TIU (/ml) =
                       0.01 x volume of diluted sample solution, ml

           TIU is plotted against the volume of the diluted sample solution.
     The extrapolated value of the inhibitor volume to 0 ml gives the final TIU /ml.
     This value is used to calculate the TIU per g sample:

          TIU(/g) = TIU (/ml) x d x 50

        where d = dilution factor (final volume divided by the amount of aliquot taken).
     The results of this analytical method should not exceed 10 % of the average value
     for repeated samples.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS



     8.16.2. Soy antigens
           Immunoassay techniques are used to determine concentrations of soy
     antigens (glycinin and ß-conglycinin) in soy products. The ELISA tests require little
     training and can be used in small laboratories. Various types of ELISA tests with



74
8. Chemical Analyses




       specific polyclonal antisera (Pabs) or monoclonal antibodies (Mabs) can be used to
       assess soy antigens contents (Table 15).

              To apply the different ELISA tests, the protein fraction of the soy product is
       first extracted in borate buffer (100 mM NaBO3, 0.15 M NaCl, pH 8) for 1.5 hr (Tukur
       et al., 1993). The level of glycinin and ß-conglycinin can be measured by a specific
       competitive inhibition ELISA using anti-soy globulin Pabs (Heppell et al., 1987).
       Serial, four-fold dilutions of the sample are incubated with a standard dilution
       of rabbit antiserum to test protein and the residual unbound antibodies are
       quantified.


     Table 15
                    ELISA formats used for analysis of soy globulins
                                  ELISA
                    Antibody      format      Specificity
     Glycinin       Pab LJR J4    inhibition intact glycinin
                    Mab IFRN      inhibition binds proteolytic intermediates and
                    0025                     thermally denatured glycinin;
                                             epitope lies within acidic polypeptides
                    Mab IFRN      two-site    recognize proteolytic intermediates and
                    0025 & Pab                thermally denatured glycinin
                    R103b3
     ß-conglycinin Pab LJR J2     inhibition intact ß-conglycinin
                    Mab IFRN      inhibition recognizes epitopes in acidic regions of a
                    0089                     and α' subunits of ß-conglycinin
                    Mab IFRN      two-site    recognition of thermally denatured
                    0089 & Pab                ß-conglycinin is 3-fold greater than native
                    R195b3
                                                                        (from Tukur et al., 1996)


                                                                                                    CONTENTS


       8.16.3. Lectins
             Lectin is a protein with a specific binding affinity for sugar residues. The
       lectin-sugar interaction is important at the level of the membrane receptors in the
       gut where it is thought to be responsible for agglutination and mitosis. As for most
       leguminous plants or seeds of these plants, lectins have been shown to be an
       important ANF in raw soy products (Pusztai, 1991).




75
8. Chemical Analyses




     Table 16
                 Anti nutritional factor contents in various soy products
     Product                        PDI     Trypsin inhibitor Lectins             Antigens
                                    (%)      activity (mg/g) (mg/g)                (mg/g)

     Untoasted soy flour             90             23.9                7.3          610
     Slightly toasted soy flour      70             19.8                4.5          570
     Toasted soy flour               20             3.1                0.05          125
     Ethanol/water-extracted
     soy concentrate                  6             2.5              <0.0001        <0.02
                                                          (adapted from Huisman and Tolman, 1992)

            Lectins are heat sensitive and are therefore only present at residual levels
      in soybean products. Heat treatment to inactivate antinutritional factors in soy
      products is less efficient for antigens than for trypsin inhibitors or lectins
      (Table 16).

            The level of soy lectins can be estimated by measuring the hemaglutination
      activity. More recently, ELISA (total lectins) and FLIA (functional lectins) tests
      have been developed and these methods are more sensitive and selective
      (Delort-Laval, 1991). Lectins can vary considerably (chemical structure, molecular
      weight a.o.), therefore a specific essay is required for each legume seed tested
      (de Lange et al., 2000).

             The procedure as presented by Schulze et al. (1995) can be summarized
      as follows:
       One gram of sample is mixed with 20 ml tris-HCl buffer (50 mM, pH 8.2) and
       stirred for 1 hr. Extracts are centrifuged at 7500 x g for 15 min and the
       supernatant is used for serial dilutions. Lectins are is determined in the
       supernatant.

            Polyclonal antibodies against soy-lectins (ELISA) are coated to micro-titer
      plates overnight at 4°C. The plates were then blocked with 0.5 % BSA (bovine
      serum albumin) and 0.2 % Tween-20 in TBS for 1 hr at 37°C. Subsequently, the
      plates are washed and samples are diluted at appropriate concentrations.
      A reference soy-lectin sample is run in parallel. All samples are transferred to
      micro-titer wells and incubated for 2 hr at 37°C. The plates are washed and
      peroxidase-conjugated anti-lectin antibodies are applied and incubated for 2 hr
      at 37°C. Finally, the plates are washed again and bound conjugated antibodies
      are developed for peroxidase activity using 1,2-phenylendiamine. Absorbance is
      read at 492 nm. Data can be evaluated by the parallel line assay using a computer
      software package connected to the ELISA reader system. Lectin concentrations are
      expressed in w.w–1 on a dry matter basis.
                                                                                                    CONTENTS


76
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.17. Mycotoxins; rapid tests
         Mycotoxins are a major quality concern for the feed industry. Although soy
     products do not generally show the same level or range of mycotoxin contamination
     as cereal grains, they do occur occasionally and routine QC methods should be in
     place to control their presence. This is especially the case now that regulatory
     restrictions on mycotoxin levels are becoming increasingly more stringent. The most
     common mycotoxins occurring in feed ingredients are aflatoxins, deoxynivalenol
     (DON), zearalenone, ochratoxin and fumonisins. All these mycotoxins can potentially
     be found in soy products but the most important mycotoxins in the case of soy
     products are ochratoxin (produced by the molds Aspergillus ochraceous or Penicillium
     verrucosum under poor storage conditions) and zearalenone (produced by the
     fungus Fusarium graminearum).

         As in the case of ANFs, the analyses for mycotoxins and their metabolites can
     be carried out by a range of methods. No preferred method has been defined for all
     mycotoxins. For practical QC purposes, however, the use of the TLC and ELISA tests
     are recommended. In the case of mycotoxins, these tests can be separated in
     screening and quantitative analysis with the former detecting a simple presence of
     the mycotoxin and the later providing rather precise estimates of mycotoxins levels
     present in a sample. Qualitative analysis will require additional equipment such as
     long-wave microwell strip readers, UV lights or fluorometers.

          The precision of these quantitative measures varies with the type and
     manufacturer of the test and some prior evaluation and training as to which test
      most suitable for a particular laboratory setting is recommended. Minimum
     detection levels may vary among producers and types of test kits. However, the
     significant improvements in the quantitative ELISA tests over the last 10 to 20 years
     have made these tests perfectly suited for routine quality procedures and several
     have been validated by the AOAC and received approval (AOAC International, 1995;
     Trucksess et al., 1989). Nevertheless, due to the many factors that may affect the
     results of the ELISA test kits, the variation between laboratories and analysts may be
     considerable. In some instances, limits of detection are also inadequate to meet the
     increasingly stringent demands for measurement at low levels. False positive or
     negative readings are known to occur and for purposes other than routine quality
     procedures, classical instrumental analysis as referred to above will be needed.
     Also, test kits have been developed that will qualitatively detect several mycotoxins
     in a single test.

        General procedure:
        Before performing the rapid test, the mycotoxins need to be extracted from the
     sample. Most of mycotoxins can be extracted by grinding the sample to 0.6 mm-


77
8. Chemical Analyses




     mesh, then blending 25 g of that sample with 125 ml of a 70% methanol solution
     (7 parts of methanol and 3 parts of de-ionized water). Stir vigorously in a high-speed
     blender for 2-3 minutes. The ELISA test should be performed as indicated by the
     manufacturer of the test kits.

         When choosing the ELISA test for mycotoxin analyses it is necessary to make sure
     that the kit has been validated for use with soybean products.
                                                                                                CONTENTS




       8.17.1. Ochratoxin
             This mycotoxin is often considered the most common mycotoxin in soybean
       products. It is thought to be principally produced during storage under humid
       and warm (>20°C) conditions. Damage to grains by insects or through mechanical
       means will provide an entry for the fungi and enhance initial contamination.
       Ochratoxin is a mycotoxin produced by several species of the mold genera
       Aspergillus and Penicillium. Usually, the rapid tests for ochratoxins have a lower
       limit of detection of 0.01 ppm in the case of screening methods while quantitative
       tests have a lower detection limit at 0.005 ppm. It seems that at levels of 0.2 ppm
       clinical signs associated with ochratoxins will appear in monogastric species.
                                                                                               CONTENTS



       8.17.2. Zearalenone
             Zearalenone is primarily produced by Fusarium graminearum. By itself,
       zearalenone is not toxic, but once metabolized, its end-products have estrogenic
       activity, which may cause some reproductive alterations in animals. Sensitivity to
       zearalenone differs considerably among livestock species with swine considered
       most sensitive. Levels above 1 ppm result in noticeable effects on reproduction
       in swine. Usually, the rapid screening tests for zearalenone have a lower limit of
       detection of 0.1 ppm with quantitative tests having a lower detection limit of
       0.2 ppm.
                                                                                               CONTENTS



       8.17.3. Fumonisins
             Fumonisins includes a group of mycotoxins produced by Fusarium
       moniliforme and Fusarium proliferatum. Horses are especially sensitive to
       fumonisins. Usually, the rapid tests for fumonisins have a lower limit of detection
       of .2 ppm, a limit of quantification of 1 ppm up to 6 ppm.
                                                                                               CONTENTS




78
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.17.4. Aflatoxins
           Aflatoxin is often considered the most common mycotoxin in feeds and
     grains. However, the occurrence of this toxin in soy products is relatively rare.
     Aflatoxin is a mycotoxin produced by Aspergillus flavus and Aspergillus parasiticus.
     Not all strains of these fungi are capable of aflatoxin production. Drought
     conditions associated with warm temperatures and physical damage to the grain
     strongly increase the probability of aflatoxin occurrence. There are several types of
     aflatoxins, with the most common in order of prevalence being B1, B2, G1 and G2.
     To date, aflatoxins are the only mycotoxins for which official maximum levels have
     been defined. The FDA as well as the EEC has established a maximum level of total
     aflatoxins of 20 ppb in ingredients for the feed industry.

          Usually, the quantitative rapid tests for aflatoxins have a lower limit of
     detection of 1 ppb and a limit of quantification of 5 ppb up to 50 ppb.

          In addition to the method described above, aflatoxins can be extracted,
     by weighing 10 ml of soybean products into a wide mouthed bottle and
     thoroughly mixing it in 10 ml of water. Add 100 ml of chloroform, stopper with
     a chloroform resistant bung and shake for 30 minutes. Filter the extract through
     diatomaceous earth.
                                                                                                CONTENTS




     8.17.5. Deoxynivalenol
           Deoxynivalenol (DON), commonly referred to as vomitoxin, is a trichothecene
     primarily produced by Fusarium graminearum. Fusarium growth requires a
     minimum moisture level of 19 % thus DON levels are not known to develop or
     increase during normal storage conditions. The FDA has established advisory
     levels for DON. Maximum levels for ingredients other than wheat and wheat
     by-products have been set at 5 ppm for swine and 10 ppm for ruminants (with
     a 20 % limit at the inclusion rates of these contaminated ingredients in the case
     of swine diets).

           The extraction of DON from soybean should not be performed with ethanol.
     It should be conducted with about 10 g of sample ground to 0.6 mm. Shake
     vigorously in 50 ml of de-ionized water for 3 minutes. Then the sample is filtered
     and the liquid fraction is kept for subsequent ELISA analyses.

          Usually, the rapid tests for DON have a lower limit of detection of 2.0 ppm for
     the screening tests and 0.5 ppm for the quantitative tests.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS



79
8. Chemical Analyses




     8.18. Genetically modified organisms (GMO)
         Some soybeans have been genetically modified. As market demands for
     traceability are growing and market demands for non-GMO products are decreasing,
     it is important to be able to distinguish between genetically modified and traditional
     products. Certain official maximum limits on the presence of GMO material in non-
     GMO products exist. In the EEC these levels are now fixed at a maximum of 0.9 %.
     Japanese legislation allows food products containing less than 5% of approved
     biotech crops, like corn and soybeans, to be labeled as non-GMO. In the presence of
     the extensive use of GMO soybean varieties, the risk of commingling and analytical
     variability, these minimum levels reflect in part the inability to guarantee complete
     absence of GMO material in products labeled as GMO-free.


         The GMO varieties are characterized by the insertion of a new, functional gene
     (or cluster of genes) into their genomes. The expression of these genes provides the
     soybeans with some advantages, such as resistance to insects and herbicides. Several
     commonly used GMO testing protocols, including biological tests, as well as ELISA
     and PCR (polymerase chain reaction) tests, exist. The ELISA methods are based on the
     same principle as described above for the detection of mycotoxins. A popular version
     of the ELISA test, used for screening purposes only, uses lateral flow strips that deliver
     results in a couple of minutes. This makes this test especially suited for QC purposes
     at feed mills. Quantitative ELISA tests also exist. They are normally presented as plate
     tests with the degree of color change being indicative of the level of GMO material
     present in the sample. An important limitation of the ELISA tests is that they have
     limited accuracy when applied to heat-processed ingredients; especially in the case
     of high temperature application (extrusion). The limitation applies to all products in
     which the application of high temperatures leads to substantial denaturation of the
     soy proteins, thereby making detection of proteins difficult.


         The PCR tests (more sensitive than the ELISA methods) are based on the
     detection of DNA sequences in the genome of the soybean product. The PCR is an
     extremely sensitive technique and is able to identify different types of GMOs at very
     low levels. It is also the only method that can effectively detect GMOs in heat treated
     ingredients and feeds which makes this method the preferred procedure in the case
     of most soy products. However, due to the requirements for equipment, the delay
     in obtaining results (2 to 3 days) and the level of expertise required, the test is not
     suited for routine QC analyses at the feed plant level. This test should be carried out
     in a proper laboratory setting. An additional disadvantage of this procedure is its
     tendency to give false positives which may require replicate testing.


80
8. Chemical Analyses




         Biological tests are mainly limited to the herbicide resistant soybean varieties and
     can only be applied to the untreated bean. The advantage of these tests is that they
     are relatively inexpensive and produce clear-cut results. In these tests seeds are
     placed in a germination media. The seeds are then moistened with a diluted solution
     containing the herbicide against which the seed is thought to be resistant or the
     germinated seeds are sprayed with the herbicide in question. Herbicide tolerant
     GMO seeds will germinate and/or grow normally while the non-GMO seeds will fail
     to germinate or grow. A minimum one week period is needed to carry out this test.
                                                                                                    CONTENTS




81
9. NIR ANALYSES
            Near infra-red reflectance (NIR) spectroscopy has been used for more than
        35 years to rapidly analyze grains, animal feeds and forages. The first application of
        NIR spectroscopy was developed by Norris and associates in the early sixties to
        measure water content in grains and seeds (Givens et al., 1997). Since these early
        developments NIR spectroscopy has matured to a well established and broadly
        accepted method to measure a wide array of chemical compounds in feed and food
        ingredients or diets.


            Concerning soybean products, the largest and most evident application is in the
        rapid determination of proximate components previously carried out by the time-
        consuming and laborious conventional wet chemistry. The potential of NIR to carry
        out more evolved analysis such as protein quality and ANF is a real possibility since
        the technique has been used to measure characteristics of similar complexity such
        as digestibility of individual amino acids (van Kempen and Bodin, 1998). However,
        despite the rapid answers and the major time savings made possible by NIR, the
        development of the calibrations required for protein solubility and ANF have as yet
        received little attention.


            NIR spectroscopy is based on the principle that infra-red radiation of a sample
        results in the reflection or transmittance of the radiation that is not absorbed by the
        sample. The characteristics of the reflected or transmitted radiation can be used to
        describe certain chemical characteristics of the sample. Since this relationship is not
        mathematical, the relationship between the reflected radiation and the chemical
        compound of interest must be based on a calibration. In this calibration the amount
        of light reflected (or absorbed) at one or more wavelengths are related to a specific
        chemical compound or compounds. More precisely, it is the chemical bonds and
        functional groups of the compound that are related to the reflectance at a specific
        wavelength. Consequently, molecules characterized by a repetitive bond and
        structure are often more suited for detection by NIR. The choice of a wavelength or
        a combination of wavelengths to detect a chemical compound is not necessarily
        constant. The optimum choice of wavelengths to correlate with a specific compound
        differs not only among ingredients but also among laboratories, equipment and even
        years. Also, the scattered reflectance from other compounds leads to interference.



82
9. NIR Analyses.




     Consequently, the wavelength best related to the compound of interest is the one at
     which absorption by the compound is maximized and interference by reflectance of
     other sample constituents is minimized.


         A number of items interfere with the near infra-red reflectance spectra. The
     reflectance obtained from a sample is characterized by scatter due to instrument
     type and function, sample preparation (grinding and thus particle size), temperature,
     water content and interference of reflectance from other compounds. Variations in
     water content of the sample are important because water absorbs radiation strongly.
     In order to increase the precision of NIR analyses the factors interfering with the NIR
     spectra need to be standardized when analyzing an ingredient or they need to be
     eliminated through the application of mathematical corrections on the spectrum or
     calibrations. Since standardization of sample preparations is not always practical and
     since it reduces the major benefit of NIR analyses (time savings) preference is given
     to mathematical corrections. A series of mathematical tools have been developed to
     correct the spectral data and improve the predictive capacity of the calibrations.
     The choice and application of these corrections differ considerably among the
     constituents to be analyzed. The range of mathematical tools that is available to treat
     spectral data is increasing rapidly thus improving the quality of the analysis and the
     requirements for sample preparation.


         Before routine analyses can be carried out equations need to be developed
     for each individual constituent and often the individual ingredients. Sometimes, a
     common equation can be developed for ingredients and/or their by-products.
     In the case of soy products a single equation can by used for a number of products
     if they are sufficiently alike in composition and preparation. This is for instance the
     case for all soybean meals. However as a general rule of thumb it may be said that
     the larger the physical and chemical differences among ingredients, the greater the
     need to develop separate equations.


         NIR calibrations are equations developed from a dataset composed of the
     component of interest analyzed by a standard reference method (i.e. crude protein)
     and the infra-red reflectance spectra. Least square multiple linear regression analysis
     are used to develop the prediction equation (calibration) i.e. chose the equation
     that provides the best fit between the analytical component and reflectance or
     absorption at one or more wavelengths. The calibration data set should include
     samples that represent the total chemical, physical and spectral variation normally


83
9. NIR Analyses.




     found in the population of samples that will be analyzed with the calibration. For
     instance in the case of a calibration to measure crude protein in all soybean meals
     the calibration dataset should include samples of SBM ranging from 42 to 50 % crude
     protein. Calibration sets should have the widest possible range in composition but
     above all they should be representative of all samples to be routinely analyzed with
     the equation. It is generally not recommended to include samples with extreme
     values (Shenk and Westerhaus, 1991). Extrapolation beyond the range of values
     covered in the calibrations is not acceptable. Thus for most soybean products
     separate equations will need to be developed for groups of products with similar
     characteristics and values (i.e. Full fat soybeans, SBMs, SPCs, oils etc.).


         The quality of a calibration depends greatly on the number of samples and
     the choice of the samples. The number of samples required to develop a reliable
     equation remains a subject of discussion. No definite numbers can be provided as
     the size of the calibration dataset is related to the variability within a set and the
     range of values that needs to be covered. Under most conditions applicable to
     soybean products, the number of samples will be no less than 40. The larger the set
     of well prepared and selected samples the stronger the calibration will be. Once the
     calibration established, validation of the calibration will be necessary. Samples for
     validation are subject to the same criteria for representation and number as those
     used for samples to establish the equation. Generally a smaller number are allowed
     when samples are representative of the population. Routine procedures to verify
     the validity and quality of the equation need to be established. The calibration can
     and should be strengthened through a continuous updating and expansion of the
     calibration set by adding critically selected samples.


         A number of statistical measures are used to describe the quality of a calibration
     or evaluate its predictive capacity. Most of these refer directly to the least square
     multiple linear regression techniques used to develop the equations. Most common
     measures are the regression coefficient (R2), the standard error of prediction or
     estimate (SEP) and bias (D). The R2 is a measure of the variability in the reference
     data accounted for by the regression equation; the SEP is the variability between
     predicted values and reference values when the equation is applied to the data
     other than the calibration set, and D is the average difference between the predicted
     and reference values. Ideally R2 should be as close as possible to 1.0 while SEP and
     D should be as small as possible.




84
9. NIR Analyses.




         Analyses obtained by NIR are potentially subject to a large number of errors
     related to the equipment, the calibration and validation process or sample
     preparation (Williams, 1987). Not all errors are of equal importance and their
     occurrence and impact is being reduced by the development and installation of
     more sophisticated NIR techniques and equipment. Users have learned to manage
     the equipment better and increased their understanding of the special requirements
     needed for NIR analysis. While the routine use of the equipment is quite simple, the
     maintenance and development of calibrations require a high level of expertise.
     For proper operation and in order to reduce errors clear protocols should be drawn
     up and implemented at all levels of NIR operations. It is important that these
     protocols assure continuity between the use of NIR for routine analytical functions
     and the development of new calibrations. When used for routine quality assurance
     analyses, it is important to provide a separate dust-free environment. This is often
     difficult to realize in operations dealing with commodities and feed production.


         An important number of the errors that can occur in NIR are related to the
     equipment. There is a relatively large variation between NIR equipments.
     Consequently, in the case of monochromatic equipment for instance calibrations
     cannot be transferred directly from one NIR to another without adjustments or
     corrections followed by a series of validations. Universal calibrations have been
     developed to solve the problem of transferability of calibrations. These equations
     are based on a larger dataset than normal covering often different regions and years.
     Results of these calibrations are often less accurate that those of equipment-specific
     calibrations. More recently the concept of cloning or networking NIRs has been
     developed. In these networks and through a series of mathematical corrections the
     NIRs are calibrated to provide identical spectral results. This of course facilitates
     enormously the transfer of calibrations and the verification of the different NIRs in
     the network.


         While in principle all organic compounds of a feed or feed ingredient can be
     analyzed by NIR, for most ingredients and especially for soybean products, best
     results in terms of accuracy and precision are obtained for humidity, crude protein
     and lipids. NIR results for fiber components and non-fiber carbohydrates (starch,
     sugars) normally give larger SEPs and biases and lower R2 values. NIR cannot be used
     for the analyses of minerals although a rough estimate for ash and minerals may be
     obtained by relating the reflectance at specific wavelengths to the organic matter or
     components of the organic matter (Givens et al., 1997). NIR can be used to analyze


85
9. NIR Analyses.




     other organic compounds such as amino acids (van Kempen and Bodin, 1998) ANF
     or fatty acids in soy products, however, the number of publications on this subject is
     limited and more work is needed.


     Equipment required for NIR analysis of soy products:
     •   Drying equipment (force draught oven).
     •   Wet chemistry laboratory (to conduct analyses for reference values used in
         calibration development – see previous sections).
     •   Grinder (preferably Retch grinder but this is optional; calibrations can be
         developed for un-ground, homogeneous material).
     •   NIR equipment.
     Procedure (calibration development).
     •   Dry sample to constant weight (see Section 8.1).
     •   Grind (optional).
     •   Split sample in 2 sub-samples, one for reading on NIR equipment and one for
         analysis by the reference method(s) (wet chemistry).
     •   Fill sample holder (as described in manual).
     •   Insert sample holder in NIR and read reflectance or analyte concentration.
     •   Obtain analytical results for analyte of interest by reference method
         (see Chapter 8).
     •   Using a statistical software perform multiple linear regression analysis between
         wavelength spectra (independent variable) and results of chemical analysis
         (dependent variable).
     •   Establish regression equation (high R2, low SE); beware of over-parameterization
         (use of too many wave lengths).
     •   Validate equation with samples not used to establish equation.
     •   Re-evaluate calibration regularly.


     Procedure (application):
     •   Dry sample to constant weight (see Section 8.1).
     •   Grind (optional).
     •   Fill sample holder (as described in manual).
     •   Insert sample holder in NIR and read reflectance or analyte concentration.
         (Modern apparatus have integrated computers that will give a direct reading of
         the component concentration).

                                                                                                 CONTENTS




86
10. DATA MANAGEMENT
        10.1 Sample statistics
            The physical, chemical and microbiological analyses that are performed on
        feed or soybean products provide information on the nutritional or health value of
        a selected lot (statistically speaking: the population). The analysis of the whole
        population is generally not possible. Therefore, statistical procedures are required to
        obtain information from samples to describe the population accurately.

        a. Basic assumptions:
            The distribution of a measured parameter (X) in the population of size N is
        assumed to be normal. In statistical terms, this is expressed as:
        Xi ~ N (µ,σ2). Where µ is the population mean and σ2 the population variance).


        Figure 4
            Example of a density curve describing a normal distribution




                         0.4 –                                                    Parameters:
                                                                                  mean = 48%
                                                                                  std. deviation = 1%
                         0.3 –
           Probability




                         0.2 –


                         0.1 –


                          0–
                                  I      I    I      I       I      I      I     I      I      I        I
                                 43     44   45      46     47      48     49    50    51     52        53
                                                          Protein content, %




                                      | µ−3σ|µ−2σ|       µ±1σ    |µ+2σ | µ+3σ|



87
10. Data Management




     Note: The area under the curve gives the proportion of observations that falls in a
     particular range of values.
         Properties of the normal distribution:
         68 % of the observations fall within ± 1σ of the mean µ.
         95 % of the observations fall within ± 2σ of the mean µ.
         99.7 % of the observations fall within ± 3σ of the mean µ.

         The population can be characterized by its mean µ and variance σ2 (unknown).
     The normal distribution is the most common random distribution about the mean
     value. An example of this could be the distribution of crude protein content (CP) in a
     load of soybean meal (SBM) guaranteed to contain 48 % of CP (Figure 4).

     b. Parameter estimates:
         Sample statistics are used to estimate the population parameters from a sample
     of smaller size (n). In our SBM example, this would be the estimation of the crude
     protein of all SBM in the load on the basis of a set of samples of SBM from that load.
     Main parameter estimates (Table 17) can be calculated simply from the measured
     results on the samples.
     Table 17
                 Common notation of parameters and parameter estimates

                                    Parameters             Parameter estimates
                                   (population)                 (sample)
      Mean                               µ                            X
      Variance                           σ2                           S2
      Standard deviation                 σ                            S


     Mean
         The mean x represents the average value of the analyzed component and is
     calculated by taking the sum of the measurements and dividing by the number
     of samples.
                           Σx
             Mean (x): x = n i
             Where xi: individual sample measurement, n: number of samples

     Variability
         More important than the mean of a parameter maybe the variability in the
     observations on the samples as it provides information about the spread in values
     within the population. For our example: how many samples have crude protein
     values above or below the mean and how much do they differ from the mean value?
     Different parameters can be used as indicators of the variability present in a set of
     measurements:



88
10. Data Management




             Range (w): w = xmax - xmin
             Relative percent difference (RPD) used for duplicates:
                    W
             RPD = x 100%
                    x
             Variance (S2) obtained from at least three replicates:
                   Σ(xi – x)2         Σxi2 – (Σxi)2/n
             S2 =             or S2 =
                     n–1                   n–1
             Standard deviation (s): square root of the variance. The standard deviation is
             often preferably calculated because it is expressed in the same physical unit
             as the original data.
             Coefficient of variation (CV):
                   S
             CV =     x 100%
                   x
        CV is mainly used when the size of the standard deviation changes with the
     magnitude of the mean.

     c. Presentation of analytical results (example):
         A cargo of SBM was sampled and 14 samples were collected (n = 14 replicates)
     to determine protein content of the SBM. The sampling was conducted to be
     representative on the entire load. The results of the analyses are presented in Table 18.

     Table 18.
                      Protein content of soybean meal: calculation steps to
                                determine the mean and variance
            n° sample         measurement: xi             xi – x              (xi – x)2

                  1                  50.2                  1.79                 3.19
                  2                  54.0                  5.59                31.20
                  3                  48.7                  0.29                 0.08
                  4                  44.2                 -4.21                17.76
                  5                  45.4                 -3.01                 9.09
                  6                  46.8                 -1.61                 2.61
                  7                  51.3                  2.89                 8.33
                  8                  49.7                  1.29                 1.65
                  9                  47.7                 -0.71                 0.51
                 10                  47.6                 -0.81                 0.66
                 11                  42.9                 -5.51                30.41
                 12                  48.0                 -0.41                 0.17
                 13                  52.1                  3.69                13.58
                 14                  49.2                  0.79                 0.62

              Sum Σ                 677.8                   0                  119.86
               Σ/n                 x = 48.41                 -                     -
                                                                               2
              Σ / (n-1)                -                     -                S = 9.22



89
10. Data Management




        In this example, the mean protein content in the sample was of 48.41 % of DM
     and the standard deviation of 3.04 % of DM.

        The construction of histograms is helpful to visualize the data (average value and
     range) and to determine if they follow a normal distribution. Histograms are an
     important tool in quality control (QC) because they help to identify the cause of
     problems by the shape (i.e., uni- or bimodal) and the width of the distribution.

     d. How to construct a histogram?
             This procedure was developed from the above example.
             - Calculate the range of the values: w = 54.0 – 42.9 = 11.1 % of DM
             - Choose a number of intervals (ex. 7).
               The size of the interval is equal to: w / 7 (= 1.6)
             For practical considerations, it is better to round the interval size (ex. 2 % of DM).
             - Calculate the frequency of occurrences for each interval:
                Ex. Interval: 41 - 43 > occurrence: 1
                     Interval: 45 - 47 > occurrence: 2
             - Draw the corresponding figure (Figure 5).



     Figure 5
          Histogram of the data based on seven intervals




                   0.4



                   0.3
       Frequency




                   0.2



                   0.1



                    0
                         42          44          46          48            50        52          54
                                                      Protein content, %




                                                                                                      CONTENTS

90
10. Data Management




     10.2. Quality indicators
         The reliability of analytical results and thus the quality of our estimations
     concerning the population (SBM) depend on critical parameters. First of all, the
     analytical method should be specific for the compound to be measured (ex. crude
     protein). The method should also be sensitive to variations in the amount of the
     compound under study. A small change in CP content should result in a relatively
     equivalent change in the instrumental response. Finally, accuracy and precision
     of the method are required (Figure 6) and quality indicators can help to evaluate
     these two measures.

     Figure 6
        Definition of accuracy versus precision




                    Good precision
                    Poor accurarcy



                                                                           Good precision
                                                                           Good accurarcy



                    Poor precision
                    Poor accurarcy



                                                                                        (Galyean 1997)


         In the above example, the method for crude protein analysis in SBM could
     present a poor accuracy (mean value of 46 % of DM when 48 % of DM should be
     measured) but a good precision (small range: 45.5 - 46.5 % of DM). On the contrary,
     the method could present a good accuracy (48 % of DM) and a poor precision (large
     range: 45 - 51 % of DM).

     a. Accuracy
         Accuracy is a measure of the bias between the analytical results (Xi) and the true
     value (Xt). The accuracy can be tested on a sample, when the composition is known.



91
10. Data Management




         Accuracy can be determined by: the absolute error (Xi - Xt) or the relative error:
     100 x (Xi - Xt) / Xt.
     For example, if the CP value of SBM is 48 % of DM and the analytical result yields 50,
     the method is not accurate: the absolute error for this result is 2 % of DM and the
     relative error is 4.17 %.

     How to check the accuracy of a method?
     • Certified reference materials (CRM).
       When available, CRM are materials issued and certified by an external
       organization and whose properties are validated and reliable. The use of CRM
       is a powerful tool to assess the good performance in the analytical method.
     • Laboratory reference materials (LRM)
       Because of the high cost of CRM, in-house reference standards are generally
       preferred. The standard recovery is a good indicator of the accuracy of the
       method.
     • "Spiked" sample.
       Accuracy can also be estimated by the ability to measure an amount of
       substance in a "spiked" sample. A sample is "spiked" when it contains a precisely
       measured amount of substance. This amount is adjusted to a desired and known
       level (S).
       The percent recovery is then calculated as follows:
                       QS – QN
        % Recovery =            x 100
                           S
         where QS is the measured quantity in spiked sample, QN: the measured quantity
         in unspiked sample and S: the quantity of substance in spiked sample.
     •   Blank.
         A blank is a QC sample designed to check for contamination into the sampling
         and analytical procedure. A method blank should be free of the molecule to be
         measured.
     •   Inter-laboratory comparisons.
         Inter-laboratory comparisons programs should be conducted to compare
         accuracy of analytical results.

     b. Precision
     Precision is a measure of the ability to reproduce analytical results.

     How to check the precision of a method?
         The precision can be estimated with laboratory duplicate samples. These
     samples should be collected at the same time and location and analyzed in the same
     conditions. Laboratory duplicates intended to be identical to the original sample.
     Precision can be determined by calculating the relative percent difference of the


92
10. Data Management




     duplicates. It can also be calculated by the standard deviation or coefficient of
     variation when three or more replicates are used. High variability (RPD, s, CV) among
     duplicates reflects low precision. Table 19 depicts typical and acceptable coefficients
     of variation for common analyses.

     Table 19
                Typical ranges and acceptable coefficients of variation for
                     proximate analysis in feedstuffs (Galyean, 1997)
        Analysis                    Typical range, %              Acceptable CV, %

        DM                                80 - 100                        0.5
        Ash                                0 - 20                         2.0
        CP                                 5 - 50                         2.0
        ADF                                5 - 70                         3.0
        NDF                               10 - 80                         3.0
        ADL                                0 - 20                         4.0
        EE                                 1 - 20                         4.0

                                                                                               CONTENTS




     10.3. Significance of parameter estimates
     a. Hypothesis tests
         These tests can be performed to address the uncertainty of the sample estimates
     and to take decisions about the validity of the data (Feinberg, 1996). For example, it
     can help to determine if an observed value of a statistic differs from a hypothesized
     value of a parameter. For our example on SBM the question is:“Is the crude protein
     analyzed in the sample really different from the population of all SBM in the load?”
     To answer this, generally two hypotheses can be tested:
         Ho: "null hypothesis". The population mean is equal to a reference value
         (µ − µo = 0).
         The mean value of crude protein in all SBM is equal to 48 % of DM.
         H1: "alternative hypothesis". The population mean is different to the reference
         value (µ − µo ≠ 0). The mean value of crude protein in all SBMs differs from
         48 % of DM.

     Select a level of significance (α):
         The level of significance represents the probability to reject the hypothesis Ho.
     By convention, α is set at 5 % - sometimes 10 % is accepted but this increases the
     probability of being wrong (10 % vs. 5 %).


93
10. Data Management




     Calculate the test statistics, in other words test the hypothesis from
     the sample data:
         The test procedure measures the compatibility between the null hypothesis
     and the data. Several statistical tests exist. The choice of the statistical test will
     depend on the sample (size), the knowledge on population parameters (ex. variance),
     the accepted/assumed probability and the hypotheses under question.
         For example: can it be concluded from the sampling procedures that the mean
     value of CP in SBM is 48 % of DM? The Student t-test of the population mean is the
     test of choice for this case (n small, σ unknown); the following formula can be used
     for one-sample testing:
              x–µ
          t = s o , therefore t = 48.41 – 48 = 0.51
                                        3.04
               √n                       √14
     Determine the P-value:
          The probability value (P-value) of a statistical hypothesis test is the probability
     to obtain results equal to or more "extreme" in future experiments (given that Ho is
     true). This probability (P) can be determined using statistical tables to compare the
     value of the test statistic (ex. 0.51) with values from the probability distribution
     (ex. Student distribution). The Student t-test and the Normal z tables are presented
     in Appendix 7 and 8.

         In the above example, the lower and upper bounds for a Student-t test statistic
     with n-1 = 13 degrees of freedom: (tp13) can be determined with the tables in
     appendix 7: t0.4 (13) < 0.51 < t0.25 (13), therefore P ranges from 0.25 to 0.4.
     The P-value for a two-sided test is twice the P-value of a one-sided test; consequently,
     in the above example P is between 0.50 and 0.80. The computed actual P-value is
     equal to 0.62.

     Set up decision rules:
     P-value ≤ α
          The difference is said to be "statistically significant" when P, the probability that
     Ho is true given the sample data, is less or equal to the level of significance. In that
     case, it can be concluded that results are not due to chance and the hypothesis Ho
     can be rejected.
     P-value > α
          The difference is attributed to chance or to an error of measurement. In that case,
     the null hypothesis cannot be rejected; alternatively, Ho is accepted. In the above
     example, P-value is 0.62 (p > 0.05) therefore it is concluded that the crude protein
     content of SBM is not statistically different from 48 % of DM.
          Two types of errors may occur (Table 20-next page). Ho is rejected when it is true
     (type I error). Ho is accepted when H1 is true (type II error). The probability α represents
     the "producer's risk" whereas β represents the "consumer's risk". For example, α is the
     risk of rejecting a "good" lot and β, the risk of accepting a "bad" lot.


94
10. Data Management




     Table 20
                               Error types in hypothesis testing

                                                         Actual situation
                                                H0                           H1
                                            Type I error                Correct
                      Reject Ho
                                               (P : α)                 (P : 1 – β)
        Decision
                                              Correct                 Type II error
                      Retain Ho
                                             (P : 1 – α)                    (P : β)

          The results of the tests should always be applied with caution. It is particularly
     important to choose an appropriate sample size to answer the question and detect
     differences. The ability of the test to detect differences (P = 1 – β), called power of
     the test, depends on the size of the difference, the sample size and the level of
     significance. The test's power increases as sample size increases but decreases as the
     level of significance increases. Typical power probabilities are set at 0.80, the sample
     size needed to reach this value can then be estimated.

     b. Confidence interval
         The sample mean and the population mean are rarely exactly the same but
     sometimes we like to be able to say that we are pretty sure that the population is
     within a given amount of our sample mean. Statistically it is possible to calculate an
     interval around the sample mean with a given level of confidence (probability).
     Interval estimates are dependent on the heterogeneity or variance associated with
     the measured variable (s2), the number of samples (n) and the probability of being
     wrong (α).
         The confidence interval for the mean µ of the population (σ unknown) can be
     determined with the z or t values in statistical tables (Appendix 7, 8):
         - in the case of a small sample from a normal population:
                              s
            x ± t α/2 (n –1)
                             √n
         - in the case of a large sample from a normal population (n > 30):
                        s
            x ± z α/2
                       √n
     For our example:
                              s = 48.41 ± t       (13) 3.04
            x ± t α/2 (n –1)
                             √n                        √14
                                            0.025


                                                    3.04
                                = 48.41 ± 2.16 x
                                                    √14
                                = [46.66 - 50.16]

        Thus we are 95 % confident that the average crude protein content in SBM is
     between 46.7 and 50.2 % of DM.


95
10. Data Management




     c. Sample size determination
         Sampling is costly and time-consuming, therefore it is important to know what
     sample size should be selected to obtain a desired precision. The sample size can be
     determined if we know the confidence required (P-value; ex. α = 0.05), the variability
     in the population and the precision required. The precision is expressed as H,
     representing half the width of the confidence interval. The answer should be
     rounded up to next following whole number.

         - unknown population variance: n =   ( t αH s )2
                                                  ( /2)




         - known population variance (σ): n =   (z αH σ)2
                                                  ( /2)



                                                                                                CONTENTS




     10.4. Control charts
         Control charts are efficient devices to control an analytical method and to
     check its stability over time (Daudin and Tapiero, 1996). They are used to indicate the
     range of variability of a process and to decide whether the process is under statistical
     control. In certification schemes (HCAPP, ISO, GMP) and solid quality control
     programs, they have become fundamental tools. For routine QC procedures, different
     types of charts are developed depending on the controlled parameter (average or
     range) and the number of replicates per sample.
         - Measurements in group (X or range chart)
         - Individual measurements (individual X or moving range chart)
     Historical data and experience are generally used to establish the specific charts.

     Basic Principles
     A control chart is composed of:
         - A centerline:
           This value is calculated as the average value of a large number of samples
           plotted (n > 30).
         - Horizontal lines:
           These lines represent the upper control limits (UCL) and the lower control
           limits (LCL). Typically, these limits are calculated based on the mean and
           standard deviation:
           • warning control limits: mean ± 2s
           • action control limits: mean ± 3s
     The data is plotted over time.




96
10. Data Management




          The results of the analytical measurements are plotted in chronological order on
     the control chart. If the process is in control, the sample points will fall between the
     control limits. However, points that plot outside of the control limits are interpreted
     as evidence that the process is out of control. Exceeding a warning control limit
     generally means that the process is not operating properly. The analyst can try to
     assess the source of errors, however, no action is needed, providing that next results
     fall within the warning limits. Exceeding an action control limit leads to the necessary
     identification and elimination of the causes of errors.

     How to develop an individual control chart?
         When samples are individual measurements, control charts can be drawn up very
     simply. In this case, the moving range xi – xi-1 can be calculated for each pair of
     data (see Table 21).
     The lines are then defined as follows:
         Centerline: x = 48.41
         The standard deviation of the process is estimated from the average moving
         range (MR) divided by 1.128 (conversion factor d2 for n = 2).
     Action control limits:
                MR
         x ± 3 1.128
         (LCL = 39.98 and UCL = 56.84).

     Table 21
                       Protein content (% of DM) in soybean meal samples

                n° sample              measurement: xi             moving range
                        1                     50.2                           -
                        2                      54                           3.8
                        3                     48.7                          5.3
                        4                     44.2                          4.5
                        5                     45.4                          1.2
                        6                     46.8                          1.4
                        7                     51.3                          4.5
                        8                     49.7                          1.6
                        9                     47.7                           2
                       10                     47.6                          0.1
                       11                     42.9                          4.7
                       12                      48                           5.1
                       13                     52.1                          4.1
                       14                     49.2                          2.9
                 Average                    x = 48.41                  MR   = 3.17




97
10. Data Management




     Figure 7
                        Control chart for protein content (% of DM) analyses in soybean meal samples



                         58 –                                                     Upper control limit
                            –
                         54 –
                            –
      Protein content




                         50 –
                            –
                         46 –
                            –
                         42 –
                                                                                  Lower control limit
                            –
                         38 –I   I     I    I     I    I       I    I    I   I    I     I       I     I
                             1   2    3     4    5     6      7     8    9   10   11   12      13    14
                                                           Sampling number



     The process can be said to be “in control” since none of the points fall outside the control
     limits (Figure 7).
                                                                                                      CONTENTS




     10.5. Follow-up and application of analytical results
         Analyses of any type are always associated with uncertainty. Indeed, both systematic
     and random errors can occur. Therefore, it is important to evaluate the size of the errors and
     to have an estimation of the reliability of the analytical results. This procedure should be part
     of a standard quality control procedure and needs to be developed through a joint effort
     between analysts and nutritionists. Each has a specific responsibility/task, which can be
     summarized as follows:




98
10. Data Management




     a. Analyst:
         •   Perform the sampling and analysis correctly.
         •   Use proper QC measures to validate the data and to keep systematic and
             random errors under control: calibration standards, controls, duplicate field
             samples and blanks to estimate sampling errors, laboratory duplicates to
             estimate analytical errors.
         •   Establish quality objectives (precision, accuracy) or quality acceptance limits.
             The acceptable level of variation between duplicates varies by test and by
             concentration of nutrient (Table 3).
         •   Propose corrective actions (re-sampling, re-calibration...) if needed.



     b. Nutritionist:
         •   Define the parameters that need to be analyzed.
         •   Include ingredient quality specifications in the purchasing agreement
             and provide this information to the analyst.
         •   Adjust formulation.
         •   Find alternative ingredient if quality specifications are not met.

         The objectives of the analyst and the nutritionist may be to reduce variation
     (increase quality of the results) but also to maximize the value of a raw material.
     There is a subjective judgment associated with quality control. The risk of type I or
     type II errors exists. It is possible to reduce these risks (higher significance level,
     higher power of the tests, and larger number of samples) but this is generally
     associated with a higher cost.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS




99
11. REFERENCES
         AACC, 1976. American Association of Cereal Chemists, Cereal Laboratory Methods,
           St. Paul, Minn., USA, 1968.
         AAFCO, 2001. Official Publication 2001. Association of American Feed Control
           Officials Incorporated. Atlanta, GA.
         AFNOR XP V18-202, 1997. Aliments des animaux: dosage des inhibiteurs
            trypsiques. Agence française de normalisation, Paris, France.
         Anderson-Haferman, J. C., Y. Zhang, C. M. Parsons, and T. Hymoitz. 1992. Effect
            of heating on the nutritional quality of kunitz-trypsin-inhibitor-free and
            conventional soybeans for chickens. Poultry Sci. 71:1700-1709.
         AOAC, 1980. Official Methods of Analysis of the Association of Official Analytical
           Chemists.
         AOAC, 1990. Official methods of analysis. 15th edition. AOAC, Arlington, VA.
         AOAC, 1995. Animal Feed. Chapter 4 in “Official methods of analysis” 16th ed. AOAC
                                                                            .
           International, Arlington, VI, USA.
         AOAC, 2000. Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International, 17th d. Official
           method 968.06.
         AOCS, 1980. Urease Activity. Official Method Ba 9-58. American Oil Chemists Society.,
                Champagne, IL.
         AOCS, 1989. Official method Ba 11-54. Nitrogen Solubility Index (NSI).
         AOCS, 1993a. Official method Ba 10-65. Protein dispersibility index (PDI).
         AOCS, 1993b. Volume 1, Official Method Ca 6c – 40.
         AOCS Method 1997. Ba 12-75. In Official methods and recommended practices of
           the American Oil Chemists Society. American Oil Chemists Society, Champaign,
           Illinois.
         Araba and Dale, 1990. Evaluation of protein solubility as an indicator of over-
            processing of soybean meal . Poultry Sci. 69: 76-83.
         ASA, 1998. Soy Importers Handbook, 2nd ed. American Soybean Association, United
            Soybean Board, Missouri Soybean Merchandising Council.
         ASAE, 1993. American Society of Agricultural Engineers. Methods of determining
            and expressing fineness of feed materials by sieving. ASAE Standard ASAE S319.2.
         Bach, A., M. D. Stern, N. R. Merchen, and J. K. Drackley. 1998. Evaluation of
            selected mathematical approaches used to describe the kinetics of protein
            degradation in situ. Anim. Sci. 76:2885-2893.
         Batal, A.B., M.W. Douglas, A.E. Engram, and C.M. Parsons. 2000. Protein
            dispersibility index as an indicator of adequately processed soybean meal.
            Poultry Sci., 79: 1592-1596.


100
11. References




      Berk, Z., 1992.“Technology of production of edible flours and protein products from
         soybeans” FAO Agricultural services Bulletin No. 97.
                   .
      Broderick, G. A. 1987. Determination of protein degradation rates using a rumen
         in vitro system containing inhibitors of microbial nitrogen metabolism.
         Br. J. Nutr. 58:463-475.
      Caine, W. R., M. W. A. Verstegen, W. C. Sauer, S. Tamminga and H. Schulze.
         1998. Effect of protease treatment of soybean meal on content of total soluble
         matter and crude protein and level of soybean trypsin inhibitors. Anim. Feed.
         Sci. Technol. 71:177-183.
      CFIA, 2003. Canadian Food Inspection Agency, Approved Feed Ingredients, Schedule
         IV Part 1, List of approved feed ingredients, Class 5.
         http://www.inspection.gc.ca/english/anima/feebet/sched4/tab_ae.shtml
      Chamberlain, D. G., and P. C. Thomas. 1979. Ruminal nitrogen metabolism and
         the passage of amino acids to the duodenum in sheep receiving diets containing
         hay and concentrates in various proportions. J. Sci. Food Agric. 30: 677-686.
      Cook, D.R. 1998. The effect of dietary soybean isoflavones on the rate and efficiency
         of growth and carcass muscle content in pigs and rats. Ph.D. dissertation. Iowa
         State Univ., Ames
      CVB, 2000. Centraal Veevoederbureau; Veevoedertabel 2000; chemische
         samenstelling, verteerbaarheid en voederwaarde van voedermiddelen.
      Daudin J-J. and Tapiero C.S., 1996. Les outils et les contrôles de la qualité.
         Economica (ed.), Paris, France, 112p.
      de Lange, C.F.M., Nyachoti, C.M., Verstegen, M.W.A., 2000. The significance of
         anti-nutritional factors in feedstuffs for monogastric animals. In: Feed evaluation
         principles and practice, Moughan, P.J., Verstegen, M.W.A. and Visser-Reyneveld,
         M.I. (eds). Wageningen Press, 169-188.
      Delort-Laval, J., 1991. Dosage des facteurs anti-nutritionnels. In: Techniques
         d'analyse et de contrôle dans les industries agro-alimentaires. Vol. 4: Analyse des
         constituants alimentaires, Tec & Doc, Lavoisier, 371-387.
      Dudley-Cash, W.A. 1999. Methods for determining quality of soybean meal protein
        important. Feedstuffs. Vol 71. N°1 January 4 1999.
      FEDNA, 1994.“Normas FEDNA para la Formulacion de Piensos Compuestos; valor
         nutritivo de los concentrados de proteina vegetal” G. de Blas, G.G. Mateos y
                                                          .
         P.G. Rebollar.
      Feinberg M., 1996. La validation des méthodes d'analyse. Masson (ed.), Paris,
         France, 397p.
      Frankel, E. N. 1984. Lipid oxidation: mechanism, products and biological
         significance. JAOCS. 61:1908-1917.
      Galyean M.L., 1997. Laboratory procedures in animal nutrition research, 193p.
         Web: http://www.asft.ttu.edu/home/mgalyean/




101
11. References




      Gill, C., 2003.“World Feed Panorama: Back to basics of growth” Feed International
                                                                   .
          p. 6.
      GIPSA, 1995. Grain Inspection, Processors and Stockyard Administration.
         Grain Inspection Handbook 1. Federal Grain Inspection Service, USDA.
      Givens, D.I., J.L. De Boever and E.R. Deauville. 1997. The principles , practices
         and some future applications of near infrared reflectance spectroscopy for
         predicting the nutritive value of foods for animals and humans. Nutrition
         Research Reviews, 10:83-114.
      Goering, H. K. and P. J. Van Soest. 1970. Forage fiber analyses (apparatus,
         reagents, procedures and some applications). USDA-ARS Agricultural Handbook
         379. U.S. Government Printing Office., Washington, DC.
      Hanssen, O.K., 2003.“Soya is no soya”: (soya proteins for feed products).
         Feed International 23 (9):14-18.
      Heppell, L.M.J., Sissons, J.W., Pederson, H.E., 1987. A comparison of the anti-
         genicity of soya-bean-based infant formulas. Br. J. Nut., 58, 393-403.
      Herrman, T., 2001. Sampling: Procedures for Feed. Kansas State University
         Agricultural Experiment Station and Cooperative Extension Service. MF-2036.
         Feed Manufacturing.
      Huisman, J. and Tolman, G.H., 1992. Antinutritional factors in the plant proteins of
         diets for non-ruminants. In: Recent advances in Animal Nutrition, Garnsworthy,
         P.C., Haresign, W. and Cole, D.J.A. (eds). Butterworth Heinemann, 3-32.
      INFIC, 1980.“International Feed Descriptions, International Feed Names and Country
         Feed Names” International Network of Feed Information Centres, Publication
                      .
         No. 5, Utah State University, Logan.
      INRA-AFZ, 2002. Tables de composition et de valeur nutritive des matières
         premières destinées aux animaux d’élevage. Sauvant,D, J.-M Perez et G. Tran, Eds.
      Kakade, M.L., N. Simons and I.E. Liener, 1969. An evaluation of natural versus
         synthetic substrates for measuring the antitryptic activity of soyabeans samples.
         Cereal Chem. 46, 518-526.
      Kakade, M.L., J.J. Rackis, J.E. McGhee and G. Puski, 1974. Determination of
         trypsin inhibitor activity of soy products: a collaborative analysis of an improved
         procedure. Cereal Chem. 51, 376-382.
      Kerley, M.S., & Allee, G.L. (2003). Modifications in soybean seed composition to
         enhance animal feed use and value: Moving from a dietary ingredient to a
         functional dietary component. AgBioForum, 6(1&2), 14-17. Available on the
         World Wide Web: http://www.agbioforum.org.
      Lee, H. and J. D. Garlich. 1992. Effect of overcooked soybean meal on chicken
         performance and amino acid availability. Poultry Sci. 71:499-508.
      Lee, S.J., Ahn, J.K., Kim, S.H., Kim, J.T., Han, S.J., Jung, M.Y., Chung, I.M., 2003.
         Variation in isoflavone of soybean cultivars with location and storage duration.
         J. Agric. Food Chem., 51, 3382-3389.



102
11. References




      Liener, I.E., 2000.“Non-Nutritive Factors and Bioactive Compounds in Soy. In: Soy in
         Animal Nutrition” Ed. J.D. Drackley. Federation of Animal Science Societies.
                           .
      Liu, K., 1997.“Soybeans: Chemistry, Technology, and Utilization” Aspen Publishers,
                                                                     ,
          New York.
      Mahadevan, S., F. D. Sauer, and J. D. Erfle. 1987. Preparation of protease from
        mixed rumen microorganisms and its use for the in vitro determination of the
        degradability of true protein in feedstuffs. Can. J. Anim. Sci. 67: 55-64.
      McNaughton, J. M., F. N. Reece, and J. W. Deaton. 1980. Effect of moisture
        content and cooking time on soybean meal urease index, trypsin inhibitor
        content, and broiler performance. Poultry Sci. 59:2300-2306.
      Nocek, J. E., J. H. Herbein, and C. E. Polan. 1983. Total amino acid release rates of
         soluble and insoluble protein fractions of concentrate feedstuffs by Streptomyces
         griseus. J. Dairy Sci. 66:1663-1667.
      NOPA, 1997. National Oil Producers Association. Yearbook 1997. 1225 Twenty-third
        street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037, U.S.A.
      NOPA, 1999. 1997-1999 Yearbook and Trading Rules. National Oilseed Processors
        Association, Washington, D.C.
      NRC, 1982. National Research Council.“United States-Canadian Tables of Feed
        Composition”; Third Revision. National Academy Press, Washington D.C.
      NRC, 1998. Nutrient requirements of swine; Tenth Revised Edition, National Academy
        of Sciences 1998.
      NRC, 2001. Nutrient requirements of dairy cattle; Seventh Revised Edition, National
        Academy of Sciences 2001.
      Parsons, C. M., K. Hashimoto, K. J. Wedekind, and D. H. Baker. 1991. Soybean
         protein solubility in potassium hydroxide: an in vitro test of in vivo protein
         quality. J. Anim. Sci. 69:2918-2924.
      Parsons, C. M., K. Hashimoto, K. J. Wedekind, Y. Han and D. H. Baker. 1992.
         Effect of over-processing on availability of amino acids and energy in soybean
         meal. Poultry Sci., 71:133-140.
      Payne, R.L., T.D. Bidner, L.L. Southern and J.P. Geaghan. 2000. Effects of dietary
         soy isoflavones on growth , carcass traits, and meat quality in growing-finishing
         pigs. The Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. No.: 2000-11-0323.
      Peisker, M., 2001. Manufacturing of soy protein concentrate for animal Nutrition.
         Cahiers Options Mediterraneennes, 54, 103 -107.
      Poos-Floyd, M., T. Klopfenstein, and R. A. Britton. 1985. Evaluation of
         laboratory techniques for predicting ruminal protein degradation.
         J. Dairy Sci. 68:829-839.
      Pusztai, A., 1991. Plant lectins. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
      Schulze, H., Saini, H.S., Huisman, J., Hessing, M., van der Berg, W.,
         Verstegen, M.W.A., 1995. Increased N secretion by inclusion of soya lectin in
         the diets of pigs. J. Sci. food Agric., 69, 501-510.


103
11. References




      Shenk, J.S. and M.O. Westerhaus, 1991. Population definition, sample selection,
         and calibration procedures for near infrared reflectance spectroscopy.
         Crop Science, 31:469-474.
      Shermer,W.D et al. 1985. Oxidation of feed: How much has occurred.
         Feedstuff, 4:19-20
      Shipley, R. A., and R. E. Clark. 1972. Tracer Methods for In Vivo Kinetics: Theory
         and Application. Academic Press, New York.
      Speedy, A.W. 2002.“Overview of World Feed Protein Needs and Supply” FAO Expert
                                                                           .
         Consultation and Workshop on Protein Sources for the Animal Feed Industry.
         Bangkok, Thailand.
      Sukhija, P.S., and D.L. Palmquist, 1988. Dissociation of calcium soaps of long-
         chain fatty acids in rumen fluid. J Dairy Sci. 1990. 73:1784-7.
      Tilley, J. M. A., and R. A. Terry. 1963. A two-stage technique for the in vitro
          digestion of forage crops. J. Br. Grassl. Soc. 18:104.
      Tremblay, G. F., G. A. Broderick, and S. M. Abrams. 1996. Estimating ruminal
         protein degradability of roasted soybeans using near infrared reflectance
         spectroscopy. J. Dairy Sci. 79: 276-282.
      Trucksess, M.W., M.E. Stack, S. Nesheim, D.L. Park and A.E. Pohland. 1989.
         Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay of aflatoxins B1,B2 and G1 in corn,
         cottonseed, peanuts, peanut butter and poultry feed: collaborative study.
         J. of the Assoc. of Official Chemists 72, 957-962.
      Tukur, H.M., Lallès, J.P., Mathis, C., Caugant, I., Toullec, R., 1993. Digestion of
         soybean globulins, glycinin, α-conglycinin and β-conglycinin in the preruminant
         and the ruminant calf. Can. J. Anim. Sci., 73, 891-905.
      Tukur, H.M., Lallès, J.P., Plumb, G.W., Mills, E.N.C., Morgan, M.R.A., Toullec, R.,
         1996. Investigation of the relationship between in vitro ELISA measures of
         immunoreactive soy globulins and in vivo effects of soy products.
         J. Agr. Food Chem., 44, 2155-2161
      UNEP, 1999.“Agri Food Production; Facts and Figures” UNEP Industry and
                                                         .
        Environment, p 4 – 31.
      USDA, 1999.“United States Standards for Soybeans (Revised edition June 1999)”
                                                                                  .
        Subpart A – General Provisions Terms Defined.
      USDA, 2001.“Grain inspection, packers and stockyards administration”Technical
        services administration.
        http://www.usda.gov/gipsa/reference-library/brochures/soyinspection.pdf
      USDA, 2003.“Oilseeds: World Markets and Trades” Circular series FOP 02 – 03 Foreign
                                                       .
        Agricultural Service. U.S. Department of Agriculture.
      USDA-IOWA State University, 2002. Database on the isoflavone contents of food,
        release 1.3.
        Web: http://www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/foodcomp/Data/isoflav/isoflav.html




104
11. References




      Van Kempen, T.A. and J.C. Bodin, 1998. Near infrared reflectance spectroscopy
         (NIRS) seems to be superior to nitrogen-based regressions as a rapid tool in
         predicting the poultry digestible amino acid content of commonly used
         feedstuffs. Anim. Feed Sci. Technol.76:139-147.
      Van Soest, P. J., J. B. Robertson, and B. A. Lewis. 1991. Methods for dietary fiber,
         neutral detergent fiber, and nonstarch polysaccharides in relation to animal
         nutrition. J. Dairy Sci. 74: 3583-3597.
      Waldroup, P. W., B. E. Ransey, H. M. Hellwig and N. K. Smith. 1985. Optimum
         processing for soybean meal used in broiler diets. Poultry Sci. 64:2314-2320.
      Wang, H.-J. and Murphy, P.A., 1994. Isoflavone content in commercial soybean
        foods. J. Agric. Food Chem., 42, 1666-1673.
      West, B. 2002.“EU soybean meal purchasing patterns and quality assurance”
                                                                              .
        Final report. American Soybean Association (ASA)
      Whittle, E., and M. Araba. 1992. Sources of variation in the protein solubility assay
        for soybena meal. J. Appl. Poultry Res. 1:221-225.
      Williams, P.C., 1987. Variables affecting near-infrared reflectance spectroscopic
         analysis. In: P. Williams and K. Norris (eds.) Near-Infrared Technology in the
         Agricultural and Food Industries. St. Paul, MN; American Association of Cereal
         Chemists Inc., pp. 143-167.
      Witte, V. C., G. F. Krause, and M. E. Bailey. 1970. A new extraction method for
         determining 2-Thiobarbituric acid values of pork and beef during storage.
         J. Food Sci. 35:582—585.
                                                                                                 CONTENTS




105
12. ANNEX
      Appendix 1
                 Average nutrient composition of soy protein products used in livestock diets
                                                                 Heat
                                        Soybean      Ground    processed     Soy       Soy
                                          seeds    FF soybean FF soybean   protein   protein    Soybean
      Nutrient                 Unit     extruded      seeds      seeds   concentrate isolate      hulls

      Dry matter                %        88.10       89.72       89.44       91.83     93.38     89.76
      Crude protein             %        34.80       37.50       37.08       68.60     85.88     12.04
      Crude fiber               %         5.20        5.03        5.12        1.65      1.32     34.15
      Ether extracts            %        17.90       18.04       18.38        2.00      0.62      2.16
      Ash                       %         5.20        4.77        4.86        5.15      3.41      4.53
      NDF                       %        11.00       12.50       12.98       13.50         –     56.91
      ADF                       %         6.40        8.80        7.22        5.38         –     42.05
      ADL                       %         1.00        4.10        4.30        0.40         –      2.05
      Starch                    %         0.00        4.59        4.66           –         –      5.95
      Total sugars              %         7.70           –           –           –         –      1.40
      Gross energy            kcal/kg    4870        5027        5013            –     5370      3890
      DE-swine                kcal/kg    3800        4157        4088        4517      4545      1944
      ME energy-swine         kcal/kg    3560        3739        3714        3661      3955      1687
      NE-swine                kcal/kg    2560        2920        2803        2000      2000      1074
      App. ME-broiler         kcal/kg    3350        3475        3332            –     4060          –
      App. ME-adults          kcal/kg    3450        3621        3564        2472      3945       334
      ME-ruminants            kcal/kg    3400        3373        3400        2690          –     1241
      NE-dairy                kcal/kg    2159        1986        2097        1600          –     1544
      NE-beef                 kcal/kg    2311        2080        2230        1610          –     1618

      Amino acids

      Lysine                    %         2.16        2.39       2.34        4.59      5.26      0.73
      Threonine                 %         1.40        1.54       1.53        2.82      3.17      0.73
      Methionine                %         0.53        0.51       0.52        0.87      1.01      0.14
      Cystine                   %         0.56        0.55       0.55        0.89      1.19      0.16
      Tryptophane               %         0.44        0.49       0.49        0.81      1.08      0.12
      Isoleucine                %         1.61        1.78       1.79        3.68      4.25      0.41
      Valine                    %         1.66        1.88       1.85        3.69      4.21      0.49
      Leucine                   %         2.59        2.81       2.76        5.41      6.65      0.75
      Phenylalanine             %         1.74        1.84       1.87        3.60      4.35      0.47
      Tyrosine                  %         1.23        1.18       1.22        1.55      3.14      0.43
      Histidine                 %         0.93        0.95       0.96        2.41      2.25      0.29
      Arginine                  %         2.57        2.73       2.71        7.34      6.87      0.62
      Alanine                   %         1.41        1.54       1.52          –       3.33      0.51
      Aspartic acid             %         3.88        4.09       4.06          –       8.29      1.14
      Glutamine                 %         6.17        6.37       6.35          –       12.0      1.49
      Glycine                   %         1.48        1.52       1.59        3.32      3.38      0.85
      Serine                    %         1.78        1.94       1.89        5.19      4.81      0.67
      Proline                   %         1.83        1.89       1.86          –       4.45      0.55


106
12. Annex




                                                                    Heat
                                         Soybean        Ground    processed     Soy       Soy
                                           seeds      FF soybean FF soybean   protein   protein    Soybean
      Nutrient                  Unit     extruded        seeds      seeds   concentrate isolate      hulls

      Minerals
      Calcium                   g/kg         3.10         2.58          2.62       2.37     1.50     4.96
      Phosphorus                g/kg         5.50         5.83          5.70       7.63     6.50     1.59
      Magnesium                 g/kg         2.30         2.98          2.80       1.85     0.80     2.23
      Potasium                  g/kg        18.50        14.60         15.93      12.35     2.75    12.15
      Sodium                   g/kg          0.80         0.20          0.29       0.55     2.85     0.10
      Chloride                  g/kg         0.40         0.25          0.33       0.20     0.20     0.25
      Sulfur                    g/kg         2.80         2.20          2.43       0.70     7.00     0.95
      Manganese                mg/kg        23.00        36.00         31.79      27.50     5.00    10.67
      Zinc                     mg/kg        40.00        57.00         47.80      47.00    34.00    37.75
      Copper                   mg/kg        34.00         6.90         15.17      17.00    14.00    10.68
      Iron                     mg/kg       146.00        84.00        128.01     137.00   137.00   437.50
      Selenium                 mg/kg         0.28         0.11          0.17       0.14     0.14     0.16
      Cobalt                   mg/kg            –            –             0          –        –     0.06
      Molybdenum               mg/kg         4.00            –          2.00          –        –     0.60

      Fatty acids
      Myristic acid-C14:0        %           0.01          0.03          0.03        –        –         0
      Palmitic acid-C16:0        %           1.05          1.47          1.95        –        –      0.24
      Palmitoleic acid-C16:1     %           0.02          0.03          0.04        –        –         0
      Stearic acid-C18:0         %           0.38          0.53          0.71        –        –      0.09
      Oleic acid-C18:1           %           2.17          2.97          3.96        –        –      0.50
      Linoleic acid-C18:2        %           5.31          7.28          9.70        –        –      1.21
      Linolenic acid-C18:3       %           0.74          1.06          1.40        –        –      0.17

      FF Soybean is Full Fat Soybean; SBM = Soybean meal.
      Source: compilation on NRC, INRA-AFZ, CVB, SRTNA and selected suppliers.




107
12. Annex




      Appendix 2
              Average nutrient composition of soy protein products used in livestock diets
                                                SBM          SBM         SBM
                                    SBM        solvent      solvent     solvent Soybean
                                 mechanically extracted    extracted   extracted  mill  Soybean
       Nutrient             Unit  extracted      44           48          50      feed     oil

       Dry matter            %       89.80        88.08       87.58      88.20      89.70    99.25
       Crude protein         %       43.92        44.02       46.45      48.79      12.93     1.40
       Crude fiber           %        5.50         6.26        5.40       3.42      33.47        –
       Ether extracts        %        5.74         1.79        2.13       1.30       1.70    97.20
       Ash                   %        5.74         6.34        6.02       5.78       4.73     0.40
       NDF                   %       21.35        13.05       11.79       9.95          –        –
       ADF                   %       10.20         8.76        7.05       5.00      41.40        –
       ADL                   %        1.17         0.75        0.90       0.40          –        –
       Starch                %        7.00         5.51        5.46       3.28          –        –
       Total sugars          %           –         9.06        9.17       9.29          –        –
       Gross energy        kcal/kg       –        4165        4130       4120           –        –
       DE-swine            kcal/kg       –        3394        3446       3776       1167     8915
       ME energy-swine     kcal/kg       –        2986        3210       3299        925     8400
       NE-swine            kcal/kg       –        1903        1955       1992           –    6760
       App. ME-broiler     kcal/kg       –        1929        1973       2147           –    8600
       App. ME-adult       kcal/kg       –        2171        2208       2464        774     8805
       ME-ruminants        kcal/kg       –        2831        2840       3010       1630     8180
       NE-dairy            kcal/kg       –        1706        1748       1826       1001     4520
       NE-beef             kcal/kg       –        1838        1847       1993        965     5022

       Amino acids

       Lysine                %        3.50         2.85        2.89        3.00      0.65       –
       Threonine             %        2.21         1.80        1.84        1.90      0.30       –
       Methionine            %        0.80         0.62        0.63        0.67      0.13       –
       Cystine               %        0.77         0.68        0.73        0.73      0.14       –
       Tryptophane           %        0.74         0.56        0.63        0.65      0.13       –
       Isoleucine            %        2.88         2.26        2.17        2.30      041        –
       Valine                %        2.73         2.19        2.30        2.38      0.38       –
       Leucine               %        4.29         3.42        3.60        3.60      0.58       –
       Phenylalanine         %        2.79         2.16        2.37        2.37      0.38       –
       Tyrosine              %        1.52         1.61        1.68        1.64      0.23       –
       Histidine             %        1.44         1.64        1.21        1.21      0.18       –
       Arginine              %        3.98         2.99        3.48        3.53      0.75       –
       Alanine               %        1.85         2.53        2.05        2.04         –       –
       Aspartic acid         %        5.16         4.03        5.49        5.55         –       –
       Glutamine             %        8.18         6.29        8.62        8.52         –       –
       Glycine               %        2.29         3.46        1.97        2.09      0.48       –
       Serine                %        2.20         2.13        2.38        2.49      0.30       –
       Proline               %        2.35         2.17        2.37        2.43         –       –




108
12. Annex




                                                    SBM              SBM           SBM
                                        SBM        solvent          solvent       solvent Soybean
                                     mechanically extracted        extracted     extracted  mill  Soybean
      Nutrient                  Unit  extracted      44               48            50      feed     oil

      Minerals

      Calcium                   g/kg      2.96           3.12          3.07         2.68     4.05      –
      Phosphorus                g/kg      6.64           6.37          6.37         6.36     1.75      –
      Magnesium                 g/kg      2.84           2.72          3.03         2.88     3.20      –
      Potasium                  g/kg     20.28          19.85         22.00        20.84    15.20      –
      Sodium                   g/kg       0.33           0.18          0.18         0.88     2.50      –
      Chloride                  g/kg      0.72           0.42          0.35         0.53        –      –
      Sulfur                    g/kg      3.37           3.51          2.76         4.30     0.55      –
      Manganese                mg/kg     40.86          37.85         43.11        33.92   290.00      –
      Zinc                     mg/kg     58.98          53.56         50.12        53.70        –      –
      Copper                   mg/kg     21.90          20.03         18.04        17.10        –      –
      Iron                     mg/kg    218.45         304.84        319.43       190.75        –      –
      Selenium                 mg/kg      0.10           0.31          0.30         0.30        –      –
      Cobalt                   mg/kg      0.18           0.14          0.17         0.09        –      –
      Molybdenum               mg/kg      3.80              –          2.45         3.56        –      –

      Fatty acids

      Myristic acid-C14:0       %             –          0.00           0.00        0.01       –     0.10
      Palmitic acid-C16:0       %             –          0.77           0.14        1.05       –    10.50
      Palmitoleic acid-C16:1    %             –          0.00           0.00        0.02       –     0.15
      Stearic acid-C18:0        %             –          0.28           0.05        0.38       –     4.20
      Oleic acid-C18:1          %             –          0.28           0.27        0.21       –    23.30
      Linoleic acid-C18:2       %          2.87          0.64           0.80        0.56       –    52.00
      Linolenic acid-C18:3      %          0.42          0.55           0.12        0.08       –     6.90

      FF Soybean is Full Fat Soybean; SBM = Soybean meal.
      Source: compilation on NRC, INRA-AFZ, CVB, SRTNA and selected suppliers.




109
12. Annex




      Appendix 3
                                  Sampling patterns for bulk carriers
                                                                        (From: Herrman, 2001)


      A. Sampling pattern for bulk carriers containing a
         homogeneous load
         Sampling pattern as
                                                     A            C                  F
      recommended by GIPSA (1995) for
      the sampling of bulk truck or rail                                 D
      shipments of soybean seeds or
      soybean meals using a hand-held                     B                    E             G
      sampling devise or an automatic
      sampler. Site A: Probe the grain approx. 0.6 m. from the front and side. Site B: Probe
      approx. half-way between the front and center; Site C: Probe approx. three-quarter of
      the way between the front and center; Site D: Probe grain in the center of the carrier.
      Site E,F,G: follow a similar pattern described above for the back part of the carrier.


      B. Sampling pattern for bulk carriers containing areas
         with damaged material
          Recommended stratified
      sampling patterns for carriers
      containing inferior or damaged
      portions of soybean seeds or
      soybean meals. In this case a three                A               B             C
      step procedure is recommended. A: Probe the carrier as a whole (inferior and sound
      portions) as if the load was homogeneous. B: Probe the portion or portions
      containing the inferior grain thoroughly so as a representative cross section is
      obtained of the damaged or inferior material. C: Probe the portion or portions
      with the sound material to collect a representative sample. The sample of each
      step should be a minimum of 2 kg. Samples should be analyzed individually and
      proportions of sound to inferior material noted.




110
12. Annex




      Appendix 4
                                Sampling devices for soy bean products
                                                                                   (From: Hermann, 2001)
        Figure 1A                    Figure 1B             Figure 1C            Figure 1D




         Grain probes            Tapered bag triers          Bomb       Pelican grain probe sampler
                                                            sampler
      Appendix 5
                                Sampling guidelines for bagged material

      Sampling of 1 bag: Stand bag up and insert sampling probe in top corner of the bag.
      Lower the probe diagonally through the bag to reach the opposite corner and
      withdraw sample.

      For lots up to 10 bags, each bag should be samples.

      Sampling of more than 10 bags: sample 10 bags selected at random.

      Enough material should be collected to perform the necessary assays and retain a
      sample. Generally a 0.5 kg sample is adequate.



      Appendix 6
                                     Devices for splitting of samples
                                                                                   (From: Hermann, 2001)
                    Figure 2A                           Figure 2B




            Riffle sample splitter                    Boerner divider

111
12. Annex




      Appendix 7
                                     Student's t test: tp(df)
       Degrees
       of freedom                                Probability, p

                     0.40     0.25      0.10     0.05      0.025    0.01     0.005     0.0005
          1         0.324920 1.000000 3.077684 6.313752 12.70620 31.82052 63.65674 636.6192
          2         0.288675 0.816497 1.885618 2.919986 4.30265    6.96456   9.92484   31.5991
          3         0.276671 0.764892 1.637744 2.353363 3.18245    4.54070   5.84091   12.9240
          4         0.270722 0.740697 1.533206 2.131847 2.77645    3.74695   4.60409   8.6103
          5         0.267181 0.726687 1.475884 2.015048 2.57058    3.36493   4.03214   6.8688
          6         0.264835 0.717558 1.439756 1.943180 2.44691    3.14267   3.70743   5.9588
          7         0.263167 0.711142 1.414924 1.894579 2.36462    2.99795   3.49948   5.4079
          8         0.261921 0.706387 1.396815 1.859548 2.30600    2.89646   3.35539   5.0413
          9         0.260955 0.702722 1.383029 1.833113 2.26216    2.82144   3.24984   4.7809
          10        0.260185 0.699812 1.372184 1.812461 2.22814    2.76377   3.16927   4.5869
          11        0.259556 0.697445 1.363430 1.795885 2.20099    2.71808   3.10581   4.4370
          12        0.259033 0.695483 1.356217 1.782288 2.17881    2.68100   3.05454   4.3178
          13        0.258591 0.693829 1.350171 1.770933 2.16037    2.65031   3.01228   4.2208
          14        0.258213 0.692417 1.345030 1.761310 2.14479    2.62449   2.97684   4.1405
          15        0.257885 0.691197 1.340606 1.753050 2.13145    2.60248   2.94671   4.0728
          16        0.257599 0.690132 1.336757 1.745884 2.11991    2.58349   2.92078   4.0150
          17        0.257347 0.689195 1.333379 1.739607 2.10982    2.56693   2.89823   3.9651
          18        0.257123 0.688364 1.330391 1.734064 2.10092    2.55238   2.87844   3.9216
          19        0.256923 0.687621 1.327728 1.729133 2.09302    2.53948   2.86093   3.8834
          20        0.256743 0.686954 1.325341 1.724718 2.08596    2.52798   2.84534   3.8495
          21        0.256580 0.686352 1.323188 1.720743 2.07961    2.51765   2.83136   3.8193
          22        0.256432 0.685805 1.321237 1.717144 2.07387    2.50832   2.81876   3.7921
          23        0.256297 0.685306 1.319460 1.713872 2.06866    2.49987   2.80734   3.7676
          24        0.256173 0.684850 1.317836 1.710882 2.06390    2.49216   2.79694   3.7454
          25        0.256060 0.684430 1.316345 1.708141 2.05954    2.48511   2.78744   3.7251
          26        0.255955 0.684043 1.314972 1.705618 2.05553    2.47863   2.77871   3.7066
          27        0.255858 0.683685 1.313703 1.703288 2.05183    2.47266   2.77068   3.6896
          28        0.255768 0.683353 1.312527 1.701131 2.04841    2.46714   2.76326   3.6739
          29        0.255684 0.683044 1.311434 1.699127 2.04523    2.46202   2.75639   3.6594
          30        0.255605 0.682756 1.310415 1.697261 2.04227    2.45726   2.75000   3.6460
          ∞         0.253347 0.674490 1.281552 1.644854 1.95996    2.32635   2.57583   3.2905




112
12. Annex




      Appendix 8
                                      Standard normal Z table

        z   0.00    0.01     0.02     0.03     0.04     0.05     0.06     0.07     0.08     0.09

       0.0 0.0000   0.0040   0.0080   0.0120   0.0160   0.0199   0.0239   0.0279   0.0319   0.0359
       0.1 0.0398   0.0438   0.0478   0.0517   0.0557   0.0596   0.0636   0.0675   0.0714   0.0753
       0.2 0.0793   0.0832   0.0871   0.0910   0.0948   0.0987   0.1026   0.1064   0.1103   0.1141
       0.3 0.1179   0.1217   0.1255   0.1293   0.1331   0.1368   0.1406   0.1443   0.1480   0.1517
       0.4 0.1554   0.1591   0.1628   0.1664   0.1700   0.1736   0.1772   0.1808   0.1844   0.1879
       0.5 0.1915   0.1950   0.1985   0.2019   0.2054   0.2088   0.2123   0.2157   0.2190   0.2224
       0.6 0.2257   0.2291   0.2324   0.2357   0.2389   0.2422   0.2454   0.2486   0.2517   0.2549
       0.7 0.2580   0.2611   0.2642   0.2673   0.2704   0.2734   0.2764   0.2794   0.2823   0.2852
       0.8 0.2881   0.2910   0.2939   0.2967   0.2995   0.3023   0.3051   0.3078   0.3106   0.3133
       0.9 0.3159   0.3186   0.3212   0.3238   0.3264   0.3289   0.3315   0.3340   0.3365   0.3389
       1.0 0.3413   0.3438   0.3461   0.3485   0.3508   0.3531   0.3554   0.3577   0.3599   0.3621
       1.1 0.3643   0.3665   0.3686   0.3708   0.3729   0.3749   0.3770   0.3790   0.3810   0.3830
       1.2 0.3849   0.3869   0.3888   0.3907   0.3925   0.3944   0.3962   0.3980   0.3997   0.4015
       1.3 0.4032   0.4049   0.4066   0.4082   0.4099   0.4115   0.4131   0.4147   0.4162   0.4177
       1.4 0.4192   0.4207   0.4222   0.4236   0.4251   0.4265   0.4279   0.4292   0.4306   0.4319
       1.5 0.4332   0.4345   0.4357   0.4370   0.4382   0.4394   0.4406   0.4418   0.4429   0.4441
       1.6 0.4452   0.4463   0.4474   0.4484   0.4495   0.4505   0.4515   0.4525   0.4535   0.4545
       1.7 0.4554   0.4564   0.4573   0.4582   0.4591   0.4599   0.4608   0.4616   0.4625   0.4633
       1.8 0.4641   0.4649   0.4656   0.4664   0.4671   0.4678   0.4686   0.4693   0.4699   0.4706
       1.9 0.4713   0.4719   0.4726   0.4732   0.4738   0.4744   0.4750   0.4756   0.4761   0.4767
       2.0 0.4772   0.4778   0.4783   0.4788   0.4793   0.4798   0.4803   0.4808   0.4812   0.4817
       2.1 0.4821   0.4826   0.4830   0.4834   0.4838   0.4842   0.4846   0.4850   0.4854   0.4857
       2.2 0.4861   0.4864   0.4868   0.4871   0.4875   0.4878   0.4881   0.4884   0.4887   0.4890
       2.3 0.4893   0.4896   0.4898   0.4901   0.4904   0.4906   0.4909   0.4911   0.4913   0.4916
       2.4 0.4918   0.4920   0.4922   0.4925   0.4927   0.4929   0.4931   0.4932   0.4934   0.4936
       2.5 0.4938   0.4940   0.4941   0.4943   0.4945   0.4946   0.4948   0.4949   0.4951   0.4952
       2.6 0.4953   0.4955   0.4956   0.4957   0.4959   0.4960   0.4961   0.4962   0.4963   0.4964
       2.7 0.4965   0.4966   0.4967   0.4968   0.4969   0.4970   0.4971   0.4972   0.4973   0.4974
       2.8 0.4974   0.4975   0.4976   0.4977   0.4977   0.4978   0.4979   0.4979   0.4980   0.4981
       2.9 0.4981   0.4982   0.4982   0.4983   0.4984   0.4984   0.4985   0.4985   0.4986   0.4986
       3.0 0.4987   0.4987   0.4987   0.4988   0.4988   0.4989   0.4989   0.4989   0.4990   0.4990


                                                                                              CONTENTS
113
Disclaimer.
Products and services referred to in this publication
are for identification and as a general example only.
No endorsement of any type is intended, nor is criticism
of similar products or services not mentioned. Persons
using products referred to in this publication assume
full responsibility for their use in accordance with label
directions provided by the manufacturer or supplier.

                                                   CONTENTS
F04CX14804-042004-500




Rue du Luxembourg 16-B • 1000 Brussels - Belgium
    Tel: +32 2 548 93 80 • Fax: +32 2 502 68 66
 Email: soyabru@coditel.net • www.asa-europe.org

                                                   CONTENTS

More Related Content

PPTX
Good laboratory practices
PPTX
Phytogenic feed additives as an alternative to antibiotics in poultry diets
PPTX
Calibration of Instruments
PDF
English Grammar in Use 4th Edition with answers - Raymond Murphy.pdf
PPTX
Classification of energy related to poultry
PPTX
Amino acids
PPTX
AMINO ACID IMBALANCE, ANTAGONISM AND TOXICITY by Dr Sunil kumar B
PPSX
Amino acids in chicken production
Good laboratory practices
Phytogenic feed additives as an alternative to antibiotics in poultry diets
Calibration of Instruments
English Grammar in Use 4th Edition with answers - Raymond Murphy.pdf
Classification of energy related to poultry
Amino acids
AMINO ACID IMBALANCE, ANTAGONISM AND TOXICITY by Dr Sunil kumar B
Amino acids in chicken production

What's hot (20)

PDF
Production of feather meal
PDF
Feed Testing Manual By Dr Devegowda
PDF
Meat value addition
PPSX
Slides for Soybean Oil
DOCX
Carcass evaluation,grading and cuts
PPTX
Edible oil refining
PDF
Meat processing hygeine
PPTX
texture analyzer and its accessories
PPTX
Structure of legumes
PDF
TCP- U 3 Rice.pdf
PPTX
Basics of Milk Pasteurization
PPTX
Importance of egg and meat, egg quality, value addition and egg products
PPTX
Rice information
PPTX
Edible oil processing
PDF
Formulating feeds with a protease-Smith and Korsbak 2014
PDF
Ppt flour practical
PPTX
PPTX
Physical and chemical tests for silage quality 2
PPT
Poultry Feed formulation
PPT
Production of feather meal
Feed Testing Manual By Dr Devegowda
Meat value addition
Slides for Soybean Oil
Carcass evaluation,grading and cuts
Edible oil refining
Meat processing hygeine
texture analyzer and its accessories
Structure of legumes
TCP- U 3 Rice.pdf
Basics of Milk Pasteurization
Importance of egg and meat, egg quality, value addition and egg products
Rice information
Edible oil processing
Formulating feeds with a protease-Smith and Korsbak 2014
Ppt flour practical
Physical and chemical tests for silage quality 2
Poultry Feed formulation
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

PPT
Soybean and soy products
PPT
Protein Analysis - Kjeldhal
DOCX
Animal Nutrition Lab Manual 1
PDF
Feed Sampling & Analysis Handout
DOCX
Monthly progress report , Resettlement ,Rehabilitation , Livelihood and Rest...
PDF
Animal Nutrition Lab Manual 2
PPTX
Proceso de producción del aceite de soja
DOC
Proceso D Extraccion De Aceites
PPTX
Aceite de soya
PDF
PPTX
estimating protein contents in food
PPT
Soy processing 2006_eng
PDF
Quality and safety of animal feed in india
DOCX
Soyabean
PDF
Enzymetic Analysis
DOCX
Preparation Of Soy Milk And Its Comparison With Natural Milk Class XII Chemis...
PPT
feed and fodder status in india
PPTX
Specifications of feed ingredients and finished feeds bis standard
PDF
Feed Ingredient
Soybean and soy products
Protein Analysis - Kjeldhal
Animal Nutrition Lab Manual 1
Feed Sampling & Analysis Handout
Monthly progress report , Resettlement ,Rehabilitation , Livelihood and Rest...
Animal Nutrition Lab Manual 2
Proceso de producción del aceite de soja
Proceso D Extraccion De Aceites
Aceite de soya
estimating protein contents in food
Soy processing 2006_eng
Quality and safety of animal feed in india
Soyabean
Enzymetic Analysis
Preparation Of Soy Milk And Its Comparison With Natural Milk Class XII Chemis...
feed and fodder status in india
Specifications of feed ingredients and finished feeds bis standard
Feed Ingredient
Ad

Similar to Manual of quality analysis - Soya products (20)

PDF
Shelf Life of an Extruded Corn Snack
PPT
øVerland algae research 15 11 2012 web
PDF
KFDA Policy on Food Safety Control for Imported Foods
PDF
Chemical Composition of the Biomass of Saccharomyces cerevisiae - (Meyen ex E...
PPT
Bhattacharjee 7a introduction to key indicators
PPTX
Lalita 6c dietary assessment
PDF
S7.5 Biofortified Maize and Relevance of Innovative Maize-Poultry Value Chains
PDF
BR-70346-Research-Production-Biofuel-BR70346-EN
PDF
Anna Surribas - Aplicaciones industriales de la biocatálisis
PPTX
Multimycotoxin contamination in selected fermented foods and the perception o...
PDF
Early Biofilm Detection
PDF
Bioethanol from microalgae
PPTX
Shraddha rj ch 1063
PPTX
Shraddha rj ch 1063
PDF
Bioanalytical Chemistry Andreas Manz Nicole Pamme Dimitri Iossifidis
PDF
UTILIZATION OF GUM ARABIC FROM Acacia senegal var. kerensis IN EXTENSION OF B...
PDF
Food and Agricultural Trade: Implications for Food Security
PDF
PDF
Iscc
Shelf Life of an Extruded Corn Snack
øVerland algae research 15 11 2012 web
KFDA Policy on Food Safety Control for Imported Foods
Chemical Composition of the Biomass of Saccharomyces cerevisiae - (Meyen ex E...
Bhattacharjee 7a introduction to key indicators
Lalita 6c dietary assessment
S7.5 Biofortified Maize and Relevance of Innovative Maize-Poultry Value Chains
BR-70346-Research-Production-Biofuel-BR70346-EN
Anna Surribas - Aplicaciones industriales de la biocatálisis
Multimycotoxin contamination in selected fermented foods and the perception o...
Early Biofilm Detection
Bioethanol from microalgae
Shraddha rj ch 1063
Shraddha rj ch 1063
Bioanalytical Chemistry Andreas Manz Nicole Pamme Dimitri Iossifidis
UTILIZATION OF GUM ARABIC FROM Acacia senegal var. kerensis IN EXTENSION OF B...
Food and Agricultural Trade: Implications for Food Security
Iscc

More from Vasu Chithiravelu (9)

PDF
Fao picture book on avian diseases
PPSX
World egg day
PDF
Poultry Housing And Manure Management Systems
PDF
Asa Imports Guide
PDF
Sunflower Meal
PDF
PDF
Ideal Amino Acid Profile For Poultry
PDF
Oil Seeds World Markets And Trade
PDF
Grains World Markets And Trade February 2010
Fao picture book on avian diseases
World egg day
Poultry Housing And Manure Management Systems
Asa Imports Guide
Sunflower Meal
Ideal Amino Acid Profile For Poultry
Oil Seeds World Markets And Trade
Grains World Markets And Trade February 2010

Manual of quality analysis - Soya products

  • 2. MANUAL of QUALITY ANALYSES for SOYBEAN PRODUCTS in the FEED INDUSTRY J.E. van Eys(1), A. Offner(2) and A. Bach(3) (1) Global Animal Nutrition Solutions Inc., Corresponding author. 24 Av. de la Guillemotte, 78112 Fourqueux, France ; Jvaneys@cs.com. (2) Cybelia, 104, Avenue du président Kennedy, 75781 Paris cedex 16, France ; anne.offner@cybelia.fr (3) ICREA, IRTA-Unitat de Remugants, Edifici V, Campus Universitari de Bellaterra, 08193 Bellaterra, Spain ; alex.bach@irta.es
  • 3. CONTENTS 1. Introduction 5 2. Soybeans, soybean products and production processes 7 3. Definitions and applications of soybeans and soy products 9 4. Chemical and nutritional composition of soybean products 17 5. Official standards of some soybean products 21 6. Sampling soy products 27 7. Physical evaluation and equipment 30 8. Chemical analyses 32 8.1. Moisture 32 8.2. Ash 34 8.3. Protein 34 8.4. Protein quality 37 8.4.1. Urease Index 38 8.4.2. KOH protein solubility 39 8.4.3. Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI) 40 8.4.4. Protein quality in ruminants 42 8.4.4.1. In situ technique 42 8.4.4.2. In vitro technique 43 8.5. Amino acids 44 8.6. Crude fiber 45 8.7. Neutral Detergent Fiber (NDF) 46 8.8. Acid Detergent Fiber (ADF) 48 8.9. Lignin 49 8.9.1. Klason lignin 49 8.9.2. Permanganate lignin 50 8.10. Starch 51 8.10.1. Polarimetric starch determination 51 8.10.2. Enzymatic or colorimetric starch determination 53 8.11. Non Starch Polysaccharides (NSP) and Monosaccharides 55 8.12. Ether Extracts 57 8.13. Lipid quality 57 8.13.1. Moisture 58 8.13.2. Insoluble impurities 58 8.13.3. Unsaponifiable matter 59 8.13.4. Iodine value 61
  • 4. Contents 8.13.5. Acid value 62 8.13.6. Lipid oxidation 62 8.13.6.1. Peroxide value 64 8.13.6.2. Thiobarbituric acid (TBA) 65 8.13.6.3. Anisidine value 65 8.13.6.4. Lipid stability tests 66 8.13.6.4.1. AOM (Active Oxygen Method) 66 8.13.6.4.2. OSI (Oil Stability Index) 66 8.13.7. Fatty acid profile 67 8.14. Minerals 68 8.14.1. Calcium 68 8.14.2. Phosphorus 69 8.14.3. Sodium chloride 70 8.15. Isoflavones 71 8.16. Antinutritional factors 72 8.16.1. Trypsin inhibitors 72 8.16.2. Soy antigens 74 8.16.3. Lectins 75 8.17. Mycotoxins; rapid tests 77 8.17.1. Ochratoxin 78 8.17.2. Zearalenone 78 8.17.3. Fumonisins 78 8.17.4. Aflatoxins 79 8.17.5. Deoxynivalenol 79 8.18. Genetically Modified Organisms (GMO) 80 9. NIR analyses 82 10. Data management 87 10.1. Sample statistics 87 10.2. Quality indicators 91 10.3. Significance of parameter estimates 93 10.4. Control charts 96 10.5. Follow-up and application of analytical results 98 11. References 100 12. Annex 106
  • 5. 1. INTRODUCTION The use of soybean products in the feed and food industry has increased steadily over the past decennia. Fifty years ago world soybean production was estimated to be 17 million tons with China being the major producer (UNEP, 1999). A little more than 50 years later and the production for 2003 is expected to reach more than 190 million tons with the major centers of production being the USA, Brazil and Argentina (USDA, 2003). The USA remains the largest producer of soybeans and soybean meals but its production is leveling off while Brazilian production and crushing of beans is increasing rapidly. Of the total world production of soybeans, less than 10 % is directly used for human consumption. The overwhelming majority is used in animal feed in the form of various types of soybean meals or specialty soy products. The current world production of soybean meal is estimated to be in excess of 130 million mt (USDA, 2003). With global animal feed production estimates approximating 1.100 mt (Speedy, 2002), and compound feed production well above the 600 million mt (Gill, 2003), soybean meals represent the dominant source of protein in animal diets. However, total use and importance of soybeans or soybean products is likely to be higher than indicated by major statistics as a plethora of different soybean products are entering the feed and food chain. This dominant position of soybeans and their products is no doubt associated with their high quality especially with respect to protein and amino acid profile. Following proper treatment or extraction, digestibility of the protein fraction is high and the amino acid profile provides a close match with cereals to meet animal requirements. Nevertheless, in their untreated form, soybeans contain a number of factors that have the potential to seriously diminish their nutritive value - to the point of decreasing animal performance and health (Liener, 2000). A treatment of soybeans to eliminate these anti nutritional factors (ANF) is thus necessary especially in the case of monogastric diets. These treatments, combined with varietal differences in the production process of soybean meals or other products lead to potentially large variations in quality. While basic standard specifications for soybean meals have been established (NOPA, 1997) no official specifications exist for other soy products that are routinely used in the feed industry. Furthermore the NOPA specifications only refer to four chemical characteristics. Current evaluations of soy products are based on a much larger array of tests allowing a more accurate evaluation of the 5
  • 6. 1. Introduction nutritive value of the different products. However, under practical conditions of feed production the choice of tests differ greatly among producers and feed compounders and not all tests are applied on a regular basis (West, 2002). It is most likely that in the future more analyses of greater complexity will be needed. Developments in the technological modification of soybean products, along with a better understanding of the effects on performance and health of relatively unknown compounds, such as isoflavones, will add value to soy products. Accurate analysis to measure the effects of new treatments and the relatively unexplored compounds will be of great importance. In order for results of quality tests to have real value and to be comparable between producers it is important that tests are standardized in method as well as equipment. This standardization is becoming increasingly important as trade in soybean products grows more global and competition amongst suppliers increases. Identity preservation and traceability associated with detailed quality characterization are issues of major importance in the (future) trade of soy products. Accurate and consistent quality procedures and analyses along with precise descriptions of the product are necessary. These tests must be reproducible at different levels of the supply chain. Furthermore, the increasing demands of the implemented quality systems (HACCP, ISO or GMP) will dictate the establishment of more detailed quality procedures and a larger analytical capacity. For the information that is generated at the various production stages to be consistent and comparable it is important that a single reference is available. This quality manual intends to provide clear directives and explanations for the quality analysis needed at all stages of the soy protein supply chain in the feed industry. The objective is to supply information that is applicable at all levels of operation, from the crusherto the compounder and from the quality operator in the plant to the nutritionist. Applications of the methods and analyses presented will enhance the value of soy products through improved knowledge and application resulting in improved performance and health. CONTENTS 6
  • 7. 2. SOYBEANS, SOYBEAN PRODUCTS and PRODUCTION PROCESSES A large number of soybean varieties exist, producing soybeans that vary greatly in shape and color. For the complete range of soybeans shapes vary from flat to spherical and colors range from yellow to green, brown and black. Modern varieties, mainly grown for their oil content, are generally spherical in shape with a yellow or green as the accepted seed coats. These characteristics logically will affect many of the soybean products obtained from these beans. Official limits have been set on the minimal size requirements for the beans (see below) but generally soybeans grown for industrial purposes will weigh between 18 – 20 g per 100 beans. The soybean consists of two cotyledons which represent approximately 90 % of the weight, a seed coat or hull (8% of weight), and two much smaller and lighter structures the hypoctyl and the plumule. The cotyledons contain the proteins and lipids (oils) that constitute the main nutritional components of the soybean products obtained from soybeans. They are also the main storage area for the carbohydrates and various other components of importance, most notably the enzymes (lipoxygenase, urease) and the ANF. The various soybean products are obtained through the separation or extraction of the different component of the soybean. A large array of different manufacturing processes is applied to obtain the many soy products used in animal and human nutrition (Berk, 1992). Figure 1 provides a schematic representation of the transformation from soybean into the various products. In the “crushing” process of soybeans, which includes a series of preparatory operations, crude oil is obtained as a major product. The crude oil is refined and separated into lecithin and refined oil used in human as well as animal nutrition; especially in young animal diets. The soybean meals, which on a volume basis are the most important products obtained from soybeans, have the defatted flakes as an intermediary product that requires further treatment. Two main processes are used to extract the oil and obtain the defatted flakes: the expeller process (mechanical extraction of the oil by a screw press) or solvent extraction where non-polar solvents (commonly hexane and hexane isomers) are used to extract the oil. Solvent extraction is the most efficient and widely used process at present. In the case of solvent extraction the flakes are desolventized. All flakes are toasted in order to eliminate the heat-labile anti nutritional factors. Sometimes the hulls obtained in the preparatory steps are added 7
  • 8. 2. Soybeans, Soybean Products and Production Processes back to the toasted flakes. This is done in variable degrees resulting in soybean meals with variable levels of fiber and crude protein. When no hulls are added the high protein meals are obtained. These are the meals used predominantly in poultry diets. Flash desolventization or heat vacuum drying of the defatted flakes produces the white flakes that are higher in protein quality (solubility) and do not have the undesirable darker color. Through a series of different extraction and precipitation process soy protein isolates (SPI) or soy protein concentrates (SPC) are produced. Whereas SPI production is fairly standardized, different methods of extraction are used to obtain the SPC resulting in slightly different compositional characteristics. SPC but also the white flakes can be further elaborated (grinding, texturizing; separation on basis of molecular weight) to obtain a large array of products used in human nutrition. SPI and SPC are used in animal nutrition but are limited to specialty diets due to the relatively high cost. The use of these ingredients in animal diets is mainly as a replacement of high quality protein sources such as animal or milk proteins or as a replacement of fishmeal in aquaculture diets. Figure 1 Schematic representation of the manufacturing of soybean products Drying & tempering* Soybean cleaning, cracking, dehulling (optional), conditioning, flaking cooking/toasting Expelling or solvent extraction • soy hulls • full-fat soy flour or grits Crude oil Defatted flakes • refined oil Desolventizing, toasting • lecithin Soy hulls added (optional) Flash de-solventization or heat vacuum drying Soybean meals De-fatted soy flour or grits White flakes Soluble carbohydrates Extraction Extraction, precipitation • soy molasses soy protein soy protein • isoflavones concentrates (SPC) isolates (SPI) processes intermediary products italics and green are final soy products * only in the case of solvent extraction CONTENTS 8
  • 9. 3. DEFINITION and APPLICATION of SOYBEANS and SOY PRODUCTS The number of soy products currently being used in the feed industry is large, and an exhaustive review is hardly possible. Recent years have seen a dramatic expansion of specialty products based on soybeans. Classical, commodity products such as raw soybeans and soybean meals are relatively well defined with thorough descriptions and specifications. This is not necessarily the case for some of the recent modifications or adaptations of these products (i.e. Rumen-protected soybean meal) or further elaborated products (i.e. soy concentrates). These evolved, value-added products may differ significantly among producers with each producer applying proprietary knowledge and specialized treatments. Typically, value–added products must be evaluated on the basis of the entity that produces them taking into account the guarantees provided by the manufacturer or distributor. Consistent analysis of these producer-specific products allows classification and the building of a database along with confidence about the product. This increased level of knowledge will allow an analysis schedule of decreased intensity and increase inclusion rates in diets. Commodities as well as the value-added products can be classified in a specific class or group of products for which a sufficiently specific description can be developed. For an efficient and correct use - as well as a meaningful interpretation of analytical results - a precise and generally agreed upon definition of the product is needed. Trading, purchasing, formulation, and the entire operation of feed manufacturing depend on the precise referencing of a raw material and the consistent use of the correct name and description. Also the quality control mechanisms that have been introduced in the feed industry require a precise description and classification for all ingredients. Although many databases and ingredient tables have their own classification system, the most widely recognized system is probably the IFN system (International Feed Name and number) (INFIC, 1980). In this system, ingredients have been divided into eight fairly arbitrary feed classes on the basis of their composition and use (NRC, 1982). The system is widely used in the UK, the US and in Canadian feed composition tables but less so in other countries. In the IFN system, ingredients are assigned a six digit code with the first digits denoting the International Feed Class number. With the exception of soybean hay, soybean hulls (class 1), lecithin, soybean mill run and soybean mill feed (class 4), soy products listed in table 2 (page 16) fall in the class of protein supplements (5) defined as products that contain more than 20 % crude protein on a dry matter basis. The five 9
  • 10. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products digits following the class number is the link between the INF and chemical and biological data in the USA databank (NRC, 1982). The number appears generally on official US ingredient specifications and, although the system may not be used by all feed producers or manufacturers, it provides an easy and systematic reference for quality systems and formulation purposes. A brief and general description is available for many soy products. This description has the advantage of providing information that is not generally captured in compositional tables. It also provides for a general appreciation of the origin and quality and thus the potential applications or uses in a feed. Although these definitions might differ slightly between different sources, they are in general sufficiently similar to use them interchangeably. AAFCO publishes at regular intervals reference specifications for soybean products (AAFCO, 2001). These definitions have been used as a basis for the specifications listed in Table 1. Table 1 Description and classification of soybean products * 1. Condensed Soybean Solubles is the product obtained by washing soy flour or soybean flakes with water and acid at a pH of 4.2-4.6. The wash water is then concentrated to a solid content of not less than 60%. IFN 5-09-344. 2. Dried Soybean Solubles is the product resulting from the washing of soy flour or soybean flakes with water and acid; water, alkali and acid; or water and alcohol. The wash water is then dried. IFN 5-16-733. 3. Ground Extruded Whole Soybeans is the meal product resulting from extrusion by friction heat and/or steam of whole soybeans without removing any of the component parts. It must be sold according to its crude protein, fat and fiber content. IFN 5-14-005. 4. Ground Soybean Hay is the ground soybean plants including the leaves and beans. It must be reasonably free of other crop plants and weeds and must contain no more 33% crude fiber. IFN 1-04-559. 5. Ground Soybeans are obtained by grinding whole soybeans without cooking or removing any of the oil. IFN 5-04 -596. 6. Heat Processed Soybeans (Dry Roasted Soybeans) is the product resulting from heating whole soybeans without removing any of the component parts. It may be ground, pelleted, flaked or powdered. It must be sold according to its crude protein content. Maybe required to be labeled with guarantees for maximum crude fat, maximum crude fiber and maximum moisture (CFIA 2003). IFN 5-04-597. 7. Kibbled Soybean Meal is the product obtained by cooking ground solvent extracted soybean meal, under pressure and extruding from an expeller or other mechanical pressure device. It must be designated and sold according to its protein content and shall contain not more than 7% crude fiber. IFN 5-09-343. * In alphabetical order; adapted from the AAFCO Official Publication 2001 and the CFIA. 2003. 10
  • 11. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products 8. Protein Modified Soybean is a product that has been processed to primarily modify the natural protein structure by utilizing acids, alkalies or other chemicals and without removing significant amounts of any nutrient constituent. The defined name under section 84 of the applicable soybean product so modified shall be declared in the product name. IFN 5-26-010. 9. Soy Flour is the finely powdered material resulting from the screened and graded product after removal of most of the oil from selected sound cleaned and dehulled soybeans by a mechanical or solvent extraction process. It must contain not more than 4.0% crude fiber. Some organisms also require labeling guarantees for minimum crude protein and maximum crude fat and moisture. IFN 5-12-177. 10. Soy Grits is the granular material resulting from the screened and graded product after removal of most of the oil from selected, sound, clean and dehulled soybeans by a mechanical or solvent extraction process. It must contain not more than 4% crude fiber. Soybean grits mechanical extracted: IFN 5-12-176. Soybean grits solvent extracted: IFN 5-04-592. 11. Soy Lecithin or Soy Phosphate is the mixed phosphatide product obtained from soybean oil by a degumming process. It contains lecithin, cephalin and inositol phosphatides, together with glycerides of soybean oil and traces of tocopherols, glucosides and pigments. It must be designated and sold according to conventional descriptive grades with respect to consistence and bleaching. IFN 4-04-562. 12. Soy Protein Concentrate is prepared from high quality, sound, dehulled soybean seeds by removing most of the oil and water soluble non-protein constituents from selected, sound, cleaned, dehulled soybeans (CFIA 2003) and must contain not less than 65% protein on a moisture-free basis. It shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat, maximum crude fiber, maximum ash and maximum moisture. IFN Number: 5-08-038. 13. Soy Protein Isolate is the major proteinaceous fraction of soybeans prepared from dehulled soybeans by removing the majority of non-protein components, and contains not less than 90% protein on a moisture-free basis. The CFIA (2003) adds that the original material must consist of selected, sound, cleaned, dehulled soybeans and that it shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein (90%), maximum ash and maximum moisture. IFN Number 5-08-038 (CFIA lists this product with the IFN Number 5-24-811. 14. Soybean Feed, Solvent Extracted is the product remaining after the partial removal of protein and nitrogen free extract from dehulled solvent extracted soybean flakes. IFN 5-04-613. 15. Soybean Flour Solvent Extracted (or Soy flour) is the finely powdered material resulting from the screened and graded product after removal of most of the oil from dehulled soybeans by a solvent extraction process. It shall contain less than 4 percent crude fiber. It shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum 11
  • 12. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products crude protein, maximum crude fat, maximum crude fiber and maximum moisture. IFN 5-04-593. 16. Soybean Hulls consist primarily of the outer covering of the soybean. IFN-1-04-560. 17. Soybean Meal, Mechanically Extracted is the product obtained by grinding the cake or chips which remain after removal of most of the oil from soybeans by a mechanical extraction process. It must contain not more than 7% crude fiber. It may contain an inert, non-toxic conditioning agent either nutritive or non-nutritive or any combination thereof, to reduce caking and improve flowability in an amount not to exceed that necessary to accomplish its intended effect and in no-case exceed 0.5%. The name of the conditioning agent must be shown as an added ingredient. IFN 5-04-600. 18. Soybean Meal, Dehulled, Solvent-Extracted is obtained by grinding the flakes remaining after removal of most of the oil from dehulled soybeans by a solvent extraction process. It must contain not more than 3.3% crude fiber. It may contain an inert non-toxic conditioning agent either nutritive or non- nutritive or any combination thereof, to reduce caking and improve flowability in an amount not to exceed that necessary to accomplish its intended effect and in no-case to exceed 0.5%. The name of the conditioning agent must be shown as an added ingredient. IFN 5-04-612. It may also be required to be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat and maximum moisture(CFIA 2003). 19. Soybean Meal, Solvent-Extracted, is the product obtained by grinding the flakes which remain after removal of most of the oil from soybeans by a solvent extraction process. It must contain not more than 7% crude fiber. It may contain an inert, non-toxic conditioning agent either nutritive or non-nutritive and any combination thereof, to reduce caking and improve flowability in an amount not to exceed that necessary to accomplish its intended effect and in no-case exceed 0.5%. It shall contain less than 7 percent crude fiber. The CFIA (2003) specifies that it shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat and maximum moisture. IFN 5-04-604. 20. Soybean Mill Feed is composed of soybean hulls and the offal from the tail of the mill which results from the manufacture of soy grits or flour. It must contain not less than 13% crude protein and not more than 32% crude fiber. IFN 4-04-594. 21. Soybean Mill Run is composed of soybean hulls and such bean meats that adhere to the hulls which results from normal milling operations in the production of dehulled soybean meal. It must contain not less than 11% crude protein and not more than 35% crude fiber. IFN 4-04-595. 22. Soybean Oil consists of the oil from soybean seeds that are commonly processed for edible purposes. It consists predominantly of glyceride esters of fatty acids. If an antioxidant(s) is used, the common name or names shall be indicated on the label. It shall be labeled with guarantees for maximum 12
  • 13. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products moisture, maximum insoluble matter, maximum unsaponifiable matter and maximum free fatty acids. IFN 4-07-983. 23. Soyflour Chemically and Physically modified is the product resulting from treating soy flour by chemical and physical (heat and pressure) means. It shall be labeled with guarantees for minimum crude protein, maximum crude fat, maximum crude fiber and maximum moisture. IFN 5-19-651. The list in Table 1 gives an overview of the large diversity of soy products and different methods of producing them. It provides a brief description of how the product is obtained and for some products, compositional reference points. The common name and IFN is provided which allows for a consistent and non- equivocal use of ingredients, important in quality systems. The description gives an adequate back ground of the products for trading and classification purposes, references in quality systems and production purposes. It is sufficiently precise to provide clear reference points for product definition and contract agreements but general enough to cover a substantial variation in composition and production processes. For proper use of an ingredient additional analytical data should complement the information provided in the description. However, for analytical purposes the descriptions provide general back ground information as to what can be expected and how analysis should be carried out or what results may be expected. For formulation objectives the description only serves as a classification aide and more precise compositional data will be necessary. The products listed in Table 1 only represent the major soy products produced. At present, a large number of additional specialty products are marketed and the list does not adequately reflect the acceleration seen in the development of new soy products; mostly branded products. Many new, more elaborated products have come on the market over the past 10 - 20 years. The most important examples of these are the different types of soy protein concentrates and soy isolates. These products, characterized by strongly reduced anti-nutritional factors, can effectively be used in diets for young animals, pets and aquaculture, replacing other protein sources such as milk or animal proteins (fish meal). Additional new soy products have often been developed with applications in human or pet food nutrition in mind. In this area special importance is attached to the functional properties of soybean proteins which include the ability of the proteins to increase viscosity, emulsify, form gels, foam, produce films and absorb water and/or fat. Specific applications allow the production of texturized structures, a much sought after property in certain human and pet food products. The functional properties of soy proteins are related to the amino acid composition and sequence (primary structure) as well as the spatial configuration of the protein molecule and the inter-molecular forces (secondary and 13
  • 14. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products tertiary structures). Soybean protein products with unique functional properties may constitute important tools in the formulation of the so-called specialty diets used in animal nutrition. However, these techniques and products remain insufficiently explored in the production of specialty diets for domestic livestock, with economic considerations probably being the major limiting factor at present. The most important products in terms of volume of use are soybean meals (SBM) solvent extracted or dehulled (18 and 19) resulting from the original use of soybeans i.e. the removal of oil. This is also the case for the mechanically extracted SBM (17) although this type of SBM is much less common. Fullfat soybeans in ground, extruded or heated form are defined and their use is increasing due to their high energy content, especially in formulations where previously animal products (meat and bone meals and fats) were of interest. Two fiber-rich products are included in the list: ground soybean hay (4) and soybean hulls (16). While soybean hay has little application in the compound feed industry, the interest in soybean hulls is important and increasing. Soy flour and soy grits are primarily products destined for human consumption although minor amounts may find an application in specialty diets. Technological modifications of these products have produced different types of flour and grits. They are further classified and commercialized according to their application objectives with the main differences being the level of fat content or heat treatment. The remaining products are mainly modifications of different types of soybean meal with the objective of rendering the product more digestible; either through the modification of the protein structure or a removal of the ANF. The specifications do not make reference to these factors leaving the decision as to how the product compares in this respect to the interpretation of the nutritionist or guarantees provided by the producer. Quality analysis must provide a more precise indication of the product in terms of these characteristics in order to assure that the diet meets proper nutritional and animal performance objectives. With the increased complexity of production processes aimed at removing ANF and improving protein digestibility, a clear understanding of the products and the production process becomes more important and adapted quality procedures/ analysis more critical. Quality differences between producers/suppliers for these products can be substantial, especially for the more evolved products. These differences need to be verified and understood at the feed manufacturer’s level. Nevertheless, it remains the responsibility of the user to carry out the needed quality analysis and classify suppliers and products accordingly. Reliable manufacturer’s information is, of course, important but verification remains the basis of this tool and 14
  • 15. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products of the overall quality assurance program. The quality of the information provided by the manufacturer must be an integral part of the “supplier classification process” . The quality of ingredients play a determining role in the level at which these ingredients are used in animal diets. Quality criteria used to determine the inclusion level for an ingredient go beyond the standard nutrient levels, and have often more to do with residual ANF, storage and contaminations (see Chapter 5) and the physiological characteristics of the animal. The inherent variation in quality and chemical characteristics associated with these ingredients make repeated quality analyses necessary which in turn will determine more precisely the inclusion levels employed. The nutritionist’s experience and interpretation of the quality analyses play a major role in defining the final inclusion level used in particular diets. Table 2 gives thus only general estimates of maximum inclusion levels of each product under practical conditions of diet formulation. The inclusion levels suggested are for inclusion in complete diets and are thus necessarily general. They will also need to be adjusted to the specific diet (inclusion of other ingredients) and feeding objectives. Also, the precise nutrient and ANF concentrations and the diet requirements (the ability of the animal to use nutrients or deal with anti nutritional factors) will need to be taken into consideration. Fine tuning of inclusion levels for each product is very much a company-specific decision reflecting depth of understanding of the formulation complexities and confidence in proprietary data relative to the ingredients. The suggestions listed in Table 2 must therefore be regarded as general recommendations that need to be further defined for each feed manufacturer, the manufacturing process and the feed being formulated. Some of the maximums suggested are not defined by any inability of the animal to use the nutrients in a given product, but rather by the effects of specific nutrients on carcass or product quality. Such is for instance the case for whole heat treated soybeans or soybean oil. Other maximums are controlled by economic considerations. While higher inclusions in diets may be possible, those levels will inevitably lead to additional costs with no or limited gain in performance. Some soy products listed in Table 1 are not included in the recommendations for use in animal diets. This is the case of “protein modified” soybean meal, soy flour or grits. Although these ingredients could be used in animal diets (and they actually may be when quality is not sufficient to include in human diets) they are primarily produced for utilization in human foods. Included in small amounts, they may convey major nutritional or technological advantages to certain food items (Liu, 1997). Evaluation of these products in pet foods or certain specialty diets merit consideration. 15
  • 16. 3. Definition and Application of Soybeans and Soy Products Table 2 Application of soybean products(1) Species(2) Product Po Sw R A Pe Level (%)(3) 1. Condensed Soybean Solubles √ 10 2. Dried Soybean Solubles √ 15 3. Ground Extr. Whole Soybeans √ √ √ 35 √ √ 5(4) 4. Ground Soybean Hay √ 20 5. Ground Soybeans √ 15 6. Heat Processed Soybeans √ √ √ 15 7. Kibbled Soybean Meal √ √ 10(Y) √ √ 7 8. Soy Lecithin or Soy Phosphate √ √ √ √ √ 3 9. Soy Protein Concentrate √ √ √ 7(Y) √ √ 5(4) 10. Soy Protein Isolate √ √ √ 10(Y) √ √ 15(4) 11. Soybean Feed, Solvent Extracted √ √ √ 5(Y) √ √ 3 12. Soybean Flour Solvent Extracted √ √ √ 40 13. Soybean Hulls √ √ 25 14. SBM Mechanically Extracted √ √ √ 30 15. SBM Dehulled Solvent Extracted √ √ √ 35 16. SBM Solvent Extracted √ √ √ 35 17. Soybean Mill Feed √ √ √ 10 18. Soybean Mill Run √ √ √ 10 19. Soybean oil √ √ √(5) √ 8 (1) Suggested upper-use levels in diets of different domestic species; this will vary with age of animal, quality, composition and analysis of product; does not include young animal diets unless specifically indicated. Detailed and extensive analyses will allow discretionary changes in usage level. (2) Species: Production diets (growing/finishing) for Poultry (Po), Swine (Sw), Ruminants (R), Aqua (salmonids) (A); Pets (dogs) (Pe). (3) On a diet dry matter basis.“Y” indicates primarily in young animal diets. (4) Higher levels may be used in salmon and trout grower, finisher diets. (5) Maximum inclusion of oil in Ruminant diets should not exceed 2%. CONTENTS 16
  • 17. 4. CHEMICAL and NUTRITIONAL COMPOSITION of SOYBEAN PRODUCTS The compositional data provided in the Tables 3 (p.19) and 4 (p.20) (with additional details in Appendix Tables 1, 2) are better descriptors of the nutritional characteristics of soybean products. They require however, a more in-depth understanding of the chemical, analytical and nutritional aspects of the products. The composition data also provide an indication of the specific processes that have been used to obtain the product. This is especially true for the data in Table 4. Along with the general description provided above, these data give thus a rather complete picture of the various properties and potential applications for each product. The total number and types of soybean products commercialized is clearly much larger that the ones listed in the tables. The tables only provide values for the main products. A large variety of different soy products are produced by different companies and for a large number of specific applications. Soy protein concentrates or heat or formaldehyde treated products for ruminant diets are an excellent example of this. The nutritional concentration as analyzed may not differ significantly from an ingredient listed but the nutritional value (due to a change in digestibility or degradability) may vary greatly. Since the tables only report composition that can be directly analyzed, such differences do not show up and are therefore not included. The nutrient concentration of the different soy products in Tables 3 and 4 are compiled from a wide range of official sources and publications (NRC 1982, 1998, 2001; INRA-AFZ 2002; CVB 2000; FEDNA, 1994 and others). Besides completing the descriptive information provided in Table 2 the major purpose of the composition tables is to provide reference values that can be used to either evaluate the analytical data that are obtained in the laboratory or to further classify a specific ingredient. Since the data are obtained from a wide range of publications, the user may want to refer to the original publications if the sample corresponds more closely to one of the sources in his region. This is especially true in the case of soybean meals or soy by-products where crushing and further handling of the ingredient determine to a large extent the nutrient quality of the products. The table values provide means based on a large number of samples covering many years and a wide range in origin. They cannot be used as standard values but only as reference points around which analysis of individual samples should be situated if they are to be identified by the specific ingredient name. Most individual samples will be within an acceptable statistical range of 17
  • 18. 4. Chemical and Nutritional Composition of Soybean Products these means (see Chapter 10). This level of precision is adequate for classification, storage and trading agreements, as those are generally based on a small set of analyses (proximate analysis or just humidity, protein and fat). More detailed analyses concerning the more difficult to determine nutrients may show larger variations from the means and possibly inconsistencies with some values above and others below the table values. This is often the case for amino acids or micro minerals. As such they may point to consistent differences in the production process of a given supplier or, alternatively, reflect problems in the analytical procedure. The experience and know-how of a lab technician in interpreting the result is here of great value. Cross-checking of values known to be affected in a similar fashion by a production process or a laboratory procedure may provide an explanation of a discrepancy and confirm the true value and classification for the ingredient. For most users of soy products the detailed nutrient concentrations serve as a basis to formulate diets and to calculate total nutrient supply to animals. Since animal performance is determined by nutrient concentration and the relationship between nutrients, knowing the precise nutritional composition of the ingredients that make up the diet allows the prediction of animal performance and thus a detailed estimation of the value of each ingredient. Clear compositional descriptions of soy products are thus not only necessary for quality control reasons, but also for the evaluation in a diet or feeding operation. For precise formulations the analytical data on the ingredient in the plant should be used. The use of the table values, especially because of the large contribution that soy products make to the protein and amino acid supply, may lead to significant variations in nutrients between the formulated value and the real diets. The compositional data in Table 4 includes nutrients that can be directly analyzed in a large and well equipped laboratory. Routine analyses, as carried out in standard quality control procedures or smaller laboratories, mainly concern the proximate analysis, the van Soest fiber components (with the exception of lignin) and the minerals calcium and phosphorus. These analyses (especially the proximate) are most often used to derive other nutrient values such as amino acids or energy. In advanced formulation systems they are generally combined with estimates of digestibility for each individual nutrient. No digestibility data are included here as this information is not necessarily the result of direct observations but rather of literature compilations and research conducted by feed compounders. Thus digestibility data used in formulationsystems can differ considerably among users and are generally considered proprietary information. In the Appendix tables (1, 2) specific energy values have been included however, because of their importance as descriptive parameters for individual soy products and because of their importance in classifying and referencing ingredients. 18
  • 19. 4. Chemical and Nutritional Composition of Soybean Products Table 3 Composition of some soy protein ingredients used in animal feeds Heat SBM SBM SBM processed SBM solvent solvent solvent Soy Soy FF soybean mechanically extracted extracted extracted Soybean protein protein Unit seeds extracted 44 48 50 hulls concentrate isolate Dry matter % 89.44 89.80 88.08 87.58 88.20 89.76 91.83 93.38 Crude protein % 37.08 43.92 44.02 46.45 48.79 12.04 68.60 85.88 Crude fiber % 5.12 5.50 6.26 5.40 3.42 34.15 1.65 1.32 Ether extracts % 18.38 5.74 1.79 2.1 1.30 2.16 2.00 0.62 Ash % 4.86 5.74 6.34 6.02 5.78 4.53 5.15 3.41 NDF % 12.98 21.35 13.05 11.79 9.95 56.91 13.50 - ADF % 7.22 10.20 8.76 7.05 5.00 42.05 5.38 - ADL % 4.30 1.17 0.75 0.90 0.40 2.05 0.40 - Starch % 4.66 7.00 5.51 5.46 3.28 5.95 - - Total sugars % - - 9.06 9.17 9.29 1.40 - - Gross energy kcal/kg 5013 - 4165 4130 4120 3890 4280 5370 Lysine % 2.34 3.50 2.85 2.89 3.00 0.73 4.59 5.26 Threonine % 1.53 2.21 1.80 1.84 1.90 0.73 2.82 3.17 Methionine % 0.52 0.80 0.62 0.63 0.67 0.14 0.87 1.01 Cystine % 0.55 0.77 0.68 0.73 0.73 0.16 0.89 1.19 Tryptophane % 0.49 0.74 0.56 0.63 0.65 0.12 0.81 1.08 Calcium g/kg 2.62 2.96 3.12 3.07 2.68 4.96 2.37 1.50 Phosphorus g/kg 5.70 6.64 6.37 6.37 6.36 1.59 7.63 6.50 Magnesium g/kg 2.80 2.84 2.72 3.03 2.88 2.23 1.85 0.80 Potasium g/kg 15.93 20.28 19.85 22.00 20.84 12.15 12.35 2.75 Sodium g/kg 0.29 0.33 0.18 0.18 0.88 0.10 0.55 2.85 Linoleic acid C18:2 % 9.70 2.87 0.64 0.80 0.56 1.21 - - FF Soybean = Full Fat Soybean; SBM = Soybean meal. For more detailed compositional data on soybean products see Appendix table 1, 2. Source: compilation of NRC, INRA-AFZ, CVB, FEDN and selected suppliers NDF = Neutral detergent Fiber; ADF= Acid Detergent Fiber; ADL = Acid Detergent Lignin (Klason Lignin) Protein quality analyses (Urease Index, KOH soluble N, or PDI) are also not included as these do not generally differ among soy protein products. A number of these analyses do exist and they are important in evaluating soy protein quality especially in terms of digestibility of amino acids. Methods and optimal values for these tests are detailed further in Chapter 8. In many respects they refer to the residual values for the ANF listed in Table 5 (p. 22) but only the heat labile ones such as trypsin inhibitors, lectins and goitrogens (Liener, 2000). There is no proven 19
  • 20. 4. Chemical and Nutritional Composition of Soybean Products relationship between heat stable ANF and protein quality indexes. For many diets, especially in the case of diets for young animals, aquatic species and pets, the application and use of soy products depends to a much larger extent on the residual ANF than on the nutrient concentration. In such diets the more elaborated soy products such as SPC or SPI are more frequently used. Accurate analyses for most of these ANF are difficult to carry out and under most practical conditions the suppliers’ guarantees are accepted. As Table 5 indicates, the range in some of these ANF is considerable and a thorough supplier classification is thus important. In many cases, if an analysis for a specific ANF is indicated, the choice to use external laboratories may be advised. External, specialized, laboratories will provide reliable results and generally are in a position to give advice as to the quality and level of an ANF relative to other samples of a similar product. If preference is given to install an analysis for ANF (generally trypsin inhibitor) in a laboratory the adherence to a ring test or systematic comparisons of results with a well established laboratory is necessary. Table 4 Analytical characteristics of common types of soy protein products Enzyme Alcohol Soybean treated extracted Product type Unit seeds SBM SPC SPC SPI Humidity % 10 - 12 10 - 12 6-7 6-7 6-7 Crude protein % 33 - 17 42 - 50 55 - 60 63 - 67 >85 Fat % 17 - 20 0.9 - 3.5 2.5 0.5 - 3.0 0.1 - 1.5 Ash % 4.5 -5.5 4.5 - 6.5 6.2 - 6.8 4.8 - 6.0 2 - 3.5 Oligosacharides % 14 15 <1 <3.5 <0.4 Stachyose % 4 - 4.5 4.5 - 5 <0.3 1-3 <0.2 Raffinose % 0.8 - 1 1 - 1.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.1 Trypsin inhibitor TIA mg/g CP 45 - 60 4-8 1-2 2-3 <1 Glycinin mg/g 150 - 200 40 - 70 <0.1 <0.1 <0.01 ß-conglycin mg/g 50 - 100 10 - 40 <0.1 <0.1 <0.005 Lectins ppm 50 - 200 50 - 200 <1 <1 <1 Saponins % 0.5 0.6 0 0 0 Phytic acid bound P % 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 - SBM = defatted soybean meal; SPC = soy protein concentrate; SPI = soy protein isolate. Adapted from: Hansen (2003) and Peisker (2001) Anti-nutritional factors decrease in concentration as the elaboration increases and the soy product becomes richer in protein. The increased concentration of protein associated with a lower level of ANF increases the value of soy products in a proportionally greater fashion than the increase in cost of production. They are therefore much sought after products in specialty diets. However, they remain uneconomical in diets of older livestock animals as those animals are less sensitive to the ANF and their protein requirements can be met with lower concentrations and/or quality of proteins. CONTENTS 20
  • 21. 5. OFFICIAL STANDARDS of SOME SOYBEAN PRODUCTS While a large number of compositional tables and publications for soybean products exist, those data cannot be considered as standard values, especially not for trading purposes. For trading and contractual purposes they are too detailed and thus unpractical. Furthermore, they do not provide the required borderline minimum or maximum values for limited number readily identifiable parameters. A limited number of official standards have been published to start with the basic material: whole, untreated soybeans or seeds (IFN 5-04-610). As is the case for all other grains and seeds the USDA publishes official standards for soybean grains as defined under the United States Grain Standards Act. These standards do not generally change much over time and under the act soybeans are defined as grains that consists of 50 percent or more of whole or broken soybeans (Glycine max (L) Merr.) that will not pass through an 8/64’’round hole sieve (3183 microns) and does not contain more than 10.0 percent of other grains for which standards have been established under the United States Grain Standards Act (USDA, 1999). For trading purposes – especially in view of specific applications and export requirements – additional specifications are provided by dividing soybeans into classes and grades. Only two classes of soybeans have been defined (yellow soybeans and mixed soybeans) but 5 grades are specified. The grades and grade requirements for the major export countries (USA, Brazil and Argentina) are similar. However, while Brazil and Argentina have a special export grade, the United States does not define a specific export grade as soybeans are exported from the US at any pre-defined specification or grade. The USDA (1999) description of grades is provided in 5. Next to whole soybeans only three soybean products (two soybean meals and soybean oil) have standard values. Used as official references standards they have been developed by the National Oil Processors Association (NOPA, 1997) and are also published by the American Soybean Association (ASA, 1998) in the Soy Importers Handbook. These standards are now widely accepted and provide minimums or maximums on only a few, easily identifiable, key parameters. In the case of soybean meals their main purpose is the classification of soybean meals into two main categories: solvent extracted SBM and dehulled, hipro SBM. 21
  • 22. 5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products Table 5 US grades and grade requirements for soybeans Minimum test weight Maximum limits of: Damaged kernels Soybeans per per Heat Foreign of other bushel hl damaged Total material Splits colors Grade (lbs) (kg) % % % % % U.S. No.1 56 72 0.2 2.0 1.0 10.0 1.0 U.S. No.2 54 69 0.5 3.0 2.0 20.0 2.0 U.S. No.3 (1) 52 67 1.0 5.0 3.0 30.0 5.0 U.S. No.4 (2) 49 63 3.0 8.0 5.0 40.0 10.0 U.S. Sample grade (3) (1) Soybeans that are purple mottled or stained are graded not higher than U.S. No 4. (2) Soybeans that are materially weathered are graded not higher than U.S. No 4. (3) Soybeans that do not meet the requirements for U.S. Nos. 1,2,3 or 4, or i) Contain 8 or more stones which have an average weight in excess of 0.2% of the sample weight, 2 or more pieces of glass, 3 or more Crotalaria seeds, 2 or more castor beans, 4 or more particles of an unknown substance(s), 10 or more rodent pellets, bird droppings or equivalent quantity of other abnormal filth per 1,000 grams of soybeans; or ii) Have a musty, sour or commercially objectionable foreign odor (except garlic odor); iii) Are heating or otherwise of distinctly low quality. See also: USDA, 2001: http://www.usda.gov/gipsa/reference-library/brochures/soyinspection.pdf For soybean oil the NOPA standards refer to crude degummed soybean oil mainly with food application purposes in mind. These standards serve as a general guide for transactions, thus assuring a minimal degree of quality and consistency in at least the three main types of soy products being traded. However, the standards and trading guidelines proposed by NOPA are not binding. Organizations, companies or individuals participating in a transaction involving soybean meals are free to adopt, modify or disregard the NOPA rules. They principally serve the trading and marketing of US soybean products within the USA but due to their wide acceptance, their impact goes well beyond US meals (and oils) as they are generally applied to compare and benchmark soybean products from other origins. 22
  • 23. 5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products Solvent extracted soybean meal can be the result of blending back soybean hulls in the dehulled meal. The blending of different types of soybean meals or soybean components at the point of shipping is allowed under NOPA regulations and standards for minimum blending procedures are provided. As a matter of fact, this can be the source of a significant variation in quality and chemical composition. However, blending of soybeans is not permitted. For soybean meals only soy hulls, soybean mill run and soybean mill feed are permitted to be blended with soybean meals before the point of sampling. The blending must lead to a meal of uniform quality representative of the contract terms. Table 6 Specifications for solvent extracted and dehulled soybean meals (%) Solvent Dehulled Min/Max extracted SBM SBM Moisture max. 12 12 Protein min. 44 47.5 - 49 Fat min. 0.5 0.5 Crude fiber max. 7 3.3 - 3.5 Anti-cacking agent max. 0.5 0.5 NOPA, 1997 For SBM, the NOPA standards clearly aim at providing a minimum number of primary quality characteristics and as such are only a basis for contract specifications (Table 6). The only characteristics defined are moisture, crude protein, fat and crude fiber with a maximum tolerance for an anti-caking agent. Beyond purchasing and possibly storage allocations these specifications have little impact on normal feed milling operations; neither from a specific quality point of view nor from a formulation perspective. They do not provide a sufficiently detailed overview of the nutritional characteristics required for proper quality management or further use. Meals purchased under NOPA contract specifications will therefore still need additional analysis. In order to provide greater quality assurances and meet the nutritional requirements of the feed compounder or nutritionist additional recommendations have been added by NOPA (Table 7- next page). 23
  • 24. 5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products These are, again, only recommendations that apply in a non-binding manner to all soybean meals. Rather than guidelines they should be regarded as further sugges- tions to both producers of soybean meal and buyers, provided in an effort to improve the quality of US soybean meals. Under practical conditions there remains a large variation around these recommendations and from a feed compounder’s point of view, information on quality requirements for SBM needs to be still more detailed. Also, new parameters have been added and more recently evaluations have changed slightly. For instance there is a definite tendency for KOH values to shift to the high end of the established range (close to the 85 % value). Table 7 Recommended additional specifications for soybean meal Lysine 2.85 % (basis 88 % dry matter) Ash < 7.5 % Acid insoluble ash (silica) <1% Protein solubility in 0.2 % KOH 73 - 85 % Urease activity 0.01 - 0.35 pH unit rise Bulk density 57 - 64 g/100 cc Screen analysis (mesh) 95 % thru # 10, 45 % thru #20, 6 % thru # 80 Texture Uniform, free flowing, no lumps, cakes, dust Color Light tan to light brown Odor Fresh - not musty, sour, ammonia, burned Contaminants No urea, ammonia, pesticides, grains, seeds, molds NOPA, 1997 The Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI), an additional measure of protein quality, has been added as a routine quality evaluation. This follows the general application of this method in evaluating protein quality in products for human consumption (AACC, 1976). The results of this method are considered to be superior to the KOH solubility especially where it concerns cases of inadequate heat treatments (Batal et al., 2000). The KOH solubility index is considered better to estimate overheating of SBMs. Nevertheless, consistent application of the recommendations in Table 7 would go a long way in meeting product quality and nutritional requirements. An additional degree of detail is necessary for the regular and detailed formulation changes that are required to meet the performance guarantees of 24
  • 25. 5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products animal diets and the constant cost-reduction objectives. The generation of this information is, at present, considered to be the responsibility of the in-house quality control and analytical services organization of the feed compounder. As a matter of fact, this is often regarded as part of the proprietary know-how by feed manufacturers. It does, however, offer the crusher an opportunity to provide a more consistent and better quality product and therefore a means to add value to a commodity. As identity preservation (IP) and traceability tools improve, a greater detail and guarantee on nutritional characteristics will be possible. The NOPA standards for soybean oil have the same objectives as those for SBM i.e. providing a framework for trading and contract negotiations. However the emphasis is on oil for human consumption as the designated types are for edible oil (officially referred to as crude degummed soy oil). As a matter of fact, no standards for oil used in animal feed is available and most feed companies or users of oil in animal feed have developed in-house standards for oils and fats or mixtures of both. These proprietary standards for animal feed will generally be slightly more relaxed (see Table 8) but information for additional parameters such as iodine and peroxide numbers are often required. On the other hand, information on P levels and flash point are not considered. This difference in standards allows for the use of soy oils which are rejected for human consumption to be used in animal feed provided they Table 8 Standards for edible crude degummed soybean oil and vegetable oils in animal feed NOPA1 Feed2 Analytical parameter Unit Max Max Unsaponifiable matter % 1.5 1.5 Free fatty acids (as Oleic acid) % 0.75 1 MIU (Moisture, Isolubles, Volatile matter) % 0.3 1 Flash point °F 250 – Phosphorous % 0.02 – Iodine value g/100g EE – 130 - 1363 Peroxide value Meq/kg – 2 1,2 NOPA, 1999; Feed refers to common values for vegetable oil. 3 Range for soybean oil. 25
  • 26. 5. Official Standards of Some Soybean Products meet the still stringent formulation and feed quality guarantees. In general, soy oil usage in animal feed is reserved for specialty feeds often for those diets where highly digestible energy sources are needed. This is typically the case in young animal diets. Besides the basic products (soybeans, soybean oil, solvent extracted SBM and dehulled SBM) there are no published requirements or recommendations for the large array of other soy products that are marketed in various forms and conditions. This leaves it up to the user to set internal quality control measures. Those may include most of the criteria considered for the 3 main (basic) products but they will need to go beyond this and include a measure of anti-quality components (anti-nutritional factors – ANF), expanded amino acid profiles, in vitro digestibility and measures of microbial contamination. It is interesting to notice that no specific requirements have been published on the degree of microbial presence in soybeans or SBM. The end user will therefore have to apply industry norms as established by local governments or organizations. CONTENTS 26
  • 27. 6. SAMPLING SOY PRODUCTS The quality of any analysis carried out on feed or the feed ingredients stands or falls with the sampling tools and procedures. It seems evident - but is not necessarily recognized under routine operating conditions - that in order for any subsequent analytical work and interpretation to make sense, the collection of a correct, representative sample is fundamental. The objective of any sampling procedure, no matter what the subject to be evaluated may be, is collection of a truly representative sampling; a sample that represents to the greatest possible degree the composition and characteristics or the material to be analyzed or studied. This always leads to a compromise between cost of sampling and analysis and the degree or precision or confidence that is acceptable. Statistical tools have been developed to asses the minimal number of samples needed to achieve a given level of confidence regarding the composition of the ingredients (see Chapter 10). As the number of samples that have been collected and analyzed increases and variation for a particular nutrient and ingredient is better understood, a more precise number of samples and sampling frequency can be established. In the animal feed business, separate estimates of the number of samples per supplier are not only recommended but are routine procedures for many feed producers. The sampling techniques and procedures vary with the ingredient, the form or particle size of the ingredient, the conditioning and size of the consignment, methods of loading or unloading and storage conditions. The soy products that are used in animal feeds cover the entire range of physical forms from seeds to flakes and powder and sampling methods will therefore need to be adapted to the specific ingredient that enters a feed plant. Details to this extent need to be included in quality control (QC) procedures and do now appear routinely on QC documents. These techniques are fairly standard throughout the world and a detailed description of sampling techniques for grains and seeds have been provided by Herrman (2001). They apply to the majority of the soy products, in bag or bulk. Also NOPA has published basic rules for the sampling of soybean meal at vessel loading facilities using an automatic sampling device (see Appendix 3 - 6). These procedures are practical and can be implemented under almost any condition or operating procedure. A small degree of local adaptation may be necessary and may even be advisable to assure the collection of a truly representative sample. The experience 27
  • 28. 6. Sampling Soy Products and training of the samplers and persons in charge of the quality program will determine to a large extent the efficacy of the sampling program and thus the precise way to sample. Prior to sampling soybean products a sampling scheme or frequency has to be established. For a given ingredient this will depend to a large extent on the supplier and the information received prior to delivery. Additional considerations are laboratory capacity and availability, analytical cost, size of the consignment and the use of the soy product (in which feed it will used as an ingredient and at which percentage). In general, random sampling of different consignments (corrected for experience or prior knowledge about the supplier and ingredient) is combined with systematic sampling of the vessel, truck or container. To this purpose a pre- determined sampling grid is established. Details on the sampling of open containers with soybean products are taken from Herrman (2001) and GIPSA (1995) and are summarized in Appendix 3- 6. A first, rapid evaluation of the material to be sampled and of the sample is considered part of the sampling procedure. The total load (bags, container or carrier) is evaluated for homogeneity and possible local damage during loading or transport. In the case of a homogeneous delivery a pre-established sampling grid is applied and samples are collected accordingly (Appendix 3A). Separate sampling schemes have been developed to allow sampling of sound versus damaged areas (Appendix 3B). The tools that are used to sample depend on the material and form in which the ingredient has been transported. While automatic sampling of trucks or containers is increasingly implemented, hand-sampling remains a dominant means of obtaining sample of soy products. In the case of hand- sampling, slotted grain probes can be used to correctly sample soy beans and meals from a bag or a container (Appendix 4 - Figure 1A). Tapered bag triers (Appendix 4 - Figure 1B) are used to sample powder and granular material, such as SPC and SPI from bags. For the sampling of soybeans or soybean meals from a conveyer belt or a discharging truck, a Pelican Probe sampler can be used (Appendix 4 - Figure 1D). The sampler is pulled through a stream of falling grain or meal, collecting a sample into a leather bag. NOPA has established special procedures for sampling soybean meals at vessel loading facilities (Appendix 6). The sampling of oil follows principles of sampling of other liquid feed ingredients. A bomb or zone sampler (Appendix 4 - Figure 1 C) is used to collect liquids such as soy oil from bulk containers. This sampler consists of a closed cylinder (30 to 40 cm long by 4.5 to 7.5 cm in diameter) which is lowered at pre-defined 28
  • 29. 6. Sampling Soy Products places in an oil tanker and filled with a 100 to 1000 ml sample of oil. Drums are sampled using a glass or stainless steel tube 1 – 1.5 cm in diameter and 50 – 100 cm long (Herrmann, 2001). A minimum of 500 ml sample of liquid must be obtained for storage and sub-sampling. The size of the sample depends on the homogeneity of the load (or lack thereof ), and - again - previous experience is of importance. A larger sample should be collected than that what is ultimately retained for further analysis and storage (for the minimal legally required period). A minimum sample size of 2 kg is recommended. In order to reduce the sample to the minimal required size, the sample is passed through a gated riffle sample splitter (25 mm riffles) or a Boerner divider (Appendix 6 - Figure 2 A and B respectively). This is done repeatedly until the sample is homogeneous. A sub-sample (minimum 500 g) is obtained for further analysis and storage. The sample obtained prior to reduction as well as the final sample is rapidly evaluated for test or specific weight and a number of physical and organoleptic characteristics. The reduced sample is divided in two portions of roughly equal size (250 g). Both are stored in airtight containers. One container is dispatched to the laboratory for further analysis; the second container is stored in a dry storage area, reducing to a minimum any type of chemical changes due to deterioration as the sample may be used for subsequent analysis in the case of claims. CONTENTS 29
  • 30. 7. PHYSICAL EVALUATION and EQUIPMENT Following the sampling, three types of evaluations are carried out on soybean products. These are: Physical, Chemical and Microbiological. The Physical examination of the material aims at establishing the general soundness of the product, its origin and a rapid, general approximation of nutritive quality. This is a series of tests the merchandise has to pass in order to be accepted by the buyer. The chemical analysis will establish the nutritive value of the product. The specific analysis carried out may differ according to future use (animal species). Results of these analyses aim at providing the basis for a detailed nutritional profile possibly resulting in adaptations in the formulation matrix. As such they establish the maximum and minimum level of use in a feed as well as a precise price: quality relationship for the ingredient and the individual nutrient supplied by the ingredient. The micro-biological evaluation intends to reveal any specific microbial, fungal or yeast contamination. It mainly refers to levels of salmonella and specific mycotoxins (mainly zearalenone and ochratoxins). Exceeding pre-set (often legal) limits will lead to a rejection of the material for further use or modifications in the inclusion level and/or the production technology. All measures - physical, chemical and biological – when found to be outside the contractual or legal limits may lead to claims and or changes in the contractual agreement. Soybean products are evaluated for a number of physical and organoleptic criteria. A first evaluation of this type is carried out prior to sampling, but is repeated on the original sample. In general a vessel, container, truck or bag is inspected before unloading and a sample is taken. Only when the merchandise is considered acceptable - upon general evaluation and a rapid analysis of the sample - will unloading proceed. This inspection approaches the more detailed physical evaluation of the sample and requires a certain level of expertise of the quality control person. Inspection criteria should be part of a pre-established quality system. Most important are those referring to the physical characteristics provided in Tables 5 and 7. More stringent in-house standards or requirements may apply. At this stage the important criteria for whole soybeans and soybean meals are: contamination or foreign materials, bulk density, texture, particle size or screen analysis, color and odor. The latter, color and odor are rapidly evaluated on the entire load by a trained person. They are the first evaluation but are of crucial importance. Deviations from the standard colors indicate excessive contamination with foreign material or excessive or inadequate heat treatment. Deviations from the characteristic odor may 30
  • 31. 7. Physical Evaluation and Equipment confirm the visual observations but will also provide a first idea of the past storage conditions, contamination with other substances (especially liquids) and the excessive presence of molds. All further physical evaluations should be carried out at a plant laboratory or special QC area. A first appreciation of the degree of contamination with foreign material is obtained visually. A detailed count is obtained from the sample by physically (hand-) separating a sub sample and weighing the various fractions. It is recommended at this stage to take a sample for light microscopic analysis. Evaluation of a sub-sample under a microscope permits a more detailed analysis of the material and the contaminants. In general a wide field stereoscopic microscope with a magnification of 20 to 40 times is adequate. Additional equipment required for microscopic evaluation is a microscope-illuminator, forceps or probe and in the case of large clumps a mortar and pestle. Precise analysis of contamination is possible with a microscope but requires an experienced operator and may require additional techniques specific to light microscopy in feed analysis. Bulk density is measured by taking a liter of material (in an official container – kettle) and weighing the content. Bulk density (expressed in lbs/bu, g/100 cc or kg/hl) is a first appreciation of various attributes of the received ingredient namely: the moisture content, texture and level of damage or contamination. The range of required bulk density (test weight) for soybeans increases with the grade from 63 kg/hl for grade 4 to 72 kg per hl for grade 1 (Table 5). For soybean meals a single range of 57 to 64 kg/hl is recommended (Table 7). The importance of this measure has come under some criticism, especially from foreign operators. While it is widely used in North America, only a minor number of processors or compounders outside the USA use test weight on a regular basis. The equipment required for these measures is relatively simple. Besides the kettle used to measure bulk density, a balance with a minimum accuracy of + 0.1 grams is required (ASAE, 1993). Texture may be considered as primarily a visual observation (verifying the absence of lumps, cakes or coarse particles). A first rapid evaluation can be carried out by hand-sieving a sample in a 0.525 Tyler (0.530US standard equivalent; 13.5 mm) sieve. For a more precise and objective estimation of particle size (especially the presence of small or dust particles) an analysis with an official particle separator needs to be conducted. Special equipment for particle size separation exists. Generally, a RoTap Sieve Shaker is used for this purpose. This allows separation of particles to a size down to 150 micron (0.0059 inch) covering adequately requirements for standards advised for soybean meal (see Table 7). CONTENTS 31
  • 32. 8. CHEMICAL ANALYSES The nutritional quality of a feed ingredient, and thus soybean products, is dependent on the content of several chemical elements and compounds which carry a nutritional function. These elements and compounds are referred to as feed nutrients. When feeding animals, nutritionists select a combination of ingredients that supply the right amounts of a series of feed nutrients. Therefore, when preparing rations, ingredients are treated as carriers of feed nutrients. Thus, the quality and value of a given ingredient will largely depend on the concentration of its nutrients. Because determining the content of all feed nutrients is extraordinarily time consuming and almost impossible, nutritionists use different systems for estimating or approximating the nutritional value of a feed. The most common system is the so-called Weende system (developed in Germany more than 100 years ago). The system measures water or humidity, crude protein, crude fat, crude fiber, ash and nitrogen-free extract. This method has been proven to be useful for assessing the value of ingredients, however, as with any system, it has a number of shortcomings. The most important one refers to the crude fiber fraction (and consequently the nitrogen-free extract which is not directly determined but calculated by difference). Nowadays, as will be discussed later in this chapter, there are improved methods to determine nutrients within the fibrous fraction of soybean products. Soybean meal is one of the most consistent (least variable) and highest quality protein source for animal nutrition. However, some variation does occur in both the nutrient concentration (chemical determination) and quality (digestibility or bioavailability) among different samples and sources of soybean meal. These variations can be attributed to the different varieties of soybeans, growing conditions, storage conditions and length, and processing methods. Because soybean products, especially soybean meals, are such an important fraction of feeds (in poultry they can account for 35% of the total formula) it is crucial to monitor the quality of soybean products. Small changes in quality might translate into important changes in animal performance due to their high inclusion rate in the ration. CONTENTS 8.1 Moisture Moisture content is one of the simplest nutrients to determine, but at the same time is one of the most important. The moisture content of soybean products is important for three main reasons: 32
  • 33. 8. Chemical Analyses 1. To establish the appropriate acquisition price based on the concentration of the nutrients on a dry matter basis and thus not paying more than necessary for water. 2. A wrong determination of moisture will affect the rest of the nutrients when expressed on a dry matter basis, potentially leading to erroneous concentrations of nutrients in formulated diets. 3. To assure that mold growth cannot occur. In general, samples with moisture content above 12.5% present a high risk of molding, and should be accepted with caution and correspondent penalties for quality. However, moisture is not evenly distributed across the sample particles. A sample batch containing an average of 15.5 percent moisture may, for example, contain some particles with 10 percent moisture and others with 20 percent moisture. The particles with the highest moisture content are the ones most susceptible to mold growth. Consequently, at the early stages of development mold growth is often concentrated in specific areas of a batch of soy products underlining the importance of good sampling methods. To determine moisture content it is necessary to have a forced-air drying oven, capable of maintaining 130°C (± 2°C), porcelain crucibles or aluminum dishes and an analytical balance with a precision of 0.01 mg. The official method (AOAC, 1990) to determine the moisture content of soybean products consists of: • Hot weighing porcelain crucibles and registering their tare. • Placing 2 ± 0.01 g of ground sample in a porcelain crucible and drying at 95-100°C to a constant weight (usually about 5 hours is sufficient). • Hot weighing crucible and sample. • Calculating the moisture content as a percentage of original weight: Original weight – Final weight Moisture, % = x 100 Original weight and Dry matter, % = 100 –moisture, % An alternative, but less accurate method that has the advantage of being fast and simple is the determination of moisture with a microwave. In this method a sample of 100 g is placed in a microwave oven for about 5 minutes. It is important not to run the microwave for more than 5 minutes to avoid burning the sample. Reweigh and record the weight, and place the sample in the microwave for 2 more minutes. Repeat the process until the change in weight is less than 0.5 g than the previous one. This weight would be considered the dry or final weight. The calculations are performed as indicated above. 33
  • 34. 8. Chemical Analyses In feed plants, for routine QC procedures, moisture is often determined by the Brabender test. Like the microwave method, this test is rapid, simple and considered less accurate than the oven dried reference method. This test requires a small, semi-automatic Brabender moisture tester, a scale and aluminum dishes. For most soy products the thermo-regulator of the Brabender moisture tester is set to 140°C with the blower on. Allow the unit to stabilize (± 0.5°C). Tare an aluminum dish on the analytical balance. Weigh ~10 g of sample in the dish and record exact weight. Place the dish (or dishes, up to 10) in the oven, close door. Start timing when temperature returns to 140°C and then dry for one hour. Re-weigh the sample hot after the specified drying time. Calculate moisture with equation above. Moisture can also be determined by near infrared spectroscopy (see Chapter 9). CONTENTS 8.2 Ash Ash determination requires a muffle furnace, porcelain crucibles, and an analytical balance (precision of 0.01 mg). The ash content of soybean products is determined by weighing 2 ± 0.1 g of sample in a tared porcelain crucible and placing it in a furnace at 600°C for 2 hours. The oven is turned off, allowed to return to room temperature and the crucible plus ash weighed. To obtain the ash content of the sample, the final weight should be divided by the initial weight and then multiplied by 100 to express it in a percentage basis. The ash content is thus calculated as: Final weight Ash, % = x 100 Original weight Monitoring ash content is not only a way to assess the nutritional quality of soybean products but also to detect possible contaminations, especially soil. For example, the ash content of soybean meal should not exceed 7%. CONTENTS 8.3 Protein Protein is no doubt the most important and frequently analyzed nutrient in soy products. The protein content of soybean products is estimated as total nitrogen in the sample multiplied by 6.25. This assumes that protein in soybean products has 16% nitrogen; however, the actual amount of nitrogen in soybean protein is 17.5%. Nevertheless, like for most other ingredients used in feed formulation, the standard value of 6.25 is used. Determining crude protein from nitrogen content has the 34
  • 35. 8. Chemical Analyses drawback that part of the nitrogen present in soybean products is considered to be part of proteins (or amino acids), which is not the case as there is nitrogen in the form of ammonia, vitamins and other non-protein compounds. However, the nitrogen fraction that is not in the form of amino acids or protein in soybean products is very small and corrections for the difference in N content in soybean products relative to other ingredients are carried out at the amino acid level. The most accurate method for determining the nitrogen content of soybean products is the Kjeldahl method. This method consists of digesting the sample in sulfuric acid (H2SO4) and a copper and titanium catalyst to convert all nitrogen into ammonia (NH3). Then, the NH3 is distilled and titrated with acid. The amount of nitrogen in the sample is proportional to the amount of acid needed to titrate the NH3. The Kjeldahl method requires: • A digestion unit that permits digestion temperatures in the range of 360 – 380°C for periods up to 3 hours. • Special Kjeldahl flasks (500 – 800 ml). • A distillation unit that guarantees air-tight distillation from the flask with the digested sample into 500 ml Erlenmeyer flasks (distillation receiving flask). • A buret to measure exactly the acid that needs to be titrated in the receiving flask to neutralize the collected ammonia hydroxide. • All Kjeldahl installations require acid-vapor removing devices. This may be by a fume removal manifold or exhaust-fan system, water re-circulation or a fume cupboard. The chemical needs for the procedure are as follows: • Kjeldahl catalyst: contains 10 g of K2SO4 plus .30 g of CuSO4. • Reagent grade, concentrated H2SO4 • Mixed indicator solution: 3125g methyl red and .2062 g methylene blue in 250 ml of 95% ethanol (stirred for 24 hours). • Boric Acid Solution: 522 g U.S.P. boric acid in 18 l of deionized water. Add 50 ml of mixed indicator solution and allow stirring overnight. • Zinc: powdered or granular, 10 mesh. • Sodium hydroxide: 50% wt/vol. aqueous (saturated). • Standardized .1 N HCl solution. The procedure is as follows: • Weigh a 1 g sample and transfer into an ash free filter paper, and fold it to prevent loss of sample. • Introduce one catalyst in the Kjeldahl flask. • Add 25 ml of reagent grade, concentrated H2SO4 to each Kjeldahl flask. • Start the digestion by pre-heating the digester block to 370°C, and then place the Kjeldahl flaks on it for 3 hours. • After removing flasks from the digester, and once they are cool, add 400 ml of deionized water. 35
  • 36. 8. Chemical Analyses • Prepare the receiving flask for steam distillation by adding 75 ml of prepared boric acid solution to a clean 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask and place on distillation rack shelf. Place delivery tube from condenser into the flask. • Turn the water on the distillation system and all the burners on. • Prepare the sample for distillation by adding approximately .5 g of powdered zinc to flask, mix thoroughly and allow to settle. • After digest has settled, measure 100 ml of saturated, aqueous NaOH (50% wt/vol) into a graduated cylinder. Slant Kjeldahl flask containing prepared digest solution about 45° from vertical position. Pour NaOH slowly into flask so that a layer forms at the bottom. All these operations need to be performed wearing gloves and a face mask. • Attach flask to distillation-condenser assembly. Do not mix flask contents until firmly attached. Holding flask firmly, making sure cork is snugly in place, swirl contents to mix completely. Immediately set flask on heater. Withdraw receiving flask from distillation-condenser delivery tube momentarily to allow pressure to equalize and prevent back suction. • Continue distillation until approximately 250 ml of distillate has been collected in receiving flask. • Turn heater off. Remove receiving flask partially and rinse delivery tube with deionized water, collecting the rinse water into receiving flask. • Replace receiving flask with a beaker containing 400 ml of deionized water. This water will be sucked back into the Kjeldahl flask as it cools, washing out the condenser tube. • Titrate green distillate back to original purple using 0.1 N HCl and record volume of acid used in titration. • It is recommended to use a couple of blanks and controls or standards on every run. Blanks - Kjeldahl reagents generally contain small amounts of nitrogen, which must be measured and corrected for in calculations. Prepare blanks for dry samples by folding one ash free filter paper and placing it into the Kjeldahl flask. Treat blanks exactly like samples to be analyzed. Standards: weigh two 0.1 g samples of urea, transfer into an ash free filter paper and treat exactly like the rest of samples. Calculate percent recovery of nitrogen from urea and make sure the obtained result is the one expected. The calculation is: (ml of acid – ml of blank) x normality x .014 x 6.25 x100 Crude protein, % = x 100 Original weight A more recent and alternatively way to determine nitrogen content is by the Dumas method. The method requires very little sample but the sample size will differ with the type of ingredient to be analyzed. Sample size depends largely on the expected level of crude protein in the material. In the case of soybean products a sample size of 50 – 150 mg is recommended (AOAC, 2000). The sample is placed in a 36
  • 37. 8. Chemical Analyses tin foil cup for subsequent burning at 850 - 900°C to determine the amount of N2 by nitrometer. This method has the advantage over the Kjeldahl that is faster, better suited for automation and creates little residues. However, the Kjeldahl method continues to be the reference method. Total Dumas nitrogen can be slightly higher than values obtained with the classical Kjeldahl method. However, for most purposes, especially in the case of soy products, the difference is extremely small. Crude protein can also be predicted by NIR, with an acceptable relative standard deviation of about 0.42% (see Chapter 9). CONTENTS 8.4 Protein quality Protein quality is a function of the amino acid profile and the proportion of each amino acid that is available to the animal. When soybean meals are intended for monogastric feeding it is well known that proper heat processing has a dramatic positive effect on amino acid digestibility, consequence of the destruction of anti- nutritional factors (Table 1). However, over-heating can result in a decrease in both concentration (Table 9) and digestibility of several amino acids, especially lysine. The reduction in digestibility is due to the Maillard reaction which binds free amino acids to free carbonyl groups (i.e., from carbohydrates). The Maillard reaction-end products are not bio-available for all livestock species. Table 9 Effect of heat processing on amino acid digestibility of raw soybeans in poultry (adapted from Anderson-Haferman et al., 1992) Autoclaving (minutes) Lysine Methionine Threonine 0 73 65 64 9 78 70 68 18 87 86 82 Table 10 Effect of heat-processing soybean meals on amino acid concentration (adapted from Parsons et al., 1992) Autoclaving (minutes) Lysine % Methionine % Cystine % Threonine % 0 3.27 0.70 0.71 1.89 20 2.95 0.66 0.71 1.92 40 2.76 0.63 0.71 1.87 There are several methods (Table 12-page 41) to determine protein quality of soybean products for monogastric species. CONTENTS 37
  • 38. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.4.1. Urease Index The urease index (AOCS, 1980) is the most common test used to evaluate the quality of the soybean processing treatment. The method requires a pH meter, volumetric flasks (250 ml), a small water bath that allows maintenance of temperature at 30°C for at least 30 minutes, test tubes and a pipette. The method determines the residual urease activity of soybean products as an indirect indicator to assess whether the anti-nutritional factors, such as trypsin inhibitors, present in soybeans have been destroyed by heat processing. Both enzymes, urease and trypsin inhibitor, are deactivated during heating. The laboratory method for urease involves mixing soybean meal with urea and water for one minute. Procedure: • Place 0.2 g of soybean sample in a test tube. • Add 10 ml of a urea solution (30 g of urea into 1 l of a buffer solution, composed of 4.45 g of Na2HPO4 and 3.4 g of KH2PO4). • Place the test tube in a water bath at 30°C for 30 minutes. • Determine pH and compare it with the original pH of the urea solution. The test measures the increase in pH consequence of the release of ammonia, which is alkaline, into the media arising from the breakdown of urea by the urease present in soybean products (urea is broken down into ammonia and carbon dioxide). Depending on the protocol used, the endpoint is determined differently. In the American Oil Chemists Society (AOCS, 1980) method, the endpoint is determined by measuring the increase in pH of the sample media. In the EEC method, the endpoint reflects the amount of acid required to maintain a constant static pH. Results of these two methods differ slightly from one another. The optimum pH increase is considered to be between 0.05 (McNaughton et al., 1980) and 0.20 (Waldroup et al., 1985). Usually, all overheated samples yield urease indexes below 0.05, but that does not imply that all samples with urease tests below 0.05 have been overheated. It is recommended that, when using soybean products for swine or poultry the increase in pH is not greater than 0.35 (Waldroup et al., 1985). Animal performance is severely impaired with urease indexes above 1.75 pH units. The urease test is useful to determine whether the soybean has been sufficiently heated to deactivate anti-nutritional factors, but it is not a good indicator to assess whether the soybean product has received an excessive heat treatment. CONTENTS 38
  • 39. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.4.2. KOH Protein Solubility This method consists of determining the percentage of protein that is solubilized in a potassium hydroxide (KOH) solution (Araba and Dale, 1990). The method requires volumetric flasks (250 ml), a small magnetic stirrer, filtering funnels or a centrifuge, and the Kjeldahl equipment to measure nitrogen. Procedure: • Determine nitrogen content of soybean sample using official methods. • Place 1.5 g of soybean sample in 75 ml of a 0.2% KOH solution (.036 N, pH 12.5) and stir at 8,500 rpm for 20 minutes at a temperature of 22°C. • Then, about 50 ml is taken and immediately centrifuged at 2500 x g for 15 minutes. • Take aliquot of about 10 ml to determine nitrogen content in the liquid fraction by Kjeldahl method. • The results are expressed as a percentage of the original nitrogen content of the sample. The KOH protein solubility is not sensitive enough to gauge the level of heat processing that a soybean product has undergone, but it is effective in differentiating overheated products from correctly processed ones. Table 11 Effect of autoclaving soybean meal on chick performance (1-18 days), KOH protein solubility and urease activity (adapted from Araba and Dale, 1990) Autoclaving Weight KOH protein Urease Index (120°C) gain Feed : gain solubility (pH units minutes g ratio % change) 0 450a 1.79c 86.0 0.03 5 445a 1.87bc 76.3 0.02 10 424a 1.83bc 74.0 0.00 20 393b 1.89b 65.4 0.00 40 316c 2.04b 48.1 0.00 80 219d 2.55a 40.8 0.00 a, b, c, d Means within a column with common superscripts are not significantly different (P < 0.05). The solubility values have been correlated with growth rates in poultry and swine (Lee and Garlich, 1992; Araba and Dale, 1990), with a clear decline in performance with solubility values below 72%. Raw soybeans and well heat-processed soybean products should have a protein solubility around 90% (that is 90% of the protein present in the product is solubilized in a KOH solution). CONTENTS 39
  • 40. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.4.3. Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI) Among the available tests for determining protein quality in soybean products, the PDI is the simplest, most consistent, and most sensitive method. This test measures the solubility of soybean proteins in water and is probably the best adapted to all soy products. The PDI method measures the amount of soy protein dispersed in water after blending a sample with water in a high-speed blender. The water solubility of soybean protein can also be measured with a technique called Nitrogen Solubility Index (NSI). Thee two methods differ in the speed and vigor at which the water containing the soybean product is stirred. In animal nutrition the PDI method is used. Both methods require a blender (8,500 ppm), filtering funnels or a centrifuge, and the routine Kjeldahl equipment for N analysis. Procedure: • Determine nitrogen content of soy sample using official methods. • Place a 20 g sample of a soybean product in a blender. • Add 300 ml of deionized water at 30°C. • Stir at 8,500 rpm for 10 minutes (AOCS, 1993a). • Filter and centrifuge for 10 minutes at 1000g. • Analyze nitrogen content of the supernatant. • The results are expressed as a percentage of the original nitrogen content of the sample. The NSI method uses a 5 g soybean sample into 200 ml of water at 30°C stirred at 120 rpm for 120 minutes (AOCS, 1989). With either method, the final step consists of determining the nitrogen content of the liquid fraction and the results are expressed as a percentage of the original nitrogen content of the sample. Nowadays, most soybean producers and users of soy products advocate the PDI method as the best for assessing protein quality in soybean meals. Because this test is more recent it is often used as a complement to the urease and KOH solubility measurements. As a matter of fact, the PDI method has proven to be especially useful in determining the degree of under heating soybean meals to remove ANF. Furthermore, Batal et al. (2000) described a greater consistency in the results of heating of soy flakes obtained with the PDI procedure than those from urease or protein solubility. Since the work of Batal et al. (2000) which recommended PDI values below 45 % recommendations have shifted slightly under the influence of practical experience. Consequently, current recommendations are for soybean meals with PDI values between 15 and 30 %, KOH solubilities between 70 and 85 % and a urease index of 0.3 pH unit change or below. These meals are considered adequately heat processed, without under- nor over-processing. 40
  • 41. 8. Chemical Analyses Table 12 A brief description of available methods to determine protein quality of soybean meal Urease Index 1. Mix 0.2 g of soybean meal with 10 ml of urea solution (3% of urea) 2. Place in 30°C water bath for 30 minutes 3. Determine pH 4. Calculate pH increase (final pH - initial pH) KOH Protein Solubility 1. Mix 1.5 g soybean meal with 75 ml of 0.2% KOH solution and stir for 20 minutes 2. Centrifuge at 2,500 x g for 20 minutes 3. Measure soluble nitrogen in the liquid fraction Protein Dispersibility Index (PDI) 1. Mix 20 g of soybean meal with 300 ml of deionized distilled water 2. Blend at 8,500 RPM for 20 minutes at a temperature of 22°C. 3. Centrifuge (1000 x g for 10 minutes) or filter and measure nitrogen content of the liquid fraction Nitrogen Solubility Index (NSI) 1. Mix 5 g of soybean meal with 200 ml of water 2. Stir at 120 RPM for 120 minutes at 30°C 3. Centrifuge at 1,500 RPM and measure soluble nitrogen in the liquid fraction Absorbance at 420 nm 1. The supernatant (if centrifuged) or the liquid fraction (if filtered) from the PDI technique is diluted 80 times. 2. Filter through .2 µm pore size filter. 3. Read the absorbance of the clear filtrate at 420 nm with a spectrophotometer. (Adapted from Dudley-Cash, W.A, 1999) All these assays will give slightly different results depending on the particle size of the sample used, temperature of the solutions and centrifugation speeds and times. For example, protein solubility indexes will yield greater values as mean particle size decreases (Parsons et al., 1991; Whitle and Araba, 1992). Therefore, it is recommended to grind the sample at a consistent mesh size (1 mm), and to maintain (at least within the same laboratory and company) rigorously the same duration for treating the samples in the respective solutions and for centrifugation. CONTENTS 41
  • 42. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.4.4. Protein quality in ruminants For ruminants, protein quality of soybean meals will depend on its rumen degradation and its intestinal digestion. The trypsin inhibitor factors present in soybeans are irrelevant in ruminants, as they are mostly inactivated in the rumen (Caine et al., 1998). Amino acids are supplied to the duodenum of ruminants by microbial protein synthesized in the rumen, undegraded dietary protein, and endogenous protein. Microbial protein usually accounts for a substantial portion of the total amino acids entering the small intestine. Ruminal degradation of protein from dietary feed ingredients is one of the most important factors influencing intestinal amino acid supply to ruminants. Soybean meal is extensively degraded in the rumen, providing an excellent source of degradable intake protein for the ruminal microbes, but not enough undegradable protein to meet the demands of high producing ruminants. Because soybeans contain a high quality protein with a good amino acid profile and they are highly digestible in the small intestine, various processing methods and treatments have been used to increase its undegradable protein value. The most common methods for protecting soybean proteins from ruminal degradation are heat application, incorporating chemicals such as formaldehyde or a combination of heat and chemicals such as lignosulfonate combined with xylose. To assess the extent of protein degradation of a soybean product several techniques are available. CONTENTS 8.4.4.1. In situ technique Although this technique is relatively expensive, labor intensive, and requires access to rumen cannulated animals, it is very useful to determine the rate of degradation of proteins from soybeans. This technique requires consecutive times of ruminal incubation of the samples under study so that the rate of protein degradation can be determined. The in situ technique determines degradation of the insoluble fraction only. The soluble fraction is considered to be totally and instantaneously degraded. To accurately predict rate of protein degradation, sufficient time points must be included in early as well as later stages of degradation (Figure 2). 42
  • 43. 8. Chemical Analyses Figure 2 Protein disappearance from soybean meal and curve peeling processa 100 – 70 – CP remaining, % of CP Crude protein disappearance Rapidly degradable pool 50 – Slowly degradable pool Observed values 20 – 0 –I I I I I 0 20 40 60 80 Time ( hours) Adapted from Bach et al. (1998). After ruminal incubation, the data are fitted to different models to determine the rate of protein degradation in the rumen. Bach et al. (1998) studied the effects of different mathematical approaches (curve peeling, linear and nonlinear regression) to estimate the rate of protein degradation in soybean samples and concluded that using curve peeling (Shipley and Clark, 1972) allowed for the best separation of the different protein pools in soybean proteins. CONTENTS 8.4.4.2. In vitro technique There are several in vitro methods that require the use of rumen fluid, such as the Tilley and Terry (1963) technique, or the in vitro inhibitor technique (Broderick, 1987). Like the in situ technique, these two methods present the disadvantage that they require access to cannulated animals. The in vitro technique consists of incubating a small feed or ingredient sample with strained rumen fluid and a buffer under anaerobic conditions in a test tube or container. The test tube or container is located in a water bath that is maintained at 37 – 38°C throughout the incubation. 43
  • 44. 8. Chemical Analyses At regular, pre-determined intervals a sample is removed from the incubator, centrifuged and analyzed for dry matter and nitrogen disappearance (using the Kjeldahl method). Data are analyzed as described for the in situ technique. There are a number of enzymatic techniques which have the important advantage that they are completely independent of the animal, and should result in less variation, making this technique relatively simple to standardize. The most common enzymatic techniques are the Ficin technique (Poos-Floyd et al., 1985) and the Streptomyces griseus technique (Nocek et al., 1983). The biological value of the results from these techniques may be limited due to incomplete enzymatic activity compared with the ruminal environment. Mahadevan et al. (1987) found large differences when comparing digestion of different protein sources using protease from Streptomyces griseus with an extract of ruminal microbial enzymes. Chamberlain and Thomas (1979) reported that, although rate constants can be calculated using these proteases, these results do not always rank proteins in the same order as degradabilities estimated in vivo. When using enzymatic techniques to predict microbial fermentation in the rumen, it is crucial that the enzyme concentration is sufficient to saturate the substrate. Some researchers have attempted to use near infrared reflectance spectroscopy (NIR) to estimate protein degradation of feedstuffs in the rumen. Tremblay et al. (1996) evaluated NIR as a technique for estimating ruminal CP degradability of roasted soybeans and found a coefficient of determination between NIR and undegraded protein estimated by the inhibitor in vitro technique of .70. However, the use of NIR for this purpose would require continuous access to cannulated animals to maintain the prediction equations. CONTENTS 8.5. Amino Acids Determining the amino acid composition of proteins is essential to characterize their biological value. The greater the proportions of essential amino acids the greater the biological value of a protein. The amino acid analysis requires the use of high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) or the combination of commercial kits and gas chromatography (GC). The analysis involves four steps: • Hydrolysis (using HCl or barium hydroxide); this breaks the peptide bonds and releases the free amino acids. • Separation; column chromatography separates amino acids on the basis of their functional groups. 44
  • 45. 8. Chemical Analyses • Derivatization; a chromogenic reagent enhances the separation and spectral properties of the amino acids and is required for sensitive detection. • Detection; a data processing system compares the resulting chromatogram, based on peak area or peak height, to previously known and calibrated standard. HPLC analysis for amino acids is a highly specialized laboratory procedure requiring skilled personnel and sophisticated equipment. For amino acid analysis the sample preparation is critical and differs with the type of ingredient and the amino acid of major interest. Most amino acids can be hydrolyzed by a 23 or 24 h hydrolysis in HCl (6 mol/l). For sulfur amino acids hydrolysis should be preceded by performic oxidation and for tryptophane a hydrolysis with barium hydroxide (1.5 mol/l) for 20 h is required. In general it is recommended to use a specialized laboratory to conduct the amino acid analysis. CONTENTS 8.6. Crude Fiber The original method was intended to quantify the materials in the feed that form part of the cell wall and provide relatively low energy as their digestibility is usually low. Thus, the technique was meant to quantify cellulose, certain hemicelluloses and lignin. However, later it was shown that crude fiber also included pectines, and that not all the lignin was recovered in the crude fiber fraction. The major disadvantage of this technique is that hemi-cellulose, lignin and pectines are inconsistently accounted for. The method requires the following reagents: • Sulfuric acid solution, .255N, 1.25 g of H2SO4/100 ml. • Sodium hydroxide solution, .313N, 1.25 g of NaOH/100 ml, free of Na2CO3. • Alcohol - Methanol, isopropyl alcohol, 95% ethanol, reagent ethanol. • Antifoam agent (n-octanol). Equipment: • Digestion apparatus. • Ashing dishes. • Desiccator. • Filtering device (Buchner filter). • Suction filter: To accommodate filtering devices. Attach suction flask to trap in line with vacuum source. • Vacuum source with valve to break or control vacuum. 45
  • 46. 8. Chemical Analyses The procedure described by the AOAC (1980) can be summarized as follows: • Weigh 2 g of sample (A). Remove moisture and fat using ether (removing fat is not necessary if the sample has less than 1% ether extract). • Transfer to a 600 ml beaker, avoiding fiber contamination from paper or brush. Add approximately 1 g of prepared asbestos, 200 ml of boiling 1.25% H2SO4 , and 1 drop of diluted antifoam. Avoid using excessive antifoam, as it may overestimate fiber content. • Place beaker on digestion apparatus with pre-adjusted hot plate and boil for 30 minutes, rotating beaker periodically to prevent solids from adhering to sides. • Remove beaker and filter as follows: – Filter through Buchner filter and rinse beaker with 50 to 75 ml of boiling water. – Repeat with three 50 ml portions of water and apply vacuum until the sample is dried. Remove mat and residue by snapping bottom of Buchner against top, while covering stem with the thumb and replace in beaker. – Add 200 ml of boiling 1.25% NaOH, and boil 30 more minutes. • Remove beaker and filter as described above. Wash with 25 ml of boiling 1.25% H2SO4, three 50 ml portions of H2O, and 25 ml of alcohol. • Dry mat and residue for 2 h at 130°C. • Remove, place in desiccator, cool, weigh and record (B). • Remove mat and residue, and transfer to an ashing dish. • Ignite for 30 minutes at 600°C. Cool in desiccator and reweigh (C). • Calculate crude fiber content on dry matter basis as: weight after acid and base extraction (B) – weight after ashing(C) Crude fiber, % = x 100 Original weight (A) x % dry matter CONTENTS 8.7. Neutral Detergent Fiber (NDF) Neutral detergent fiber (NDF) accounts for the cellulose, hemicellulose and lignin content of soybean products. These fractions represent, most of the fiber or cell wall fractions of soybean products, with the exemption that pectines are not included in the NDF fraction. The neutral detergent fiber (NDF) was first described by Goering and Van Soest (1970) and later modified by Van Soest et al. (1991). The NDF determination requires a refluxing apparatus 600 ml and Berzelius beakers. The technique is as follows. Reagents: • NDF solution: dilute 30 g of sodium lauryl sulfate, 18.61 g of disodium dihydrogen ethylene diamine tetra acetic dihydrate, 6.81 g of sodium borate 46
  • 47. 8. Chemical Analyses decahydrate, 4.56 g of disodium hydrogen phosphate, 10 m of triethylene glycol 65 in 1 l of deionized water. • Acetone. The Goering and Van Soest (1970) procedure for NDF determination is as follows: • Weigh 0.5 to 1.0 g sample (to precision of ± 0.0001 g) in a 600-ml Berzelius beaker (A). • Add 100 ml of neutral detergent fiber solution. • Heat to boiling (5 to 10 min). Decrease heat as boiling begins. Boil for 60 minutes. • After 60 minutes, filter contents onto a pre-weighted, ash-free filter paper (B) under vacuum. Use low vacuum at first, and increase it as more force is needed. • Rinse contents with hot water, filter, and repeat twice. • Wash twice with acetone. • Dry at 100°C in forced air oven for 24 h. • Cool filter paper and sample residue in desiccator; weigh and record (C). • Fold filter paper and place in a pre-weighted aluminum pan. • Ash in muffle at 500°C for 4 h. • Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record (D). The NDF content on a dry matter basis is then calculated as: (Weight of NDF residue, C – Weight of filter paper, B) - Weight after ashing, D NDF, % = x100 Original weight of sample, A x % Dry matter For the Ankom system the following procedure applies: • Number filter bags. • Weigh 0.5 g sample in filter bag, record exact weight (± 0.0001 g) (A) and one blank bag (included in extraction to determine blank bag correction). • Seal bags within 0.5 cm from the open edge. • Spread sample uniformly inside the filter bag by shaking and lightly flicking the bag to eliminate clumping. • Pre-extract soybean products containing more than10% fat with acetone • Place bags containing samples in a 500 ml bottle with a screw cap. Fill the bottle with acetone into bottle to cover bags (at least 15 ml/bag) and secure top. Swirl gently after 3 and 6 min has elapsed and allow bags to soak for a total of 10 min. Repeat with fresh acetone. • Pour out acetone, press bags gently between two layers of absorbent paper, and place bags in a hood to air dry for at least 15 min. • Place 24 bags in the suspender, putting 3 bags per basket. • Stack baskets on center post with each basket rotated 120°C. • Include one standard and one blank. • Place duplicate samples in separate batches and in reverse order of top to bottom 47
  • 48. 8. Chemical Analyses • Bring center post with bags in the vessel and agitate lightly to remove air. • Close the vessel and boil at 100°C for 60 minutes. • Drain liquid from vessel. • Add 2 liter of boiling water to vessel along with 4 ml thermamyl and continue to boil for 5 minutes. Drain and repeat this part of the procedure with 2 ml of thermamyl. • Drain, remove bags and squeeze excess water carefully. • Clean bags with acetone and again squeezing bags carefully. • Leave bags to air dry for 30 minutes. • Dry bags for 8 hours at 103°C and cool afterwards in desiccator. Weigh (B). • Weigh blank bag (C). • Ash bags on pre-registered and weighed aluminum pan (D); Db for blank) for 6 hours at 550°C in muffle furnace, cool, place in desiccator and weigh blank (E) and pans with samples (F). The NDF content (dry matter basis) is then calculated as: (B – C) – (F –D) – (E – Db) NDF, % = x100 A x % Dry matter CONTENTS 8.8. Acid Detergent Fiber (ADF) It is recommended that ADF is determined sequentially, that is using the residue left from NDF determination. If not done sequentially, some fractions of pectines and hemicellulose could contaminate and overestimate the ADF fraction. For doing sequential analysis, the Ankom procedure is recommended. Like for the NDF procedure the ADF analysis requires 600 ml Berzelius beakers, a fiber digestion apparatus and a filtering flask. Also sintered glass crucibles of 40 to 50 ml with coarse porosity are required. Reagents needed are: • Acid Detergent Solution. For this add 27.84 ml of H2SO4 to a volumetric flask and bring to 1 l volume with deionized water (it is recommended that before adding the acid, some water is placed in the volumetric flask). Then add 20 g of CH3(CH2)15N(CH3)3Br to this solution. • Acetone. • 72% H2SO4 standardized to specific gravity of 1.634 at 20°C. Extraction of sample • Transfer 1 (± 0.0001) g air-dried sample to Berzelius beaker (A). • Add 100 ml acid detergent solution. • Heat to boil (5 to 10 minutes), and then boil for exactly 60 minutes. • Filter with light suction into previously tared crucibles. 48
  • 49. 8. Chemical Analyses • Wash with deionized hot water 2 to 3 times. • Wash thoroughly with acetone until no further color is removed. Suction dry. • Dry in oven at 100°C for 24 h. • Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record weight (B). • Ash in muffle at 500°C for 4 h. • Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record (C). The ADF content on a dry matter basis is then calculated using the following equation: Weight of ADF residue and crucible, B – Weight after ashing, C ADF, % = x100 Original weight , A x % Dry matter CONTENTS 8.9. Lignin Lignin is a polymer of hydroxycinnamyl alcohols that can be linked to phenolic acids, and also non-phenolic compounds. Lignin acts like a shield that prevents the action of enzymes and bacteria, by physical means. Lignin, not only is totally indigestible, but also limits digestion of some nutrients (especially fiber fractions) of soybean products. The determination of lignin is thus, important to estimate the digestibility and energy value of certain, fiber-rich, soybean products. There are two methods to determine lignin, the Klason lignin and the permanganate lignin. The method of choice is the Klason lignin. CONTENTS 8.9.1 Klason lignin Klason lignin requires 72% sulfuric acid and sintered glass crucibles. The technique consists of adding 25 ml of sulfuric acid to the residue of an ADF determination (without ashing), filtering and adding distilled water three times. Procedure: • Place ADF crucible in a 50 ml beaker on a tray. For the original weight use same as for ADF analysis (A). • Cover contents of crucible with 72% H2SO4. (Fill approximately half way with acid). • Stir contents with a glass rod to a smooth paste. • Leave rod in crucible, refill hourly for 3 h, each time stirring the contents of the crucible. • After 3 h, filter contents of crucible using low vacuum at first, increasing progressively as more force is needed. • Wash contents with hot deionized water until free of acid (minimum of five times). 49
  • 50. 8. Chemical Analyses • Rinse rod and remove. • Dry crucible in oven at 100°C for 24 h. • Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record weight (B). • Ash in muffle at 500°C for 4 h. • Cool in desiccator. Weigh and record (C). Calculate Klason lignin (on dry matter basis) as: Weight of lignin residue and crucible, B – Weight after ashing, C Lignin, % = x100 Original weight , A x % Dry matter CONTENTS 8.9.2. Permanganate lignin The permanganate lignin requires 80% ethanol, a permanganate buffer solution, acetone, fiber crucibles and a Fibertec apparatus or a vacuum system. The permanganate buffer solution consists of 2 parts of potassium permanganate and one part of lignin buffer solution. The lignin buffer solution in turn is made up of : 300 ml of distilled water, 18 g of ferric nitrate, .45 g of silver nitrate, 1.5 l of glacial acetic acid, 15 g of potassium acetate and 1.2 l of tertiary butyl alcohol. • Determine ADF following the above-described procedure using crucibles (not Ankom) (B). For the original weight, use same as for ADF analysis (A). • Place crucibles with ADF digested samples (not ashed) on an enamel pan. • Fill the pan with distilled water to the bottom of the filter plate of the crucible. • Place a stirring rod in each crucible and gently break the matt residue with a little of distilled water. • Fill the crucibles about half way, with the permanganate-buffer solution. Stir, and keep filling crucibles as solution drains out. • Leave the permanganate solution on for 90 minutes, stirring occasionally. • Filter the permanganate using the vacuum system of the Fibertec. • Place crucibles on another enamel pan. • Fill crucibles with distilled water (avoiding overflow) and refill as necessary. • Add demineralizing solution to the samples and leave until they turn white. • Place on cold extractor and filter the demineralized solution using vacuum. • Wash with 80% ethanol 2 to 3 times. • Rinse with acetone. Air dry. • Place in a 105°C oven overnight. • Place in desiccator, cool, weigh and record weights (C). Calculate Permanganate lignin (on dry matter basis) as: Weight of ADF residue and crucible, B – Weight after oxidation, C Lignin, % = x100 Original weight , A x % dry matter CONTENTS 50
  • 51. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.10. Starch Starch occupies only a small part of most soy products but the nitrogen free extract (NFE) fraction- with which it is often identified – may represent a large part of the product. Chemically speaking, starch is defined as a polymer of linear alpha-1,4 linked glucose units (amylose) or alpha-1,5 branched chains of alpha-1,4 linked glucose units (amylopectine). The starch content of soybean products can be determined with a large number of methods of which the most common methods are the polarimetric method and the enzymatic. The polarimateric method, also referred to as the Ewers method, will recuperate free sugars, pectins and a selection of non-starch polysaccharides. It is generally recommended not to use this method for samples high in the above mentioned substances or rich in optically active substances that do not dissolve in ethanol (40%) (v/v). The most common alternative method of starch determination is the enzymatic method. This method is based on the selective enzymatic digestion of amyloses and amylopectins by an amylo-glucosidase. The polarimatric method and the various enzymatic methods do not generally provide the same numeric starch value for an ingredient, feed or digesta sample. The Ewers value being generally higher. However, the enzymatic method(s) are more accurate and are better in discriminating between true starch and related molecules. A comparison of starch analysis in the CVB (2000) tables shows that the two methods give close to identical results for ingredients high in starch. For raw materials with low to intermediate starch levels and ingredients rich in NSPs or cell wall components, starch determination is higher with the Ewers method compared to the enzymatic method. Consequently, for soy products high in (soluble) sugar content (see appendix Tables 1, 2) the polarimatric method will result in higher values than the enzymatic method and the enzymatic method should be preferred. CONTENTS 8.10.1 Polarimatric starch determination The Polarimetric method requires: Erlenmeyers volumetric flasks, pipettes, filter paper, a water bath, and a polarimeter or saccharo-meter plus the following reagents: • 2.5% HCl. • 1.128% HCl (this solution must be verified by titration with a 0.1 N NaOH solution in presence of 0.1% (w/v) methyl red in 94% (v/v) ethanol. • Carrez solution I: made by dissolving 21.9 g of zinc acetate and 3 g of glacial acetic acid into 100 ml of water. 51
  • 52. 8. Chemical Analyses • Carrez solution II: dissolve 10.6 g of potassium ferro-cyanide in 100 ml of deionized water. • 40% (v/v) ethanol. The polarimetric procedure has two parts, the total optical rotation and the determination of the optical rotation of the dissolved substances in 40% ethanol: Total optical rotation determination: • Weigh 2.5 g of soybean sample previously ground through a 5-mm mesh into a 100 ml volumetric flask. • Add 25 ml of HCl and stir to obtain a homogenized solution and add 25 additional milliliters of HCl. • Immerse and continuously shake the volumetric flask in a boiling water bath for 15 minutes. • Remove the flasks from the water bath, add 30 ml of cold water and immediately cool to 20°C. • Add 5 ml of Carrez solution I and stir for 1 minute. • Add 5 ml of Carrez solution II and stir, again, for 1 additional minute. • Add water to the 100 ml level. • Measure the optical rotation of the solution in a 200 mm tube with the polarimeter or saccharo-meter. Optical rotation determination of dissolved substances in 40% ethanol: • Weigh 2.5 g of soybean sample previously ground through a 5-mm mesh into a 100 ml volumetric flask. • Add 80 ml of 40% ethanol and let react for 1 hour at room temperature, stirring every 10 minutes. • Complete to volume (100 ml) with ethanol, stir and filter. • Pipette 50 ml of the filtrate into a 250 ml Erlenmeyer. • Add 2.1 ml of HCl and shake vigorously. • Place Erlenmeyer (with cooling device) in a boiling water bath for exactly 15 minutes. • Transfer the sample into a 100 ml volumetric flask. • Cool and maintain at room temperature. • Clarify the sample with Carrez solution I and II and fill to the 100-ml level with water. • Filter and measure optical rotation in a 200 mm tube with a polarimeter or saccharo-meter. • The starch content of the sample is then calculated using the following equation: 2000 x (total rotation – dissolved rotation) Starch, % = Specific optical rotation of pure starch 52
  • 53. 8. Chemical Analyses The specific optical rotation of pure starch will depend on the type of starch used. Table 13 depicts the generally accepted values for some common starch-rich ingredients. Table 13. Optical rotation of various pure starch sources Starch source Optical rotation Rice starch 185.9º Potato starch 185.4º Corn starch 184.6º Wheat starch 182.7º Barley starch 181.5º Oat starch 181.3º CONTENTS 8.10.2. Enzymatic or colorimetric starch determination The enzymatic method is much longer than the polarimetric one. Reagents needed are: • Acetate buffer solution, .2 M at pH 4.5. • Amyloglucosidase enzyme. • Glucose reagent kit containing: NAD, ATP, hexokinase, glucose-6-phosphate, magnesium ions, buffer and non reactive stabilizers and filters. • Glucose standards. Prepare three solutions of 100 ml each with 100, 300, and 800 mg/dl of glucose, and 10, 30 and 300 mg/dl of urea nitrogen. The total procedure takes three days. Day on: • Weigh 125 Erlenmeyer flaks are record their weight to the nearest tenth of gram. • Add 25 ml of distilled water. • Add .1 g of soybean product and swirl gently. • Place Erlenmeyers with samples on autoclave at 124°C and 7 kg of pressure, once these conditions are reached, leave the samples in the autoclave for 90 minutes. • Turn autoclave to liquid cool and leave sample in the autoclave overnight. 53
  • 54. 8. Chemical Analyses Day two: • Remove from autoclave and cool to room temperature. • Add 25 ml of acetate buffer and swirl gently. • Add .2 g of amylo-glucosidase enzyme and swirl. • Cover tight with aluminum foil caps and put in drying oven at 60°C for 24 hours. Day three: • Remove flasks from oven and let to cool at room temperature. • Remove foil caps and weigh to the nearest tenth of gram and record weight. • Pour contents into 50 ml centrifuge tubes and centrifuge at 1000 x g for 10 minutes. • Save supernatant in a plastic scintillation vial. • Prepare a standard curve using the standard solutions: Table 14. Solutions to prepare standard curve for colorimetric starch determination Working standards Combined standards 50 1:1 dilution of 100 mg/dl standard and water 100 Use 100 mg/dl standard 200 1:3 dilution of 800 mg/dl standard and water. 300 Use 300 mg/dl standard 400 1:1 dilution of 800 mg/dl standard and water 800 Use 800 mg/dl • Set up a series of test tubes for the color determination step. Include tubes for standards and a blank (i.e. glucose reagent only). • Prepare glucose reagent kit according to the instructions provided by the supplier of the kit. • Add 1.5 ml of glucose reagent agent into test tubes. • Read and record absorbance at 340 nm vs water as a reference. This will be INITIAL A (the blank) in the calculations. • Add 10 µl of sample to the test tube. Mix gently. • Incubate tubes for 5 minutes at 37°C. • Read and record the absorbance at 340 nm vs water as a reference. This will be FINAL A in the calculations. • Subtract INITIAL A from FINAL A to obtain change in absorbance (∆ A in the calculations). • Calculate glucose concentration using the following equation: FINAL A (sample) – INITIAL A (sample) Glucose, mg/dl = standard concentration x FINAL A (standard) – INITIAL A (standard) 54
  • 55. 8. Chemical Analyses • Calculate the content of alpha linked glucose polymers: Alpha-linked glucose polymer, mg/g = Glucose concentration in standard x (V/100) x (1/sample weight) where, V is the flask volume difference (sample + flask weight - flask weight) • Calculate starch content as: Alpha linked glucose polymer, mg/g Starch, % = 1.111 CONTENTS 8.11. Non starch polysaccharides (NSP) and monosaccharides A large part of the NFE fraction of soy products may belong to the group of non-starch polysaccharides. This group is composed of fairly simple, soluble and insoluble sugars, most notably raffinose, stachyose, β-mannans and xylans. A major proportion of these sugars are not readily digested, especially by young animals and they are thus often considered part of the ANF. Consequently, a correct estimation of these sugars or the mono-saccharides that make-up these NSP is important when formulating special diets. The precise analysis for simple sugars requires HPLC equipment. The first part of the procedure requires the elimination of starch from the sample. This is accomplished with the following procedure: • Weigh 2.5 g of sample in Hungate tubes. • Add 2.5 ml of acetate buffer (70 ml 0.1 M sodium acetate and 30 ml of 0.1 M acetic acid). • Add 2.5 µm of α-amylase. • Place in boiling water bath for 1 hour, shaking every 10 minutes. • Cool to 40°C. • Add 50 µl of glucosidase. • Place in water bath at 60°C for 6 hours and shake every 30 minutes. • Cool to room temperature. • Add 10.5 ml of pure ethanol. • Place in refrigerator for 1 hour. • Centrifuge at 1000 x g for 5 minutes. • Discard the supernatant, rinsing the pellet twice with distilled water. • Dry overnight at 40°C. The total NSP fraction can be estimated as follows: Total NSP, % = 100 – (humidity, % + ash, % + protein,% + lipids,% + NDF,% + starch,%) 55
  • 56. 8. Chemical Analyses Once starch has been removed it is necessary to conduct the hydrolysis of sugars. • Detach the sample from the tube walls. • Add 1.5 ml of sulfuric acid (75 ml of 96% sulfuric acid and 25 ml of water). • Vortex. • Place in water bath 30°C for 1 hour. • Transfer sample into a 100-ml Erlenmeyer and add 40 ml of distilled water. • Add 5 ml of myo-inositol (2mg/l) as an internal standard. • Cover Erlenmeyer with aluminum foil and autoclave (125°C) for 1 hour. • Filter sample. • Re-suspend the filtrate into 50 ml of distilled water. After hydrolysis, the derivatization needs to be performed: • Place 1 ml of filtrate into a 5-ml plastic test tube. • Neutralize with 200 µl of 12 M ammonium hydroxide. • Vortex. • Add 100 µl of 3 M ammonium hydroxide containing 150 mg/ml of KBH4 (Borate is very toxic; all following steps must be conducted under a hood). • Place in a 40°C water bath for 1 hour. • Add 100 µl of glacial acetic acid and vortex. • Transfer 500 µl into a 30 ml glass tube. • Add 500 µl of 1-metilimidazol. • 5 ml acetic acid, vortex and wait 10 minutes. • Add 1 ml of ethanol, vortex and wait 10 minutes. • Add 5 ml of distilled water. • Add 5 ml of 7.5 M KOH, vortex, and wait 3 minutes. • Add, again, 5 ml of 7.5 M KOH, vortex, and wait 3 minutes. • Cover tubes. • Take a 1-ml aliquot and transfer into a 5-ml test tube. • Add 50 mg of anhydrous sodium sulfate. • Decant supernatant into a GLC vial. • Dry at 40°C for 8-10 hours • Add 0.5 ml of chloroform. Chromatography: • Run samples against stand and blank through a gas chromatograph following equipment-specific procedures. CONTENTS 56
  • 57. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.12. Ether Extract The ether extract (EE) method measures the proportion of a feed that is soluble in ether. It is equivalent to the total amount of lipids present in a feed and it represents mostly true fats and oils. However, it also includes some ether-soluble material that are not true fats, such as fat-soluble vitamins, carotenes, chlorophylls, sterols, phospholipids, waxes and cutins. Fatty acids will readily form insoluble complexes with free cations, most notably calcium. These reactions may occur in soy products that have a relatively high concentration of positively charged minerals. To assure that all the fat components are extracted from a mineral rich sample it is recommended to perform an acid hydrolysis in hot HCl prior to the ether extraction. The EE technique requires a Soxhlet extraction system, funnels, filter paper, HCl (3 N), and anhydrous diethyl ether. The procedure is as follows: • Weight approximately 2 g of sample ground trough 1 mm-mesh into an Erlenmeyer. • Add 100 ml of 3 N HCl and boil for 1 h. • Cool at room temperature. • Filter through a filter paper and rinse with distilled water to remove all HCl. • Remove the moisture of the sample by drying it in an oven at 105°C for 24 hours. (If the sample were not dried the ether would have difficulties penetrating all the areas of the ingredient). • Place sample with anhydrous diethyl ether in a Soxhlet extractor. Turn the heater coil high enough to evaporate 2-3 drops of ether per second in the condenser. Extract for 24 hours. After that time, the ether should be removed, and replaced with clean ether, leaving the samples in the Soxhlet for 8 more hours. • Remove from Soxhlet, air-dry for about 2 hours and oven dry at 105°C for 12 hours. The calculation of crude fat is as follows: Final weight after extraction, g Crude fat, % = x100 Original weight, g CONTENTS 8.13. Lipid quality Fat or oil quality depends on the fatty acid profile, specific physical characteristics and the oxidation level. While fatty acid characteristics and composition determine the physical and nutritional quality of the true lipid fraction, 57
  • 58. 8. Chemical Analyses the physical characteristics and oxidation level are the aspects that are of greatest importance in the routine QC procedures that are applied when oils or fats enter the feed production process. Consequently, the two most common physical tests to assess quality of oils are the insoluble impurities and the unsaponifiable matter. Along with moisture in the oil or fat sample, these characteristics are collectively referred to as the MUI (Moisture, Unsaponifiables, Insolubles) value. CONTENTS 8.13.1. Moisture Through the crushing and various treatments of soy oil water may settle in oil samples especially if these samples have undergone significant temperature changes. Generally the moisture content is small but it may have a large effect on the oil quality.The procedure is simple but calls for a forced air drying oven capable of maintaining 130°C ± 2°C, aluminium sample pans with tight fitting covers and a desiccator. Attention, high temperatures may cause the fat sample to ignite. The procedure is following: • Accurately weigh 5.0 ± 01 g of sample into a tared moisture dish that has been previously dried and cooled in a desiccator. • Place the dish in a forced air oven and dry it for 30 min at 130°C + 1°C. Remove from the oven, cool to room temperature in a desiccator and weigh. Repeat until the loss in weight does not exceed 0.05% per 30 min drying period. Loss in weight, g Moisture content, % = x100 Weight of sample, g CONTENTS 8.13.2. Insoluble impurities This is a measure of the content of non-lipid compounds in oil. It should be less than 1 %. The method is as follows: • Place 15 ml of sample into a graduate cylinder (if sample is not liquid it should be liquefied applying a mild increase in temperature using a hot plate). Maintain in liquid state for the duration of the test. The lower values of the tube should be clearly identified to ensure easy reading following the procedure. • Let the sample settle in the graduate cylinder for 24 hours. • Observe the amount of insolubles that have settled out of the sample and collected at both at the top and bottom of the tube. 58
  • 59. 8. Chemical Analyses • The insoluble impurities are then calculated as: Reading of settled insolubles, ml Insoluble impurities, % = x 100 Total sample volume, ml (15) • If no insoluble matter is seen in the tube, report the insoluble matter as < 0.2%. CONTENTS 8.13.3. Unsaponifiable matter The method measures those substances which cannot be saponified by a caustic alkali treatment. It includes compounds such as aliphatic alcohols, sterols, pigments and hydrocarbons. They do not have a recognized energy value, and thus are of little nutritional interest. The technique (AOCS, 1993b) requires Erlenmeyer or Soxhlet flasks, beakers, separator funnels, a balance(accuracy of ± .001g), pipettes, a water bath, a reflux condenser, an explosion-proof hot plate, a 50ml burette with its stand, a Soxhlet fat cup and Soxhlet HT2 system, and a desiccator. The reagents for this method are: • 85% Ethanol. • Petroleum Ether. • NaOH, ACS grade. • Phenolphthalein indicator solution. • 0.2 M HCL standard. • Deionized water. The procedure is as follows: • Accurately weigh 5 ± 0.0001 g of well mixed sample into an extraction flask. If the sample is fluid at room temperature, shake to mix well before weighing out sample, and if the sample is solid at room temperature, melt the sample in a water bath, set at 60°C, until the sample is liquefied. Remove and shake to mix well. • Add 30 ml of 85% ethanol to the sample. • Add 5 ml of 45% aqueous potassium hydroxide. • Assemble the extractor by turning on the hot plates and the water taps. Reflux the solution gently but steadily for 1 hour or until completely saponified. • Quantitatively transfer the solution to a 500 ml separator funnel and rinse the flask into the funnel with approximately 10 ml of 85% ethanol. • Wash the flask into the separator funnel with approximately 5ml of warm water and pour it into the separator funnel. • Add approximately 5ml of cool distilled water, swirl and pour it into the separator funnel. 59
  • 60. 8. Chemical Analyses • Complete the transfer from the flask by rinsing with approximately 5ml of petroleum ether. • Allow the solution to cool to room temperature. • Add approximately 50 ml of petroleum ether. • Insert the stopper and shake vigorously by repetitions of inverting for at least one minute. After every few seconds, release the accumulated pressure in the funnel by inverting and opening the stopcock. • Allow to settle until the solution has separated into two layers. • Transfer the bottom fat layer back into the original flask and transfer the petroleum ether layer into a clean 250ml Erlenmeyer flask. • Repeat the former 4 steps until the petroleum ether layer is clear and colorless (about 6 times). • Once the washes are completed, discard the fat portion of the sample in a waste container and transfer all of the petroleum ether to the 500ml separator funnel. • Add 30ml of 10% ethanol to the petroleum ether. • Insert the stopper and shake vigorously by repetitions of inverting for at least one minute. Release any pressure in the funnel by inverting the funnel and opening the stopcock. • Allow the mixture to settle until the solution has separated into two layers. • Draw off the alcohol, or bottom layer, and discard, being careful not to remove any of the ether layer. • Continue the alcohol washes until the petroleum ether layer is clear, approximately 5 or 6 times or until the bottom layer no longer turns into a pink color after addition of 1 drop of phenolphthalein indicator solution. • Transfer 60 ml of the ether layer (top layer) to a previously tared Soxhlet fat cup. • Evaporate the petroleum ether layer. • Repeat the ether evaporation on the Soxhlet system from the same fat cup until all petroleum ether has been completely evaporated from the separator funnel. • Place the cup in the oven, set at 100°C, for approximately 20 minutes. • Allow to cool to room temperature in a desiccator and weigh. • After weighing, dissolve the residue in 50 ml of the phenolphthalein indicator solution. Heat on a hot plate to the point where the alcohol is just starting to boil, then transfer to a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask. • Titrate with standardized 0.02 N sodium hydroxide to a faint pink of the same intensity as the original indicator solution. No titration is needed if the sample is already pink when poured into the flask. The amount of ml added times 0.0056 will yield the weight of fatty acids in the sample. • The unsaponifiable matter is calculated as follows: (Weight of fat cup plus residue – Weight of fat cup) – Weight of fatty acids Unsaponifiable matter, % = Weight of sample CONTENTS 60
  • 61. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.13.4. Iodine value The iodine value is an estimate of the proportion of unsaturated fatty acids present in a sample. Iodine will bind to unsaturated or double bonds in fatty acids. The greater the amount of iodine bound to the sample the greater the proportion of unsaturated fatty acids. The procedure requires the following reagents: • Glacial acetic acid. • Carbon tetrachloride. • Iodine trichloride. • Iodine. • Potassium iodide (100 g/l aqueous solution). • Sodium thiosulfate, 0.1 N (19.76 g of sodium thiosulfate into 230.24 ml of water). • Potassium iodate, 0.4 N. • starch solution: 10g/l aqueous dispersion recently prepared from natural soluble starch. • Wijs solution: Add 9 g of trichloride into a brown glass bottle (1500 ml capacity). Dissolve in 1 l of a mixture composed of 700 ml of acetic acid and 300 ml of carbon tetrachloride. The procedure is as follows: • Determine the halogen content of the Wijs solution by taking 5 ml of the solution and adding 5 ml of the potassium iodide and 30 ml of water. Then add 10 ml of pure iodine and dissolve by shaking. Determine again the halogen content as previously described.The titer should now be equal one and half times that of the first determination. If this were not the case, add a small amount of iodine until the content slightly exceeds the limit of one and half times. Let the solution stand, then decant the clear liquid into a brown glass bottle. • Place about 100 g of sample in a flask with 15 ml carbon tetrachloride and 25 ml of Wijs reagent. Insert a stopper and shake gently. • Let sample sit in a dark location for 60 min for fats with expected iodine numbers below 150, and for 120 min for fats with expected iodine values above 150. • Remove the flask from the dark and add 20 ml of the aqueous potassium iodide solution and 150 ml of distilled water. • Titrate the solution with 0.1 N sodium thio-sulfate until the yellow color has mostly disappeared. • Add 1 to 2 ml of starch indicator solution and continue the titration until the blue color has just disappeared after vigorous shaking. Determine the iodine value using the following equation: 12.69 x 0.1 x (ml titration of blank – ml titration of sample) Iodine Value = Weight of original sample, g 61
  • 62. 8. Chemical Analyses The iodine test can also be useful as an indicator of lipid oxidation by comparing the initial iodine value and monitoring it across time. The oxidation process destroys the double bonds or reduction of di-enoic acids (see later in this chapter), and thus if the iodine value decreases with time it is an indication of lipid oxidation in the sample under study. CONTENTS 8.13.5. Acid value The acid value is a measurement of the proportion of free fatty acids in a given sample. It is determined by measuring the milligrams of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of fat. Oxidation is not involved directly in free fatty acid formation, but in advanced states of oxidation, secondary products such a butyric acid may contribute to FFA formation (Shermer et al, 1985). The technique requires the following reagents: Solvent mixture (95% ethanol/diethyl ether, 1/1, v/v), 0.1 M KOH in ethanol accurately standardized with 0.1 M HCl (pure ethanol may be also used if aqueous samples are analyzed), 1% phenolphthalein in 95% ethanol. The procedure is as follows: • Weigh 0.1 to 10 g of oil (according to the expected acid value) in glass vial and dissolve in at least 50 ml of the solvent mixture (if necessary by gentle heating). • Titrate, while shaking, with the KOH solution (in a 25 ml burette, graduated in 0.1 ml) to the end point of the indicator (5 drops of indicator), the pink color persisting for at least 10 seconds. • The acid value is calculated by the formula: ml of KOH Acid value = 56.1 x KOH x Weight of original sample, g CONTENTS 8.13.6. Lipid Oxidation Lipids, especially oils, can undergo oxidation, leading to deterioration. In feeds, these reactions can lead to rancidity, loss of nutritional value, destruction of vitamins (A, D, and E) and essential fatty acids, and the possible formation of toxic compounds and changes in color of the product. The important lipids involved in oxidation are the unsaturated fatty acid moieties, oleic, linoleic, and linolenic. The rate of oxidation of these fatty acids increases with the degree of unsaturation. The overall mechanism of lipid 62
  • 63. 8. Chemical Analyses oxidation consists of three phases: (1) initiation, the formation of free radicals; (2) propagation, the free-radical chain reactions; and (3) termination, the formation of non-radical products. Chain branching consists in the degradation of hydro- peroxides and the formation of new hydroxyl radicals which will then induce a new oxidation. During the process, there are secondary products being formed from the decomposition of lipid hydro-peroxides producing a number of compounds that may have biological effects and cause flavor deterioration in feed. These compounds include aldehydes, ketones, alcohols, hydrocarbons, esters, furans and lactones (Figure 3). Figure 3 Auto-oxidation of linolenic acid X• XH 14 11 Initiators O2 Linolenate OO• OO• α-Tocopherol A LH O O OOH L• OOH B LH 12(13) – OOH Monohydroperoxides 9(16) – OOH (25%) (50%) O2 LH L• L• O2 O O OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH + C Hydroperoxy Epidioxides D E (25%) Dihydroperoxides Soybean products are relatively sensitive to oxidation because they are rich in unsaturated FA especially linoleic acid. If soybeans are cracked or ground they become more susceptible to oxidation, as fat becomes exposed to oxygen and light. The finer the soybeans are ground, the greater the exposure and thus, the greater the risk of oxidation. Evidently, soybean oil in its pure form (no additives) is very susceptible to oxidation. 63
  • 64. 8. Chemical Analyses There are several techniques to determine the oxidation state of a soybean product or soybean oil. These tests can be classified according to the type of oxidation compound quantified: • Determination of primary products of oxidation: peroxide value. • Determination of secondary products of oxidation: – Colorimetric methods: TBA and anisidine value. – Volatile compounds determination: Chromatography. • Stability tests: AOM and OSI. CONTENTS 8.13.6.1. Peroxide value The peroxide value is an indicator of the products of primary oxidation (peroxides). They can be measured by techniques based on their ability to liberate iodine from potassium iodide, or to oxidize ferrous to ferric ions. The peroxide value is determined by the amount of iodine liberated from a saturated potassium iodine solution at room temperature, by fat or oil dissolved in a mixture of glacial acetic acid and chloroform (2:1). The liberated iodine is titrated with standard sodium thiosulfate, and the peroxide value is expressed in milli-equivalents of peroxide oxygen per kilogram of fat. Procedure: • Place 5 g of sample in a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask and add 30 ml of the acetic acid-dodecane solution. • Swirl until the sample is dissolved and add 0.5 ml of a saturated potassium iodide solution (150 g potassium iodide to 100 ml). • Allow the solution to stand with occasional shaking for exactly one minute, and then add 30 ml of distilled water. • Titrate with 0.01N sodium thiosulfate adding it gradually and with constant and vigorous shaking. Continue the titration until the yellow color has almost disappeared, and add 1 ml of a starch indicator solution. Continue the titration until the solution acquires a blue color. The calculations are as follows: Peroxide value, milliequivalents/1000 = Titration (ml used) x Acid normality x 1000 Although the peroxide value is applicable to peroxide formation at the early stages of oxidation, it is, nevertheless, highly empirical. During the course of oxidation, peroxide values reach a peak and then decline. Consequently the accuracy of this test is sometimes questionable as the results vary with the duration of the procedure used. Thus, a single peroxide value cannot be indicative or the real oxidation state of a product. Also, this test is extremely sensitive to temperature changes potentially leading to poor repeatability of this test. CONTENTS 64
  • 65. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.13.6.2. Thiobarbituric acid (TBA) TBA is the most widely used test for measuring the extent of lipid peroxidation in foods due to its simplicity and because its results are highly correlated with sensory evaluation scores. The thio-barbituric acid has a high affinity to carbonyl substances (aldehydes and ketones) and its reaction with aldehydes (especially with malon-aldehyde, secondary oxidation product of fatty acids with three or more double bonds) forms a colorimetric complex with maximum absorbance at 530 nm. The basic principle of the method is the reaction of one molecule of malon-aldehyde and two molecules of TBA to form a red malon-aldehyde-TBA complex , which can be quantified with a spectrophotometer (530nm). However, this method has been criticized as being nonspecific and insensitive for the detection of low levels of malon-aldehyde. Other TBA-reactive substances including sugars and other aldehydes could interfere with the malon-aldehyde-TBA reaction. The procedure was first described by Witte et al. (1970). The technique requires a spectrophotometer, a water bath, pipettes, test tubes and the following reagents: • TBA solution: 0.02 M (1.44 g/500 ml of distilled water) 4, 6-dihydroxypyrimidine-2-thiol. • m-phosphoric acid solution 1.6% (v/v). • Standard solution: 1,1,3,3-tetraethoxipropyl (TEP) 10.2 M (0.2223 g/100 ml of TCA solution). • Construct calibration curve using several dilutions. The procedure is as follows: • Place 5 g of sample in a beaker and add 50-ml of a 20% tri-chloro-acetic acid and 1.6% of m-phosphoric acid solution for about 30 minutes. • Filter the slurry. • Dilute the residue with 5 ml of freshly prepared 0.02 M (1.44 g in 500 ml of distilled water) 4, 6-dihydroxypyrimidine-2-thiol and mixed. • Tubes are then stored in the dark for 15 hours to develop the color. • The color is measured by a spectrophotometer at a wavelength of 530 nm. CONTENTS 8.13.6.3. Anisidine value The principle of this technique is the preparation of a test solution in 2,2,4-trimethylpentane (iso-octane). Reaction with an acetic acid solution of p-anisidine and measurement of the increase in absorbance at 350 nm. 65 13
  • 66. 8. Chemical Analyses The anisidine value is mainly a measure of 2-alkenals. In the presence of acetic acid, p-anisidine reacts with aldehydes producing a yellowish color and an absorbance increase if the aldehyde contains a double bond. CONTENTS 8.13.6.4. Lipid Stability tests Lipid stability tests are either predictive or indicative tests. They measure the stability of lipids under conditions that favor oxidative rancidity. The predictive tests use accelerated conditions to measure the stability of an oil or fat. Indicator tests are intended to quantify the rancidity of an oil or fat. The most important tests to determine lipid stability are the Active Oxygen Method (AOM) and Oxygen Stability Index (OSI). CONTENTS 8.13.6.4.1. AOM (active oxygen method) This method predicts the stability of a lipid by bubbling air through a solution of oil using specific conditions of flow rate, temperature and concentration. It measures the time required (in hours) for a sample to attain a predetermined peroxide value (in general 100 mEq/kg oil) under the specific and controlled conditions of the test. The length of this period of time is assumed to be an index of resistance to rancidity. Peroxide value is determines as under 8.13.6.1. The more stable the lipid (oil) the longer it will take to reach the predetermined value (100 mEq/kg). For products other than oils such as full fat soybeans, the oil must first be gently extracted. The method is very time- consuming since stable oil or fat may take 48 hours or more before reaching the required peroxide concentration. While still being used today, the AOM method is being replaced by faster, automated techniques. CONTENTS 8.13.6.4.2. OSI (oil stability index) The OSI method is similar in principle to the AOM method, but it is faster and more automated. Air is passed through a sample held at constant temperature. After the air passes through the sample, it is bubbled through a reservoir of deionized water. Volatile acids produced by the lipid oxidation are dissolved in the water. These organic acids are the stable secondary reaction products when oils are oxidized by bubbling steam. They are responsible for an increase in conductivity of the water. This conductivity is monitored continuously and the OSI value is defined as the hours required for the rate of conductivity change to reach to pre-determined value. A major advantage of this method is that multiple samples can be tested simultaneously. CONTENTS 66
  • 67. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.13.7. Fatty acid profile The fatty acid (FA) profile is, from a nutritional point of view, the most important characteristic of oils. The FA composition of the oil is often a fingerprint for the origin, treatment and storage of the oil and it determines largely the quantity that can be used in specific animal diets. On average, palmitic, stearic, oleic, linoleic and linolenic acid proportion of total fatty acids in soybeans is about 10, 4, 25, 51.5 and 7.5% respectively. However, there seems to be a recent trend for oil from soybeans to be richer in palmitic, stearic and oleic acids, and poorer in linoleic and linolenic acids. Part of this decrease has been attributed to global warming, as high temper- atures induce a reduction in poli-unsaturated acids in soybeans. However, this assumption will need further substantiation. The fatty acid profile can be determined by gas or liquid chromatography. The most common is the gas liquid chromatography procedure (GLC). For this analysis a pure sample of oil is used after removal of moisture, insoluble impurities and unsaponifiable substances. Sample preparation requires the following reagents: • Metanolic-HCl (5% v/v): Add 10 ml of acetyl chloride into 100 ml of anhydrous methanol. • 6% K2CO3: 15 g of K2CO3 into 250 ml of distilled water. Procedure to prepare samples for GLC (adapted from Sukhija and Palmquist, 1988): • Weight 0.15 g of sample into 10 ml test tubes. • Add 0.5 ml of an internal standard (i.e. 2mg of C19 per 1 ml of toluene). • Add 0.5 ml of toluene. • Add 1.5 ml of metanolic-HCl. • Close tubes to avoid sample loses. • Vortex for 1 min. • Place in water bath at 70°C for 2 hours. • Cool at room temperature. • Add 2.5 ml of the K2CO3 solution. • Add 1 ml of toluene. • Vortex 30 for seconds. • Centrifuge at 3000 rpm for 5 minutes. • Keep the supernatant and add 0.5 g of anhydrous Na2SO4. • Vortex for 30 seconds. • Centrifuge at 4000 rpm for 10 minutes. • Collect the supernatant and place in gas chromatography (GC) vial for subsequent C analysis. 67
  • 68. 8. Chemical Analyses For operation of the GC equipment and analyses of fatty acids it is recommended to follow the specific procedure provided by the manufacturer of the chromatographic equipment. The chromatography methods are based on the separation and quantitative measurement of specific fractions, such as volatile, polar, or polymeric compounds or individual components such as pentane or hexane. CONTENTS 8.14. Minerals Mineral composition of soy products can vary considerably among and within products. The concentration of minerals depends greatly on a number of factors most notably the origin and crop-growing conditions of the soybean, the variety and the different types of extraction processes that are applied to obtain the soy product. Although a measure of the concentration of these minerals is important for most feed applications, under routine feed production conditions table values are used to formulate. Generally, in feed production, formulators count on the contribution of the minerals in the premix to cover mineral requirements of animals. This is especially the case for the micro-elements. Regular analyses are generally only considered necessary for the macro minerals calcium and phosphorus. For these elements, rather than table values analytical values are used to formulate. In certain regions, especially in areas of intensive animal production, the regulatory limits on phosphorus use and excretion by animals make a precise estimate of this element in the feed necessary. Phosphorus concentrations in soy products are high and with the exception of soybean hulls and soybean mill feed, P levels in these products are a multiple of Ca levels. This makes analyses for P, both from a regulatory and nutritional point of view important. In addition to Ca and P, salt (NaCl) analysis may be carried out on a routine basis for QC purposes. Routinely, under more sophisticated laboratory conditions, most minerals are analyzed by atomic absorption or flame emission. However, this requires a considerable amount of investment and expertise. For normal QC objectives, classical wet chemistry can be used to estimate the content of the most important minerals. CONTENTS 8.14.1. Calcium The determination of calcium by wet chemistry requires a set of porcelain dishes, volumetric flasks (250 ml), beakers (250 ml), filter paper and funnels, and a burette. 68
  • 69. 8. Chemical Analyses The following reagents are needed: • Hydrochloric acid (1 to 3 v/v). • Nitric acid (70%). • Ammonium hydroxide (1 to 1 v/v). • Methyl red indicator (Dissolve 1 g in 200 ml alcohol). • Ammonium oxalate (4.2% solution). • Sulphuric acid (98%). • Standard potassium permanganate solution (0.05N). Ca is determined as follows: weigh 2.5 g finely ground material into a porcelain dish and ash (see section 8.2; alternatively use residue from ash determination). Add 40 ml hydrochloric acid and a few drops of nitric acid to the residue, boil, cool and transfer to a 250 ml volumetric flask. Dilute to volume and mix. Pipette a suitable aliquot of the solution (100 ml for cereal feeds; 25 ml for mineral feeds) into a beaker, dilute to 100 ml and add 2 drops of methyl red. Add ammonium hydroxide drop-wise until a brownish orange color is obtained, then add two drops of hydrochloric acid to give a pink color. Dilute with 50 ml water, boil and add - while stirring - 10 ml of hot 4.2% ammonium oxalate solution. Adjust pH with acid to bring back pink color if necessary. Allow precipitate to settle out, and filter, washing precipitate with ammonium hydroxide solution (1 to 50 v/v). Place the filter paper with precipitate back in beaker and add a mixture of 125 ml water and 5 ml sulphuric acid. Heat to 70°C and titrate against the standard permanganate solution. Calculation: ml, permanganate solution Aliquot used (ml) Calcium (%) = x x 0.1 wt. of sample, g 250 CONTENTS 8.14.2. Phosphorus The method for phosphorus analysis requires a spectrophotometer able to read at 400 nm, volumetric flasks (100 ml) and the following reagents: • Molybdo-vanadate reagent. To obtain this dissolve 40 g ammonium molybdate 4H0 in 400 ml hot water and cool. Dissolve 2 g ammonium meta-vanadate in 250 ml hot water, cool and add 450 ml 70% perchloric acid. Gradually add the molybdate to the vanadate solution with stirring and dilute to 2 liters. • Phosphorous standards. Prepare stock solution by dissolving 8.788 g potassium di-hydrogen ortho-phosphate in water and making up to 1 liter. Prepare the 69
  • 70. 8. Chemical Analyses working solution by diluting the stock 1 in 20 (working concentration = 0.1 mg P/ml). To determine phosphorus: pipette an aliquot of the sample solution prepared as for the calcium determination into a 100 ml flask and add 20 ml of the molybdo-vanadate reagent. Make up to volume, mix and allow to stand for 10 minutes. Transfer aliquots of the working standard containing 0.5, 0.8, 1.0 and 1.5 mg phosphorus to 100 ml flasks and treat as above. Read sample at 400 nm setting the 0.5 mg standard at 100% transmission. Determine mg phosphorus in each sample aliquot from a standard curve. CONTENTS 8.14.3. Sodium chloride The reagents used for the determination of salt in feed samples or feed ingredients are: • Standard 0.1N silver nitrate solution. • Standard 0.1N ammonium thio-cyanate solution. • Ferric indicator - saturated aqueous solution of ferric aluminum. • Potassium permanganate solution - 6% w/v. • Urea solution - 5% w/v. • Acetone (A.R. grade). The method consists of: weighing a 2 g sample into a 250 ml conical flask. Moisten the sample with 20 ml water and then pipette, 15 ml 0.1N silver nitrate solution - mix well. Add 20 ml concentrated nitric acid and 10 ml potassium permanganate solution and mix. Heat mixture continuously until liquid clears and nitrous fumes are evolved. Cool. Add 10 ml urea solution and allow to stand for 10 minutes. Add 10 ml acetone and 5 ml ferric indicator and back titrate the excess silver nitrate with the 0.1N thio-cyanate solution to the red brown end point. Calculation: 15 – ml 0.1 N NH4CNS x 0.585 NaCl(%) = wt. of sample, g For rapid, routine QC procedures, Quantabs, a bench-top test kit is used. CONTENTS 70
  • 71. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.15. Isoflavones In many diets, human as well as animals, soybean products are the main dietary source of isoflavones. These secondary metabolic compounds may play an important role in preventing cancers and reducing risk of cardiovascular diseases. There is also an increasing interest in the role and use of isoflavones in animal production as these compounds have been implicated in enhancing immunity and improving growth performance and carcass traits (Cook, 1998; Payne et al., 2002; Kerley and Allee, 2003). Two forms of isoflavones can be determined: the bound glucoside form (genistin, daidzin, glycitin) and the free aglycone form (genistein, daidzein, glycitein). Lee et al. (2003) reported that the total isoflavone contents in soybean cultivars grown in Korea ranged from 110 to 330 mg 100 g–1. The USDA and Iowa State University (2002) have developed a database on isoflavones from scientific articles. The analysis of isoflavones was carried out according to the method of Wang and Murphy (1994) using high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). For the analysis of isoflavones the following reagents are needed: • Acetonitrile. • HCl (0.1 N) or phosphoric acid. • Isoflavone standards (commercial source). Besides normal laboratory equipment the essay requires an HPLC instrument with a YMC-pack ODS-AM-323 column (10 µm, 25 cm x 10 mm i.d.). The procedure consists of an Isoflavone extraction and an HPLC quantification step. For the extraction two grams of ground soybean products are mixed with 2 ml of HCl and 10 ml of acetonitrile in a 125 ml flask, stirred for 2 hours and filtered. The filtrate is dried under vacuum at a temperature below - 30°C and then re-dissolved in 10 ml of 80 % HPLC grade methanol in distilled water. The sample is then filtered through a 0.45 mm filter unit and then transferred to 1 ml vials. The HPLC quantification of isoflavones requires a column temperature of 25°C and a mobile phase employing a linear HPLC gradient using 0.1 % glacial acetic acid in distilled water (solvent A) and 0.1 % glacial acetic acid in acetonitrile (solvent B). Following the injection of 20 µL of the sample, solvent B is increased from 15 to 35 % over 50 min and then held at 35 % for 10 min. The recommended flow rate is 1 ml min–1 and the detection wavelength: 200 - 350 nm. The content of each isoflavone is expressed on a w.w–1 basis. CONTENTS 71
  • 72. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.16. Antinutritional factors (ANF) One of the most important restrictions on the use of soybeans and their products in animal diets is the presence of a relatively large number of antinutritional factors. The presence of these factors is also the main reason why different technological treatments are applied to soybeans or their products. The ANF in soybeans include compounds classified as protease inhibitors, phyto-hemaglutins (lectins), urease, lipoxygenases and antivitamin factors which can relatively easily be destroyed by heat application or fermentation (Liener, 2000). The methods referred to under section 8.4 provide a relative estimate of the effectiveness with which they have been destroyed. The effect of heat treatment on ANF is a direct function of the degree and duration of the heat application along with particle size and moisture level. ANFs that are not destroyed by heat are the poorly digested carbohydrates, Saponins, Estrogens, Cyanogens and Phytate (Liener, 2000). In the case of soybean products, the most important and best known ANF is the trypsin inhibitors. The quality of technological treatment to destroy ANF is mainly related to this specific factor. To analyze for any ANF a large number of different methods and procedures are available ranging from instrumental (HPLC, GC, CE) to thin-layer chromatography (TLC) and immuno-assays. The reliability and accuracy of results obtained with these methods varies and no preferred method has been defined for all ANF. When possible, and for practical routine QC purposes, the use of ELISA (enzyme-linked immuno-sorbent assay) tests are recommended. The ELISA tests rest on the principle that the compound called the antigen (in this case an ANF obtained by extraction from the feed or ingredient) will bind with enzyme-linked antibodies. Upon this reaction, the enzyme-linked antibodies will be released from the surface to which they were attached (this maybe a stick, plate or tube). The enzyme-linked antibodies are then washed away and an enzyme substrate is added to allow a reaction with the remaining enzyme-linked antibodies. This procedure results in a color change which is inversely related to the antigen concentration. Thus, the deeper the color, the smaller the antigen (ANF) concentration since less antibody-antigen complexes have been formed and washed away leaving more enzyme-linked antibodies to react with the color causing enzyme substrate. CONTENTS 8.16.1. Trypsin inhibitors The residual trypsin inhibitor in soy products combines with the trypsin in the small intestine and forms an inactive complex thus reducing digestibility of 72
  • 73. 8. Chemical Analyses protein. In addition to the negative effect on protein digestibility, the trypsin inhibitor induces pancreatic hypertrophy and leads therefore to an increase in secretion of trypsin (endogenous nitrogen). The combined effect on the animal is a reduction in nitrogen retention, growth and feed conversion. The procedure described to determine trypsin inhibitors activity is based on the ability of the inhibitors to form a complex with the enzyme and thus to reduce the enzyme activity. Uninhibited trypsin catalyzes the hydrolysis of a synthetic substrate BAPNA, forming a yellow-colored product and thus producing a change in absorbance. The reference procedures proposed by the American Oil Chemists' Society (AOCS) and the French Association for Normalization (AFNOR) are based upon the work of Kakade et al. (1969, 1974). Here, the AOCS (1997) procedure is summarized but the only difference with the AFNOR (1997) procedure is the composition of the extraction buffer, which is alkaline whereas it is acid in the other case. Still, these procedures are not very well adapted for routine QC use, and a well equipped lab with skilled technician is necessary. For practical reasons, the method described measures total trypsin inhibitors. It reflects thus the concentration and effects of two distinctively different types of inhibitors namely the KTI (Kunitz trypsin inhibitor) and the BBI (Bowman-Birk inhibitor). Reagents needed are: • Hexane or petroleum ether. • Sodium hydroxyde solution (0.01 N). • Tris buffer: dissolve 6.05 g tris (hydroxyl-metyl)-amino-methan and 2.94 g calcium chloride in 900 ml of water, adjust to pH 8.2 and dilute to 1 L. Bring to 37°C before using. • Trypsin solution: dissolve 4 mg, accurately weighed, twice-crystallized, salt-free trypsin in 200 ml hydrochloric acid (0.001 N). • BAPNA solution: In a water bath, dissolve 40 mg N α-benzoyl DL-arginine p-nitroanilide (BAPNA) in 1 ml dimetyl sulfoxide. Dilute to 100 ml with tris buffer (at 37°C). Prepare new solution daily. Maintain at 37°C for use. • Acetic acid solution (30 %): mix 30 ml glacial acetic acid and 70 ml water (caution). Equipment required: a grinding mill, with screen size 0.15 mm or smaller and a Spectrophotometer capable to read at 410 nm. The procedure is as follows: • Samples should be finely ground without excessive heating. Samples with more than 5 % fat should be defatted with hexane or petroleum ether and desolventized before grinding. 73
  • 74. 8. Chemical Analyses • One gram of ground sample is subsequently weighed into a beaker containing a magnetic stirring bar. 50 ml sodium hydroxide solution is added and the suspension is agitated slowly. After 3 hr, the pH is measured; pH should range between 8.4 and 10.0. • An aliquot of suspension should be taken with a serological pipette and diluted with distilled water so that soybean trypsin inhibitor concentration is sufficient for 40 - 60 % trypsin inhibition. When it is not possible to estimate the expected trypsin inhibitor units, more than one dilution should be made. • With serological pipettes, 0, 0.6, 1.0, 1.4 and 1.8 ml of the diluted suspension is added to duplicate sets of test tubes. Water is then added to bring the volume to 2 ml in each tube. • With a regular time interval for the different tubes, 2 ml trypsin solution is added to each tube and quickly mixed on the Vortex stirrer and placed in the 37°C water bath. 5 ml BAPNA is added to each tube, mixed on Vortex stirrer. The samples are incubated for 10 min at 37°C. After exactly 10 min, the reaction is stopped by addition of 1 ml acetic acid solution followed by mixing on the Vortex stirrer. • Prepare a blank sample as above, except that trypsin is added after acetic acid. • The contents of each tube are filtered and absorbance is measured at 410 nm. Calculation of trypsin inhibitors activity. One trypsin unit is arbitrarily defined as the amount of enzyme, which will increase absorbance at 410 nm by 0.01 unit after 10 minutes of reaction for each 10 ml of reaction volume. Trypsin inhibitor activity is defined as the number of trypsin units inhibited (TIU). Absorbance blank – absorbance sample TIU (/ml) = 0.01 x volume of diluted sample solution, ml TIU is plotted against the volume of the diluted sample solution. The extrapolated value of the inhibitor volume to 0 ml gives the final TIU /ml. This value is used to calculate the TIU per g sample: TIU(/g) = TIU (/ml) x d x 50 where d = dilution factor (final volume divided by the amount of aliquot taken). The results of this analytical method should not exceed 10 % of the average value for repeated samples. CONTENTS 8.16.2. Soy antigens Immunoassay techniques are used to determine concentrations of soy antigens (glycinin and ß-conglycinin) in soy products. The ELISA tests require little training and can be used in small laboratories. Various types of ELISA tests with 74
  • 75. 8. Chemical Analyses specific polyclonal antisera (Pabs) or monoclonal antibodies (Mabs) can be used to assess soy antigens contents (Table 15). To apply the different ELISA tests, the protein fraction of the soy product is first extracted in borate buffer (100 mM NaBO3, 0.15 M NaCl, pH 8) for 1.5 hr (Tukur et al., 1993). The level of glycinin and ß-conglycinin can be measured by a specific competitive inhibition ELISA using anti-soy globulin Pabs (Heppell et al., 1987). Serial, four-fold dilutions of the sample are incubated with a standard dilution of rabbit antiserum to test protein and the residual unbound antibodies are quantified. Table 15 ELISA formats used for analysis of soy globulins ELISA Antibody format Specificity Glycinin Pab LJR J4 inhibition intact glycinin Mab IFRN inhibition binds proteolytic intermediates and 0025 thermally denatured glycinin; epitope lies within acidic polypeptides Mab IFRN two-site recognize proteolytic intermediates and 0025 & Pab thermally denatured glycinin R103b3 ß-conglycinin Pab LJR J2 inhibition intact ß-conglycinin Mab IFRN inhibition recognizes epitopes in acidic regions of a 0089 and α' subunits of ß-conglycinin Mab IFRN two-site recognition of thermally denatured 0089 & Pab ß-conglycinin is 3-fold greater than native R195b3 (from Tukur et al., 1996) CONTENTS 8.16.3. Lectins Lectin is a protein with a specific binding affinity for sugar residues. The lectin-sugar interaction is important at the level of the membrane receptors in the gut where it is thought to be responsible for agglutination and mitosis. As for most leguminous plants or seeds of these plants, lectins have been shown to be an important ANF in raw soy products (Pusztai, 1991). 75
  • 76. 8. Chemical Analyses Table 16 Anti nutritional factor contents in various soy products Product PDI Trypsin inhibitor Lectins Antigens (%) activity (mg/g) (mg/g) (mg/g) Untoasted soy flour 90 23.9 7.3 610 Slightly toasted soy flour 70 19.8 4.5 570 Toasted soy flour 20 3.1 0.05 125 Ethanol/water-extracted soy concentrate 6 2.5 <0.0001 <0.02 (adapted from Huisman and Tolman, 1992) Lectins are heat sensitive and are therefore only present at residual levels in soybean products. Heat treatment to inactivate antinutritional factors in soy products is less efficient for antigens than for trypsin inhibitors or lectins (Table 16). The level of soy lectins can be estimated by measuring the hemaglutination activity. More recently, ELISA (total lectins) and FLIA (functional lectins) tests have been developed and these methods are more sensitive and selective (Delort-Laval, 1991). Lectins can vary considerably (chemical structure, molecular weight a.o.), therefore a specific essay is required for each legume seed tested (de Lange et al., 2000). The procedure as presented by Schulze et al. (1995) can be summarized as follows: One gram of sample is mixed with 20 ml tris-HCl buffer (50 mM, pH 8.2) and stirred for 1 hr. Extracts are centrifuged at 7500 x g for 15 min and the supernatant is used for serial dilutions. Lectins are is determined in the supernatant. Polyclonal antibodies against soy-lectins (ELISA) are coated to micro-titer plates overnight at 4°C. The plates were then blocked with 0.5 % BSA (bovine serum albumin) and 0.2 % Tween-20 in TBS for 1 hr at 37°C. Subsequently, the plates are washed and samples are diluted at appropriate concentrations. A reference soy-lectin sample is run in parallel. All samples are transferred to micro-titer wells and incubated for 2 hr at 37°C. The plates are washed and peroxidase-conjugated anti-lectin antibodies are applied and incubated for 2 hr at 37°C. Finally, the plates are washed again and bound conjugated antibodies are developed for peroxidase activity using 1,2-phenylendiamine. Absorbance is read at 492 nm. Data can be evaluated by the parallel line assay using a computer software package connected to the ELISA reader system. Lectin concentrations are expressed in w.w–1 on a dry matter basis. CONTENTS 76
  • 77. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.17. Mycotoxins; rapid tests Mycotoxins are a major quality concern for the feed industry. Although soy products do not generally show the same level or range of mycotoxin contamination as cereal grains, they do occur occasionally and routine QC methods should be in place to control their presence. This is especially the case now that regulatory restrictions on mycotoxin levels are becoming increasingly more stringent. The most common mycotoxins occurring in feed ingredients are aflatoxins, deoxynivalenol (DON), zearalenone, ochratoxin and fumonisins. All these mycotoxins can potentially be found in soy products but the most important mycotoxins in the case of soy products are ochratoxin (produced by the molds Aspergillus ochraceous or Penicillium verrucosum under poor storage conditions) and zearalenone (produced by the fungus Fusarium graminearum). As in the case of ANFs, the analyses for mycotoxins and their metabolites can be carried out by a range of methods. No preferred method has been defined for all mycotoxins. For practical QC purposes, however, the use of the TLC and ELISA tests are recommended. In the case of mycotoxins, these tests can be separated in screening and quantitative analysis with the former detecting a simple presence of the mycotoxin and the later providing rather precise estimates of mycotoxins levels present in a sample. Qualitative analysis will require additional equipment such as long-wave microwell strip readers, UV lights or fluorometers. The precision of these quantitative measures varies with the type and manufacturer of the test and some prior evaluation and training as to which test most suitable for a particular laboratory setting is recommended. Minimum detection levels may vary among producers and types of test kits. However, the significant improvements in the quantitative ELISA tests over the last 10 to 20 years have made these tests perfectly suited for routine quality procedures and several have been validated by the AOAC and received approval (AOAC International, 1995; Trucksess et al., 1989). Nevertheless, due to the many factors that may affect the results of the ELISA test kits, the variation between laboratories and analysts may be considerable. In some instances, limits of detection are also inadequate to meet the increasingly stringent demands for measurement at low levels. False positive or negative readings are known to occur and for purposes other than routine quality procedures, classical instrumental analysis as referred to above will be needed. Also, test kits have been developed that will qualitatively detect several mycotoxins in a single test. General procedure: Before performing the rapid test, the mycotoxins need to be extracted from the sample. Most of mycotoxins can be extracted by grinding the sample to 0.6 mm- 77
  • 78. 8. Chemical Analyses mesh, then blending 25 g of that sample with 125 ml of a 70% methanol solution (7 parts of methanol and 3 parts of de-ionized water). Stir vigorously in a high-speed blender for 2-3 minutes. The ELISA test should be performed as indicated by the manufacturer of the test kits. When choosing the ELISA test for mycotoxin analyses it is necessary to make sure that the kit has been validated for use with soybean products. CONTENTS 8.17.1. Ochratoxin This mycotoxin is often considered the most common mycotoxin in soybean products. It is thought to be principally produced during storage under humid and warm (>20°C) conditions. Damage to grains by insects or through mechanical means will provide an entry for the fungi and enhance initial contamination. Ochratoxin is a mycotoxin produced by several species of the mold genera Aspergillus and Penicillium. Usually, the rapid tests for ochratoxins have a lower limit of detection of 0.01 ppm in the case of screening methods while quantitative tests have a lower detection limit at 0.005 ppm. It seems that at levels of 0.2 ppm clinical signs associated with ochratoxins will appear in monogastric species. CONTENTS 8.17.2. Zearalenone Zearalenone is primarily produced by Fusarium graminearum. By itself, zearalenone is not toxic, but once metabolized, its end-products have estrogenic activity, which may cause some reproductive alterations in animals. Sensitivity to zearalenone differs considerably among livestock species with swine considered most sensitive. Levels above 1 ppm result in noticeable effects on reproduction in swine. Usually, the rapid screening tests for zearalenone have a lower limit of detection of 0.1 ppm with quantitative tests having a lower detection limit of 0.2 ppm. CONTENTS 8.17.3. Fumonisins Fumonisins includes a group of mycotoxins produced by Fusarium moniliforme and Fusarium proliferatum. Horses are especially sensitive to fumonisins. Usually, the rapid tests for fumonisins have a lower limit of detection of .2 ppm, a limit of quantification of 1 ppm up to 6 ppm. CONTENTS 78
  • 79. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.17.4. Aflatoxins Aflatoxin is often considered the most common mycotoxin in feeds and grains. However, the occurrence of this toxin in soy products is relatively rare. Aflatoxin is a mycotoxin produced by Aspergillus flavus and Aspergillus parasiticus. Not all strains of these fungi are capable of aflatoxin production. Drought conditions associated with warm temperatures and physical damage to the grain strongly increase the probability of aflatoxin occurrence. There are several types of aflatoxins, with the most common in order of prevalence being B1, B2, G1 and G2. To date, aflatoxins are the only mycotoxins for which official maximum levels have been defined. The FDA as well as the EEC has established a maximum level of total aflatoxins of 20 ppb in ingredients for the feed industry. Usually, the quantitative rapid tests for aflatoxins have a lower limit of detection of 1 ppb and a limit of quantification of 5 ppb up to 50 ppb. In addition to the method described above, aflatoxins can be extracted, by weighing 10 ml of soybean products into a wide mouthed bottle and thoroughly mixing it in 10 ml of water. Add 100 ml of chloroform, stopper with a chloroform resistant bung and shake for 30 minutes. Filter the extract through diatomaceous earth. CONTENTS 8.17.5. Deoxynivalenol Deoxynivalenol (DON), commonly referred to as vomitoxin, is a trichothecene primarily produced by Fusarium graminearum. Fusarium growth requires a minimum moisture level of 19 % thus DON levels are not known to develop or increase during normal storage conditions. The FDA has established advisory levels for DON. Maximum levels for ingredients other than wheat and wheat by-products have been set at 5 ppm for swine and 10 ppm for ruminants (with a 20 % limit at the inclusion rates of these contaminated ingredients in the case of swine diets). The extraction of DON from soybean should not be performed with ethanol. It should be conducted with about 10 g of sample ground to 0.6 mm. Shake vigorously in 50 ml of de-ionized water for 3 minutes. Then the sample is filtered and the liquid fraction is kept for subsequent ELISA analyses. Usually, the rapid tests for DON have a lower limit of detection of 2.0 ppm for the screening tests and 0.5 ppm for the quantitative tests. CONTENTS 79
  • 80. 8. Chemical Analyses 8.18. Genetically modified organisms (GMO) Some soybeans have been genetically modified. As market demands for traceability are growing and market demands for non-GMO products are decreasing, it is important to be able to distinguish between genetically modified and traditional products. Certain official maximum limits on the presence of GMO material in non- GMO products exist. In the EEC these levels are now fixed at a maximum of 0.9 %. Japanese legislation allows food products containing less than 5% of approved biotech crops, like corn and soybeans, to be labeled as non-GMO. In the presence of the extensive use of GMO soybean varieties, the risk of commingling and analytical variability, these minimum levels reflect in part the inability to guarantee complete absence of GMO material in products labeled as GMO-free. The GMO varieties are characterized by the insertion of a new, functional gene (or cluster of genes) into their genomes. The expression of these genes provides the soybeans with some advantages, such as resistance to insects and herbicides. Several commonly used GMO testing protocols, including biological tests, as well as ELISA and PCR (polymerase chain reaction) tests, exist. The ELISA methods are based on the same principle as described above for the detection of mycotoxins. A popular version of the ELISA test, used for screening purposes only, uses lateral flow strips that deliver results in a couple of minutes. This makes this test especially suited for QC purposes at feed mills. Quantitative ELISA tests also exist. They are normally presented as plate tests with the degree of color change being indicative of the level of GMO material present in the sample. An important limitation of the ELISA tests is that they have limited accuracy when applied to heat-processed ingredients; especially in the case of high temperature application (extrusion). The limitation applies to all products in which the application of high temperatures leads to substantial denaturation of the soy proteins, thereby making detection of proteins difficult. The PCR tests (more sensitive than the ELISA methods) are based on the detection of DNA sequences in the genome of the soybean product. The PCR is an extremely sensitive technique and is able to identify different types of GMOs at very low levels. It is also the only method that can effectively detect GMOs in heat treated ingredients and feeds which makes this method the preferred procedure in the case of most soy products. However, due to the requirements for equipment, the delay in obtaining results (2 to 3 days) and the level of expertise required, the test is not suited for routine QC analyses at the feed plant level. This test should be carried out in a proper laboratory setting. An additional disadvantage of this procedure is its tendency to give false positives which may require replicate testing. 80
  • 81. 8. Chemical Analyses Biological tests are mainly limited to the herbicide resistant soybean varieties and can only be applied to the untreated bean. The advantage of these tests is that they are relatively inexpensive and produce clear-cut results. In these tests seeds are placed in a germination media. The seeds are then moistened with a diluted solution containing the herbicide against which the seed is thought to be resistant or the germinated seeds are sprayed with the herbicide in question. Herbicide tolerant GMO seeds will germinate and/or grow normally while the non-GMO seeds will fail to germinate or grow. A minimum one week period is needed to carry out this test. CONTENTS 81
  • 82. 9. NIR ANALYSES Near infra-red reflectance (NIR) spectroscopy has been used for more than 35 years to rapidly analyze grains, animal feeds and forages. The first application of NIR spectroscopy was developed by Norris and associates in the early sixties to measure water content in grains and seeds (Givens et al., 1997). Since these early developments NIR spectroscopy has matured to a well established and broadly accepted method to measure a wide array of chemical compounds in feed and food ingredients or diets. Concerning soybean products, the largest and most evident application is in the rapid determination of proximate components previously carried out by the time- consuming and laborious conventional wet chemistry. The potential of NIR to carry out more evolved analysis such as protein quality and ANF is a real possibility since the technique has been used to measure characteristics of similar complexity such as digestibility of individual amino acids (van Kempen and Bodin, 1998). However, despite the rapid answers and the major time savings made possible by NIR, the development of the calibrations required for protein solubility and ANF have as yet received little attention. NIR spectroscopy is based on the principle that infra-red radiation of a sample results in the reflection or transmittance of the radiation that is not absorbed by the sample. The characteristics of the reflected or transmitted radiation can be used to describe certain chemical characteristics of the sample. Since this relationship is not mathematical, the relationship between the reflected radiation and the chemical compound of interest must be based on a calibration. In this calibration the amount of light reflected (or absorbed) at one or more wavelengths are related to a specific chemical compound or compounds. More precisely, it is the chemical bonds and functional groups of the compound that are related to the reflectance at a specific wavelength. Consequently, molecules characterized by a repetitive bond and structure are often more suited for detection by NIR. The choice of a wavelength or a combination of wavelengths to detect a chemical compound is not necessarily constant. The optimum choice of wavelengths to correlate with a specific compound differs not only among ingredients but also among laboratories, equipment and even years. Also, the scattered reflectance from other compounds leads to interference. 82
  • 83. 9. NIR Analyses. Consequently, the wavelength best related to the compound of interest is the one at which absorption by the compound is maximized and interference by reflectance of other sample constituents is minimized. A number of items interfere with the near infra-red reflectance spectra. The reflectance obtained from a sample is characterized by scatter due to instrument type and function, sample preparation (grinding and thus particle size), temperature, water content and interference of reflectance from other compounds. Variations in water content of the sample are important because water absorbs radiation strongly. In order to increase the precision of NIR analyses the factors interfering with the NIR spectra need to be standardized when analyzing an ingredient or they need to be eliminated through the application of mathematical corrections on the spectrum or calibrations. Since standardization of sample preparations is not always practical and since it reduces the major benefit of NIR analyses (time savings) preference is given to mathematical corrections. A series of mathematical tools have been developed to correct the spectral data and improve the predictive capacity of the calibrations. The choice and application of these corrections differ considerably among the constituents to be analyzed. The range of mathematical tools that is available to treat spectral data is increasing rapidly thus improving the quality of the analysis and the requirements for sample preparation. Before routine analyses can be carried out equations need to be developed for each individual constituent and often the individual ingredients. Sometimes, a common equation can be developed for ingredients and/or their by-products. In the case of soy products a single equation can by used for a number of products if they are sufficiently alike in composition and preparation. This is for instance the case for all soybean meals. However as a general rule of thumb it may be said that the larger the physical and chemical differences among ingredients, the greater the need to develop separate equations. NIR calibrations are equations developed from a dataset composed of the component of interest analyzed by a standard reference method (i.e. crude protein) and the infra-red reflectance spectra. Least square multiple linear regression analysis are used to develop the prediction equation (calibration) i.e. chose the equation that provides the best fit between the analytical component and reflectance or absorption at one or more wavelengths. The calibration data set should include samples that represent the total chemical, physical and spectral variation normally 83
  • 84. 9. NIR Analyses. found in the population of samples that will be analyzed with the calibration. For instance in the case of a calibration to measure crude protein in all soybean meals the calibration dataset should include samples of SBM ranging from 42 to 50 % crude protein. Calibration sets should have the widest possible range in composition but above all they should be representative of all samples to be routinely analyzed with the equation. It is generally not recommended to include samples with extreme values (Shenk and Westerhaus, 1991). Extrapolation beyond the range of values covered in the calibrations is not acceptable. Thus for most soybean products separate equations will need to be developed for groups of products with similar characteristics and values (i.e. Full fat soybeans, SBMs, SPCs, oils etc.). The quality of a calibration depends greatly on the number of samples and the choice of the samples. The number of samples required to develop a reliable equation remains a subject of discussion. No definite numbers can be provided as the size of the calibration dataset is related to the variability within a set and the range of values that needs to be covered. Under most conditions applicable to soybean products, the number of samples will be no less than 40. The larger the set of well prepared and selected samples the stronger the calibration will be. Once the calibration established, validation of the calibration will be necessary. Samples for validation are subject to the same criteria for representation and number as those used for samples to establish the equation. Generally a smaller number are allowed when samples are representative of the population. Routine procedures to verify the validity and quality of the equation need to be established. The calibration can and should be strengthened through a continuous updating and expansion of the calibration set by adding critically selected samples. A number of statistical measures are used to describe the quality of a calibration or evaluate its predictive capacity. Most of these refer directly to the least square multiple linear regression techniques used to develop the equations. Most common measures are the regression coefficient (R2), the standard error of prediction or estimate (SEP) and bias (D). The R2 is a measure of the variability in the reference data accounted for by the regression equation; the SEP is the variability between predicted values and reference values when the equation is applied to the data other than the calibration set, and D is the average difference between the predicted and reference values. Ideally R2 should be as close as possible to 1.0 while SEP and D should be as small as possible. 84
  • 85. 9. NIR Analyses. Analyses obtained by NIR are potentially subject to a large number of errors related to the equipment, the calibration and validation process or sample preparation (Williams, 1987). Not all errors are of equal importance and their occurrence and impact is being reduced by the development and installation of more sophisticated NIR techniques and equipment. Users have learned to manage the equipment better and increased their understanding of the special requirements needed for NIR analysis. While the routine use of the equipment is quite simple, the maintenance and development of calibrations require a high level of expertise. For proper operation and in order to reduce errors clear protocols should be drawn up and implemented at all levels of NIR operations. It is important that these protocols assure continuity between the use of NIR for routine analytical functions and the development of new calibrations. When used for routine quality assurance analyses, it is important to provide a separate dust-free environment. This is often difficult to realize in operations dealing with commodities and feed production. An important number of the errors that can occur in NIR are related to the equipment. There is a relatively large variation between NIR equipments. Consequently, in the case of monochromatic equipment for instance calibrations cannot be transferred directly from one NIR to another without adjustments or corrections followed by a series of validations. Universal calibrations have been developed to solve the problem of transferability of calibrations. These equations are based on a larger dataset than normal covering often different regions and years. Results of these calibrations are often less accurate that those of equipment-specific calibrations. More recently the concept of cloning or networking NIRs has been developed. In these networks and through a series of mathematical corrections the NIRs are calibrated to provide identical spectral results. This of course facilitates enormously the transfer of calibrations and the verification of the different NIRs in the network. While in principle all organic compounds of a feed or feed ingredient can be analyzed by NIR, for most ingredients and especially for soybean products, best results in terms of accuracy and precision are obtained for humidity, crude protein and lipids. NIR results for fiber components and non-fiber carbohydrates (starch, sugars) normally give larger SEPs and biases and lower R2 values. NIR cannot be used for the analyses of minerals although a rough estimate for ash and minerals may be obtained by relating the reflectance at specific wavelengths to the organic matter or components of the organic matter (Givens et al., 1997). NIR can be used to analyze 85
  • 86. 9. NIR Analyses. other organic compounds such as amino acids (van Kempen and Bodin, 1998) ANF or fatty acids in soy products, however, the number of publications on this subject is limited and more work is needed. Equipment required for NIR analysis of soy products: • Drying equipment (force draught oven). • Wet chemistry laboratory (to conduct analyses for reference values used in calibration development – see previous sections). • Grinder (preferably Retch grinder but this is optional; calibrations can be developed for un-ground, homogeneous material). • NIR equipment. Procedure (calibration development). • Dry sample to constant weight (see Section 8.1). • Grind (optional). • Split sample in 2 sub-samples, one for reading on NIR equipment and one for analysis by the reference method(s) (wet chemistry). • Fill sample holder (as described in manual). • Insert sample holder in NIR and read reflectance or analyte concentration. • Obtain analytical results for analyte of interest by reference method (see Chapter 8). • Using a statistical software perform multiple linear regression analysis between wavelength spectra (independent variable) and results of chemical analysis (dependent variable). • Establish regression equation (high R2, low SE); beware of over-parameterization (use of too many wave lengths). • Validate equation with samples not used to establish equation. • Re-evaluate calibration regularly. Procedure (application): • Dry sample to constant weight (see Section 8.1). • Grind (optional). • Fill sample holder (as described in manual). • Insert sample holder in NIR and read reflectance or analyte concentration. (Modern apparatus have integrated computers that will give a direct reading of the component concentration). CONTENTS 86
  • 87. 10. DATA MANAGEMENT 10.1 Sample statistics The physical, chemical and microbiological analyses that are performed on feed or soybean products provide information on the nutritional or health value of a selected lot (statistically speaking: the population). The analysis of the whole population is generally not possible. Therefore, statistical procedures are required to obtain information from samples to describe the population accurately. a. Basic assumptions: The distribution of a measured parameter (X) in the population of size N is assumed to be normal. In statistical terms, this is expressed as: Xi ~ N (µ,σ2). Where µ is the population mean and σ2 the population variance). Figure 4 Example of a density curve describing a normal distribution 0.4 – Parameters: mean = 48% std. deviation = 1% 0.3 – Probability 0.2 – 0.1 – 0– I I I I I I I I I I I 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Protein content, % | µ−3σ|µ−2σ| µ±1σ |µ+2σ | µ+3σ| 87
  • 88. 10. Data Management Note: The area under the curve gives the proportion of observations that falls in a particular range of values. Properties of the normal distribution: 68 % of the observations fall within ± 1σ of the mean µ. 95 % of the observations fall within ± 2σ of the mean µ. 99.7 % of the observations fall within ± 3σ of the mean µ. The population can be characterized by its mean µ and variance σ2 (unknown). The normal distribution is the most common random distribution about the mean value. An example of this could be the distribution of crude protein content (CP) in a load of soybean meal (SBM) guaranteed to contain 48 % of CP (Figure 4). b. Parameter estimates: Sample statistics are used to estimate the population parameters from a sample of smaller size (n). In our SBM example, this would be the estimation of the crude protein of all SBM in the load on the basis of a set of samples of SBM from that load. Main parameter estimates (Table 17) can be calculated simply from the measured results on the samples. Table 17 Common notation of parameters and parameter estimates Parameters Parameter estimates (population) (sample) Mean µ X Variance σ2 S2 Standard deviation σ S Mean The mean x represents the average value of the analyzed component and is calculated by taking the sum of the measurements and dividing by the number of samples. Σx Mean (x): x = n i Where xi: individual sample measurement, n: number of samples Variability More important than the mean of a parameter maybe the variability in the observations on the samples as it provides information about the spread in values within the population. For our example: how many samples have crude protein values above or below the mean and how much do they differ from the mean value? Different parameters can be used as indicators of the variability present in a set of measurements: 88
  • 89. 10. Data Management Range (w): w = xmax - xmin Relative percent difference (RPD) used for duplicates: W RPD = x 100% x Variance (S2) obtained from at least three replicates: Σ(xi – x)2 Σxi2 – (Σxi)2/n S2 = or S2 = n–1 n–1 Standard deviation (s): square root of the variance. The standard deviation is often preferably calculated because it is expressed in the same physical unit as the original data. Coefficient of variation (CV): S CV = x 100% x CV is mainly used when the size of the standard deviation changes with the magnitude of the mean. c. Presentation of analytical results (example): A cargo of SBM was sampled and 14 samples were collected (n = 14 replicates) to determine protein content of the SBM. The sampling was conducted to be representative on the entire load. The results of the analyses are presented in Table 18. Table 18. Protein content of soybean meal: calculation steps to determine the mean and variance n° sample measurement: xi xi – x (xi – x)2 1 50.2 1.79 3.19 2 54.0 5.59 31.20 3 48.7 0.29 0.08 4 44.2 -4.21 17.76 5 45.4 -3.01 9.09 6 46.8 -1.61 2.61 7 51.3 2.89 8.33 8 49.7 1.29 1.65 9 47.7 -0.71 0.51 10 47.6 -0.81 0.66 11 42.9 -5.51 30.41 12 48.0 -0.41 0.17 13 52.1 3.69 13.58 14 49.2 0.79 0.62 Sum Σ 677.8 0 119.86 Σ/n x = 48.41 - - 2 Σ / (n-1) - - S = 9.22 89
  • 90. 10. Data Management In this example, the mean protein content in the sample was of 48.41 % of DM and the standard deviation of 3.04 % of DM. The construction of histograms is helpful to visualize the data (average value and range) and to determine if they follow a normal distribution. Histograms are an important tool in quality control (QC) because they help to identify the cause of problems by the shape (i.e., uni- or bimodal) and the width of the distribution. d. How to construct a histogram? This procedure was developed from the above example. - Calculate the range of the values: w = 54.0 – 42.9 = 11.1 % of DM - Choose a number of intervals (ex. 7). The size of the interval is equal to: w / 7 (= 1.6) For practical considerations, it is better to round the interval size (ex. 2 % of DM). - Calculate the frequency of occurrences for each interval: Ex. Interval: 41 - 43 > occurrence: 1 Interval: 45 - 47 > occurrence: 2 - Draw the corresponding figure (Figure 5). Figure 5 Histogram of the data based on seven intervals 0.4 0.3 Frequency 0.2 0.1 0 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 Protein content, % CONTENTS 90
  • 91. 10. Data Management 10.2. Quality indicators The reliability of analytical results and thus the quality of our estimations concerning the population (SBM) depend on critical parameters. First of all, the analytical method should be specific for the compound to be measured (ex. crude protein). The method should also be sensitive to variations in the amount of the compound under study. A small change in CP content should result in a relatively equivalent change in the instrumental response. Finally, accuracy and precision of the method are required (Figure 6) and quality indicators can help to evaluate these two measures. Figure 6 Definition of accuracy versus precision Good precision Poor accurarcy Good precision Good accurarcy Poor precision Poor accurarcy (Galyean 1997) In the above example, the method for crude protein analysis in SBM could present a poor accuracy (mean value of 46 % of DM when 48 % of DM should be measured) but a good precision (small range: 45.5 - 46.5 % of DM). On the contrary, the method could present a good accuracy (48 % of DM) and a poor precision (large range: 45 - 51 % of DM). a. Accuracy Accuracy is a measure of the bias between the analytical results (Xi) and the true value (Xt). The accuracy can be tested on a sample, when the composition is known. 91
  • 92. 10. Data Management Accuracy can be determined by: the absolute error (Xi - Xt) or the relative error: 100 x (Xi - Xt) / Xt. For example, if the CP value of SBM is 48 % of DM and the analytical result yields 50, the method is not accurate: the absolute error for this result is 2 % of DM and the relative error is 4.17 %. How to check the accuracy of a method? • Certified reference materials (CRM). When available, CRM are materials issued and certified by an external organization and whose properties are validated and reliable. The use of CRM is a powerful tool to assess the good performance in the analytical method. • Laboratory reference materials (LRM) Because of the high cost of CRM, in-house reference standards are generally preferred. The standard recovery is a good indicator of the accuracy of the method. • "Spiked" sample. Accuracy can also be estimated by the ability to measure an amount of substance in a "spiked" sample. A sample is "spiked" when it contains a precisely measured amount of substance. This amount is adjusted to a desired and known level (S). The percent recovery is then calculated as follows: QS – QN % Recovery = x 100 S where QS is the measured quantity in spiked sample, QN: the measured quantity in unspiked sample and S: the quantity of substance in spiked sample. • Blank. A blank is a QC sample designed to check for contamination into the sampling and analytical procedure. A method blank should be free of the molecule to be measured. • Inter-laboratory comparisons. Inter-laboratory comparisons programs should be conducted to compare accuracy of analytical results. b. Precision Precision is a measure of the ability to reproduce analytical results. How to check the precision of a method? The precision can be estimated with laboratory duplicate samples. These samples should be collected at the same time and location and analyzed in the same conditions. Laboratory duplicates intended to be identical to the original sample. Precision can be determined by calculating the relative percent difference of the 92
  • 93. 10. Data Management duplicates. It can also be calculated by the standard deviation or coefficient of variation when three or more replicates are used. High variability (RPD, s, CV) among duplicates reflects low precision. Table 19 depicts typical and acceptable coefficients of variation for common analyses. Table 19 Typical ranges and acceptable coefficients of variation for proximate analysis in feedstuffs (Galyean, 1997) Analysis Typical range, % Acceptable CV, % DM 80 - 100 0.5 Ash 0 - 20 2.0 CP 5 - 50 2.0 ADF 5 - 70 3.0 NDF 10 - 80 3.0 ADL 0 - 20 4.0 EE 1 - 20 4.0 CONTENTS 10.3. Significance of parameter estimates a. Hypothesis tests These tests can be performed to address the uncertainty of the sample estimates and to take decisions about the validity of the data (Feinberg, 1996). For example, it can help to determine if an observed value of a statistic differs from a hypothesized value of a parameter. For our example on SBM the question is:“Is the crude protein analyzed in the sample really different from the population of all SBM in the load?” To answer this, generally two hypotheses can be tested: Ho: "null hypothesis". The population mean is equal to a reference value (µ − µo = 0). The mean value of crude protein in all SBM is equal to 48 % of DM. H1: "alternative hypothesis". The population mean is different to the reference value (µ − µo ≠ 0). The mean value of crude protein in all SBMs differs from 48 % of DM. Select a level of significance (α): The level of significance represents the probability to reject the hypothesis Ho. By convention, α is set at 5 % - sometimes 10 % is accepted but this increases the probability of being wrong (10 % vs. 5 %). 93
  • 94. 10. Data Management Calculate the test statistics, in other words test the hypothesis from the sample data: The test procedure measures the compatibility between the null hypothesis and the data. Several statistical tests exist. The choice of the statistical test will depend on the sample (size), the knowledge on population parameters (ex. variance), the accepted/assumed probability and the hypotheses under question. For example: can it be concluded from the sampling procedures that the mean value of CP in SBM is 48 % of DM? The Student t-test of the population mean is the test of choice for this case (n small, σ unknown); the following formula can be used for one-sample testing: x–µ t = s o , therefore t = 48.41 – 48 = 0.51 3.04 √n √14 Determine the P-value: The probability value (P-value) of a statistical hypothesis test is the probability to obtain results equal to or more "extreme" in future experiments (given that Ho is true). This probability (P) can be determined using statistical tables to compare the value of the test statistic (ex. 0.51) with values from the probability distribution (ex. Student distribution). The Student t-test and the Normal z tables are presented in Appendix 7 and 8. In the above example, the lower and upper bounds for a Student-t test statistic with n-1 = 13 degrees of freedom: (tp13) can be determined with the tables in appendix 7: t0.4 (13) < 0.51 < t0.25 (13), therefore P ranges from 0.25 to 0.4. The P-value for a two-sided test is twice the P-value of a one-sided test; consequently, in the above example P is between 0.50 and 0.80. The computed actual P-value is equal to 0.62. Set up decision rules: P-value ≤ α The difference is said to be "statistically significant" when P, the probability that Ho is true given the sample data, is less or equal to the level of significance. In that case, it can be concluded that results are not due to chance and the hypothesis Ho can be rejected. P-value > α The difference is attributed to chance or to an error of measurement. In that case, the null hypothesis cannot be rejected; alternatively, Ho is accepted. In the above example, P-value is 0.62 (p > 0.05) therefore it is concluded that the crude protein content of SBM is not statistically different from 48 % of DM. Two types of errors may occur (Table 20-next page). Ho is rejected when it is true (type I error). Ho is accepted when H1 is true (type II error). The probability α represents the "producer's risk" whereas β represents the "consumer's risk". For example, α is the risk of rejecting a "good" lot and β, the risk of accepting a "bad" lot. 94
  • 95. 10. Data Management Table 20 Error types in hypothesis testing Actual situation H0 H1 Type I error Correct Reject Ho (P : α) (P : 1 – β) Decision Correct Type II error Retain Ho (P : 1 – α) (P : β) The results of the tests should always be applied with caution. It is particularly important to choose an appropriate sample size to answer the question and detect differences. The ability of the test to detect differences (P = 1 – β), called power of the test, depends on the size of the difference, the sample size and the level of significance. The test's power increases as sample size increases but decreases as the level of significance increases. Typical power probabilities are set at 0.80, the sample size needed to reach this value can then be estimated. b. Confidence interval The sample mean and the population mean are rarely exactly the same but sometimes we like to be able to say that we are pretty sure that the population is within a given amount of our sample mean. Statistically it is possible to calculate an interval around the sample mean with a given level of confidence (probability). Interval estimates are dependent on the heterogeneity or variance associated with the measured variable (s2), the number of samples (n) and the probability of being wrong (α). The confidence interval for the mean µ of the population (σ unknown) can be determined with the z or t values in statistical tables (Appendix 7, 8): - in the case of a small sample from a normal population: s x ± t α/2 (n –1) √n - in the case of a large sample from a normal population (n > 30): s x ± z α/2 √n For our example: s = 48.41 ± t (13) 3.04 x ± t α/2 (n –1) √n √14 0.025 3.04 = 48.41 ± 2.16 x √14 = [46.66 - 50.16] Thus we are 95 % confident that the average crude protein content in SBM is between 46.7 and 50.2 % of DM. 95
  • 96. 10. Data Management c. Sample size determination Sampling is costly and time-consuming, therefore it is important to know what sample size should be selected to obtain a desired precision. The sample size can be determined if we know the confidence required (P-value; ex. α = 0.05), the variability in the population and the precision required. The precision is expressed as H, representing half the width of the confidence interval. The answer should be rounded up to next following whole number. - unknown population variance: n = ( t αH s )2 ( /2) - known population variance (σ): n = (z αH σ)2 ( /2) CONTENTS 10.4. Control charts Control charts are efficient devices to control an analytical method and to check its stability over time (Daudin and Tapiero, 1996). They are used to indicate the range of variability of a process and to decide whether the process is under statistical control. In certification schemes (HCAPP, ISO, GMP) and solid quality control programs, they have become fundamental tools. For routine QC procedures, different types of charts are developed depending on the controlled parameter (average or range) and the number of replicates per sample. - Measurements in group (X or range chart) - Individual measurements (individual X or moving range chart) Historical data and experience are generally used to establish the specific charts. Basic Principles A control chart is composed of: - A centerline: This value is calculated as the average value of a large number of samples plotted (n > 30). - Horizontal lines: These lines represent the upper control limits (UCL) and the lower control limits (LCL). Typically, these limits are calculated based on the mean and standard deviation: • warning control limits: mean ± 2s • action control limits: mean ± 3s The data is plotted over time. 96
  • 97. 10. Data Management The results of the analytical measurements are plotted in chronological order on the control chart. If the process is in control, the sample points will fall between the control limits. However, points that plot outside of the control limits are interpreted as evidence that the process is out of control. Exceeding a warning control limit generally means that the process is not operating properly. The analyst can try to assess the source of errors, however, no action is needed, providing that next results fall within the warning limits. Exceeding an action control limit leads to the necessary identification and elimination of the causes of errors. How to develop an individual control chart? When samples are individual measurements, control charts can be drawn up very simply. In this case, the moving range xi – xi-1 can be calculated for each pair of data (see Table 21). The lines are then defined as follows: Centerline: x = 48.41 The standard deviation of the process is estimated from the average moving range (MR) divided by 1.128 (conversion factor d2 for n = 2). Action control limits: MR x ± 3 1.128 (LCL = 39.98 and UCL = 56.84). Table 21 Protein content (% of DM) in soybean meal samples n° sample measurement: xi moving range 1 50.2 - 2 54 3.8 3 48.7 5.3 4 44.2 4.5 5 45.4 1.2 6 46.8 1.4 7 51.3 4.5 8 49.7 1.6 9 47.7 2 10 47.6 0.1 11 42.9 4.7 12 48 5.1 13 52.1 4.1 14 49.2 2.9 Average x = 48.41 MR = 3.17 97
  • 98. 10. Data Management Figure 7 Control chart for protein content (% of DM) analyses in soybean meal samples 58 – Upper control limit – 54 – – Protein content 50 – – 46 – – 42 – Lower control limit – 38 –I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Sampling number The process can be said to be “in control” since none of the points fall outside the control limits (Figure 7). CONTENTS 10.5. Follow-up and application of analytical results Analyses of any type are always associated with uncertainty. Indeed, both systematic and random errors can occur. Therefore, it is important to evaluate the size of the errors and to have an estimation of the reliability of the analytical results. This procedure should be part of a standard quality control procedure and needs to be developed through a joint effort between analysts and nutritionists. Each has a specific responsibility/task, which can be summarized as follows: 98
  • 99. 10. Data Management a. Analyst: • Perform the sampling and analysis correctly. • Use proper QC measures to validate the data and to keep systematic and random errors under control: calibration standards, controls, duplicate field samples and blanks to estimate sampling errors, laboratory duplicates to estimate analytical errors. • Establish quality objectives (precision, accuracy) or quality acceptance limits. The acceptable level of variation between duplicates varies by test and by concentration of nutrient (Table 3). • Propose corrective actions (re-sampling, re-calibration...) if needed. b. Nutritionist: • Define the parameters that need to be analyzed. • Include ingredient quality specifications in the purchasing agreement and provide this information to the analyst. • Adjust formulation. • Find alternative ingredient if quality specifications are not met. The objectives of the analyst and the nutritionist may be to reduce variation (increase quality of the results) but also to maximize the value of a raw material. There is a subjective judgment associated with quality control. The risk of type I or type II errors exists. It is possible to reduce these risks (higher significance level, higher power of the tests, and larger number of samples) but this is generally associated with a higher cost. CONTENTS 99
  • 100. 11. REFERENCES AACC, 1976. American Association of Cereal Chemists, Cereal Laboratory Methods, St. Paul, Minn., USA, 1968. AAFCO, 2001. Official Publication 2001. Association of American Feed Control Officials Incorporated. Atlanta, GA. AFNOR XP V18-202, 1997. Aliments des animaux: dosage des inhibiteurs trypsiques. Agence française de normalisation, Paris, France. Anderson-Haferman, J. C., Y. Zhang, C. M. Parsons, and T. Hymoitz. 1992. Effect of heating on the nutritional quality of kunitz-trypsin-inhibitor-free and conventional soybeans for chickens. Poultry Sci. 71:1700-1709. AOAC, 1980. Official Methods of Analysis of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists. AOAC, 1990. Official methods of analysis. 15th edition. AOAC, Arlington, VA. AOAC, 1995. Animal Feed. Chapter 4 in “Official methods of analysis” 16th ed. AOAC . International, Arlington, VI, USA. AOAC, 2000. Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International, 17th d. Official method 968.06. AOCS, 1980. Urease Activity. Official Method Ba 9-58. American Oil Chemists Society., Champagne, IL. AOCS, 1989. Official method Ba 11-54. Nitrogen Solubility Index (NSI). AOCS, 1993a. Official method Ba 10-65. Protein dispersibility index (PDI). AOCS, 1993b. Volume 1, Official Method Ca 6c – 40. AOCS Method 1997. Ba 12-75. In Official methods and recommended practices of the American Oil Chemists Society. American Oil Chemists Society, Champaign, Illinois. Araba and Dale, 1990. Evaluation of protein solubility as an indicator of over- processing of soybean meal . Poultry Sci. 69: 76-83. ASA, 1998. Soy Importers Handbook, 2nd ed. American Soybean Association, United Soybean Board, Missouri Soybean Merchandising Council. ASAE, 1993. American Society of Agricultural Engineers. Methods of determining and expressing fineness of feed materials by sieving. ASAE Standard ASAE S319.2. Bach, A., M. D. Stern, N. R. Merchen, and J. K. Drackley. 1998. Evaluation of selected mathematical approaches used to describe the kinetics of protein degradation in situ. Anim. Sci. 76:2885-2893. Batal, A.B., M.W. Douglas, A.E. Engram, and C.M. Parsons. 2000. Protein dispersibility index as an indicator of adequately processed soybean meal. Poultry Sci., 79: 1592-1596. 100
  • 101. 11. References Berk, Z., 1992.“Technology of production of edible flours and protein products from soybeans” FAO Agricultural services Bulletin No. 97. . Broderick, G. A. 1987. Determination of protein degradation rates using a rumen in vitro system containing inhibitors of microbial nitrogen metabolism. Br. J. Nutr. 58:463-475. Caine, W. R., M. W. A. Verstegen, W. C. Sauer, S. Tamminga and H. Schulze. 1998. Effect of protease treatment of soybean meal on content of total soluble matter and crude protein and level of soybean trypsin inhibitors. Anim. Feed. Sci. Technol. 71:177-183. CFIA, 2003. Canadian Food Inspection Agency, Approved Feed Ingredients, Schedule IV Part 1, List of approved feed ingredients, Class 5. http://www.inspection.gc.ca/english/anima/feebet/sched4/tab_ae.shtml Chamberlain, D. G., and P. C. Thomas. 1979. Ruminal nitrogen metabolism and the passage of amino acids to the duodenum in sheep receiving diets containing hay and concentrates in various proportions. J. Sci. Food Agric. 30: 677-686. Cook, D.R. 1998. The effect of dietary soybean isoflavones on the rate and efficiency of growth and carcass muscle content in pigs and rats. Ph.D. dissertation. Iowa State Univ., Ames CVB, 2000. Centraal Veevoederbureau; Veevoedertabel 2000; chemische samenstelling, verteerbaarheid en voederwaarde van voedermiddelen. Daudin J-J. and Tapiero C.S., 1996. Les outils et les contrôles de la qualité. Economica (ed.), Paris, France, 112p. de Lange, C.F.M., Nyachoti, C.M., Verstegen, M.W.A., 2000. The significance of anti-nutritional factors in feedstuffs for monogastric animals. In: Feed evaluation principles and practice, Moughan, P.J., Verstegen, M.W.A. and Visser-Reyneveld, M.I. (eds). Wageningen Press, 169-188. Delort-Laval, J., 1991. Dosage des facteurs anti-nutritionnels. In: Techniques d'analyse et de contrôle dans les industries agro-alimentaires. Vol. 4: Analyse des constituants alimentaires, Tec & Doc, Lavoisier, 371-387. Dudley-Cash, W.A. 1999. Methods for determining quality of soybean meal protein important. Feedstuffs. Vol 71. N°1 January 4 1999. FEDNA, 1994.“Normas FEDNA para la Formulacion de Piensos Compuestos; valor nutritivo de los concentrados de proteina vegetal” G. de Blas, G.G. Mateos y . P.G. Rebollar. Feinberg M., 1996. La validation des méthodes d'analyse. Masson (ed.), Paris, France, 397p. Frankel, E. N. 1984. Lipid oxidation: mechanism, products and biological significance. JAOCS. 61:1908-1917. Galyean M.L., 1997. Laboratory procedures in animal nutrition research, 193p. Web: http://www.asft.ttu.edu/home/mgalyean/ 101
  • 102. 11. References Gill, C., 2003.“World Feed Panorama: Back to basics of growth” Feed International . p. 6. GIPSA, 1995. Grain Inspection, Processors and Stockyard Administration. Grain Inspection Handbook 1. Federal Grain Inspection Service, USDA. Givens, D.I., J.L. De Boever and E.R. Deauville. 1997. The principles , practices and some future applications of near infrared reflectance spectroscopy for predicting the nutritive value of foods for animals and humans. Nutrition Research Reviews, 10:83-114. Goering, H. K. and P. J. Van Soest. 1970. Forage fiber analyses (apparatus, reagents, procedures and some applications). USDA-ARS Agricultural Handbook 379. U.S. Government Printing Office., Washington, DC. Hanssen, O.K., 2003.“Soya is no soya”: (soya proteins for feed products). Feed International 23 (9):14-18. Heppell, L.M.J., Sissons, J.W., Pederson, H.E., 1987. A comparison of the anti- genicity of soya-bean-based infant formulas. Br. J. Nut., 58, 393-403. Herrman, T., 2001. Sampling: Procedures for Feed. Kansas State University Agricultural Experiment Station and Cooperative Extension Service. MF-2036. Feed Manufacturing. Huisman, J. and Tolman, G.H., 1992. Antinutritional factors in the plant proteins of diets for non-ruminants. In: Recent advances in Animal Nutrition, Garnsworthy, P.C., Haresign, W. and Cole, D.J.A. (eds). Butterworth Heinemann, 3-32. INFIC, 1980.“International Feed Descriptions, International Feed Names and Country Feed Names” International Network of Feed Information Centres, Publication . No. 5, Utah State University, Logan. INRA-AFZ, 2002. Tables de composition et de valeur nutritive des matières premières destinées aux animaux d’élevage. Sauvant,D, J.-M Perez et G. Tran, Eds. Kakade, M.L., N. Simons and I.E. Liener, 1969. An evaluation of natural versus synthetic substrates for measuring the antitryptic activity of soyabeans samples. Cereal Chem. 46, 518-526. Kakade, M.L., J.J. Rackis, J.E. McGhee and G. Puski, 1974. Determination of trypsin inhibitor activity of soy products: a collaborative analysis of an improved procedure. Cereal Chem. 51, 376-382. Kerley, M.S., & Allee, G.L. (2003). Modifications in soybean seed composition to enhance animal feed use and value: Moving from a dietary ingredient to a functional dietary component. AgBioForum, 6(1&2), 14-17. Available on the World Wide Web: http://www.agbioforum.org. Lee, H. and J. D. Garlich. 1992. Effect of overcooked soybean meal on chicken performance and amino acid availability. Poultry Sci. 71:499-508. Lee, S.J., Ahn, J.K., Kim, S.H., Kim, J.T., Han, S.J., Jung, M.Y., Chung, I.M., 2003. Variation in isoflavone of soybean cultivars with location and storage duration. J. Agric. Food Chem., 51, 3382-3389. 102
  • 103. 11. References Liener, I.E., 2000.“Non-Nutritive Factors and Bioactive Compounds in Soy. In: Soy in Animal Nutrition” Ed. J.D. Drackley. Federation of Animal Science Societies. . Liu, K., 1997.“Soybeans: Chemistry, Technology, and Utilization” Aspen Publishers, , New York. Mahadevan, S., F. D. Sauer, and J. D. Erfle. 1987. Preparation of protease from mixed rumen microorganisms and its use for the in vitro determination of the degradability of true protein in feedstuffs. Can. J. Anim. Sci. 67: 55-64. McNaughton, J. M., F. N. Reece, and J. W. Deaton. 1980. Effect of moisture content and cooking time on soybean meal urease index, trypsin inhibitor content, and broiler performance. Poultry Sci. 59:2300-2306. Nocek, J. E., J. H. Herbein, and C. E. Polan. 1983. Total amino acid release rates of soluble and insoluble protein fractions of concentrate feedstuffs by Streptomyces griseus. J. Dairy Sci. 66:1663-1667. NOPA, 1997. National Oil Producers Association. Yearbook 1997. 1225 Twenty-third street N.W., Washington, D.C. 20037, U.S.A. NOPA, 1999. 1997-1999 Yearbook and Trading Rules. National Oilseed Processors Association, Washington, D.C. NRC, 1982. National Research Council.“United States-Canadian Tables of Feed Composition”; Third Revision. National Academy Press, Washington D.C. NRC, 1998. Nutrient requirements of swine; Tenth Revised Edition, National Academy of Sciences 1998. NRC, 2001. Nutrient requirements of dairy cattle; Seventh Revised Edition, National Academy of Sciences 2001. Parsons, C. M., K. Hashimoto, K. J. Wedekind, and D. H. Baker. 1991. Soybean protein solubility in potassium hydroxide: an in vitro test of in vivo protein quality. J. Anim. Sci. 69:2918-2924. Parsons, C. M., K. Hashimoto, K. J. Wedekind, Y. Han and D. H. Baker. 1992. Effect of over-processing on availability of amino acids and energy in soybean meal. Poultry Sci., 71:133-140. Payne, R.L., T.D. Bidner, L.L. Southern and J.P. Geaghan. 2000. Effects of dietary soy isoflavones on growth , carcass traits, and meat quality in growing-finishing pigs. The Louisiana Agric. Exp. Sta. No.: 2000-11-0323. Peisker, M., 2001. Manufacturing of soy protein concentrate for animal Nutrition. Cahiers Options Mediterraneennes, 54, 103 -107. Poos-Floyd, M., T. Klopfenstein, and R. A. Britton. 1985. Evaluation of laboratory techniques for predicting ruminal protein degradation. J. Dairy Sci. 68:829-839. Pusztai, A., 1991. Plant lectins. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. Schulze, H., Saini, H.S., Huisman, J., Hessing, M., van der Berg, W., Verstegen, M.W.A., 1995. Increased N secretion by inclusion of soya lectin in the diets of pigs. J. Sci. food Agric., 69, 501-510. 103
  • 104. 11. References Shenk, J.S. and M.O. Westerhaus, 1991. Population definition, sample selection, and calibration procedures for near infrared reflectance spectroscopy. Crop Science, 31:469-474. Shermer,W.D et al. 1985. Oxidation of feed: How much has occurred. Feedstuff, 4:19-20 Shipley, R. A., and R. E. Clark. 1972. Tracer Methods for In Vivo Kinetics: Theory and Application. Academic Press, New York. Speedy, A.W. 2002.“Overview of World Feed Protein Needs and Supply” FAO Expert . Consultation and Workshop on Protein Sources for the Animal Feed Industry. Bangkok, Thailand. Sukhija, P.S., and D.L. Palmquist, 1988. Dissociation of calcium soaps of long- chain fatty acids in rumen fluid. J Dairy Sci. 1990. 73:1784-7. Tilley, J. M. A., and R. A. Terry. 1963. A two-stage technique for the in vitro digestion of forage crops. J. Br. Grassl. Soc. 18:104. Tremblay, G. F., G. A. Broderick, and S. M. Abrams. 1996. Estimating ruminal protein degradability of roasted soybeans using near infrared reflectance spectroscopy. J. Dairy Sci. 79: 276-282. Trucksess, M.W., M.E. Stack, S. Nesheim, D.L. Park and A.E. Pohland. 1989. Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay of aflatoxins B1,B2 and G1 in corn, cottonseed, peanuts, peanut butter and poultry feed: collaborative study. J. of the Assoc. of Official Chemists 72, 957-962. Tukur, H.M., Lallès, J.P., Mathis, C., Caugant, I., Toullec, R., 1993. Digestion of soybean globulins, glycinin, α-conglycinin and β-conglycinin in the preruminant and the ruminant calf. Can. J. Anim. Sci., 73, 891-905. Tukur, H.M., Lallès, J.P., Plumb, G.W., Mills, E.N.C., Morgan, M.R.A., Toullec, R., 1996. Investigation of the relationship between in vitro ELISA measures of immunoreactive soy globulins and in vivo effects of soy products. J. Agr. Food Chem., 44, 2155-2161 UNEP, 1999.“Agri Food Production; Facts and Figures” UNEP Industry and . Environment, p 4 – 31. USDA, 1999.“United States Standards for Soybeans (Revised edition June 1999)” . Subpart A – General Provisions Terms Defined. USDA, 2001.“Grain inspection, packers and stockyards administration”Technical services administration. http://www.usda.gov/gipsa/reference-library/brochures/soyinspection.pdf USDA, 2003.“Oilseeds: World Markets and Trades” Circular series FOP 02 – 03 Foreign . Agricultural Service. U.S. Department of Agriculture. USDA-IOWA State University, 2002. Database on the isoflavone contents of food, release 1.3. Web: http://www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/foodcomp/Data/isoflav/isoflav.html 104
  • 105. 11. References Van Kempen, T.A. and J.C. Bodin, 1998. Near infrared reflectance spectroscopy (NIRS) seems to be superior to nitrogen-based regressions as a rapid tool in predicting the poultry digestible amino acid content of commonly used feedstuffs. Anim. Feed Sci. Technol.76:139-147. Van Soest, P. J., J. B. Robertson, and B. A. Lewis. 1991. Methods for dietary fiber, neutral detergent fiber, and nonstarch polysaccharides in relation to animal nutrition. J. Dairy Sci. 74: 3583-3597. Waldroup, P. W., B. E. Ransey, H. M. Hellwig and N. K. Smith. 1985. Optimum processing for soybean meal used in broiler diets. Poultry Sci. 64:2314-2320. Wang, H.-J. and Murphy, P.A., 1994. Isoflavone content in commercial soybean foods. J. Agric. Food Chem., 42, 1666-1673. West, B. 2002.“EU soybean meal purchasing patterns and quality assurance” . Final report. American Soybean Association (ASA) Whittle, E., and M. Araba. 1992. Sources of variation in the protein solubility assay for soybena meal. J. Appl. Poultry Res. 1:221-225. Williams, P.C., 1987. Variables affecting near-infrared reflectance spectroscopic analysis. In: P. Williams and K. Norris (eds.) Near-Infrared Technology in the Agricultural and Food Industries. St. Paul, MN; American Association of Cereal Chemists Inc., pp. 143-167. Witte, V. C., G. F. Krause, and M. E. Bailey. 1970. A new extraction method for determining 2-Thiobarbituric acid values of pork and beef during storage. J. Food Sci. 35:582—585. CONTENTS 105
  • 106. 12. ANNEX Appendix 1 Average nutrient composition of soy protein products used in livestock diets Heat Soybean Ground processed Soy Soy seeds FF soybean FF soybean protein protein Soybean Nutrient Unit extruded seeds seeds concentrate isolate hulls Dry matter % 88.10 89.72 89.44 91.83 93.38 89.76 Crude protein % 34.80 37.50 37.08 68.60 85.88 12.04 Crude fiber % 5.20 5.03 5.12 1.65 1.32 34.15 Ether extracts % 17.90 18.04 18.38 2.00 0.62 2.16 Ash % 5.20 4.77 4.86 5.15 3.41 4.53 NDF % 11.00 12.50 12.98 13.50 – 56.91 ADF % 6.40 8.80 7.22 5.38 – 42.05 ADL % 1.00 4.10 4.30 0.40 – 2.05 Starch % 0.00 4.59 4.66 – – 5.95 Total sugars % 7.70 – – – – 1.40 Gross energy kcal/kg 4870 5027 5013 – 5370 3890 DE-swine kcal/kg 3800 4157 4088 4517 4545 1944 ME energy-swine kcal/kg 3560 3739 3714 3661 3955 1687 NE-swine kcal/kg 2560 2920 2803 2000 2000 1074 App. ME-broiler kcal/kg 3350 3475 3332 – 4060 – App. ME-adults kcal/kg 3450 3621 3564 2472 3945 334 ME-ruminants kcal/kg 3400 3373 3400 2690 – 1241 NE-dairy kcal/kg 2159 1986 2097 1600 – 1544 NE-beef kcal/kg 2311 2080 2230 1610 – 1618 Amino acids Lysine % 2.16 2.39 2.34 4.59 5.26 0.73 Threonine % 1.40 1.54 1.53 2.82 3.17 0.73 Methionine % 0.53 0.51 0.52 0.87 1.01 0.14 Cystine % 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.89 1.19 0.16 Tryptophane % 0.44 0.49 0.49 0.81 1.08 0.12 Isoleucine % 1.61 1.78 1.79 3.68 4.25 0.41 Valine % 1.66 1.88 1.85 3.69 4.21 0.49 Leucine % 2.59 2.81 2.76 5.41 6.65 0.75 Phenylalanine % 1.74 1.84 1.87 3.60 4.35 0.47 Tyrosine % 1.23 1.18 1.22 1.55 3.14 0.43 Histidine % 0.93 0.95 0.96 2.41 2.25 0.29 Arginine % 2.57 2.73 2.71 7.34 6.87 0.62 Alanine % 1.41 1.54 1.52 – 3.33 0.51 Aspartic acid % 3.88 4.09 4.06 – 8.29 1.14 Glutamine % 6.17 6.37 6.35 – 12.0 1.49 Glycine % 1.48 1.52 1.59 3.32 3.38 0.85 Serine % 1.78 1.94 1.89 5.19 4.81 0.67 Proline % 1.83 1.89 1.86 – 4.45 0.55 106
  • 107. 12. Annex Heat Soybean Ground processed Soy Soy seeds FF soybean FF soybean protein protein Soybean Nutrient Unit extruded seeds seeds concentrate isolate hulls Minerals Calcium g/kg 3.10 2.58 2.62 2.37 1.50 4.96 Phosphorus g/kg 5.50 5.83 5.70 7.63 6.50 1.59 Magnesium g/kg 2.30 2.98 2.80 1.85 0.80 2.23 Potasium g/kg 18.50 14.60 15.93 12.35 2.75 12.15 Sodium g/kg 0.80 0.20 0.29 0.55 2.85 0.10 Chloride g/kg 0.40 0.25 0.33 0.20 0.20 0.25 Sulfur g/kg 2.80 2.20 2.43 0.70 7.00 0.95 Manganese mg/kg 23.00 36.00 31.79 27.50 5.00 10.67 Zinc mg/kg 40.00 57.00 47.80 47.00 34.00 37.75 Copper mg/kg 34.00 6.90 15.17 17.00 14.00 10.68 Iron mg/kg 146.00 84.00 128.01 137.00 137.00 437.50 Selenium mg/kg 0.28 0.11 0.17 0.14 0.14 0.16 Cobalt mg/kg – – 0 – – 0.06 Molybdenum mg/kg 4.00 – 2.00 – – 0.60 Fatty acids Myristic acid-C14:0 % 0.01 0.03 0.03 – – 0 Palmitic acid-C16:0 % 1.05 1.47 1.95 – – 0.24 Palmitoleic acid-C16:1 % 0.02 0.03 0.04 – – 0 Stearic acid-C18:0 % 0.38 0.53 0.71 – – 0.09 Oleic acid-C18:1 % 2.17 2.97 3.96 – – 0.50 Linoleic acid-C18:2 % 5.31 7.28 9.70 – – 1.21 Linolenic acid-C18:3 % 0.74 1.06 1.40 – – 0.17 FF Soybean is Full Fat Soybean; SBM = Soybean meal. Source: compilation on NRC, INRA-AFZ, CVB, SRTNA and selected suppliers. 107
  • 108. 12. Annex Appendix 2 Average nutrient composition of soy protein products used in livestock diets SBM SBM SBM SBM solvent solvent solvent Soybean mechanically extracted extracted extracted mill Soybean Nutrient Unit extracted 44 48 50 feed oil Dry matter % 89.80 88.08 87.58 88.20 89.70 99.25 Crude protein % 43.92 44.02 46.45 48.79 12.93 1.40 Crude fiber % 5.50 6.26 5.40 3.42 33.47 – Ether extracts % 5.74 1.79 2.13 1.30 1.70 97.20 Ash % 5.74 6.34 6.02 5.78 4.73 0.40 NDF % 21.35 13.05 11.79 9.95 – – ADF % 10.20 8.76 7.05 5.00 41.40 – ADL % 1.17 0.75 0.90 0.40 – – Starch % 7.00 5.51 5.46 3.28 – – Total sugars % – 9.06 9.17 9.29 – – Gross energy kcal/kg – 4165 4130 4120 – – DE-swine kcal/kg – 3394 3446 3776 1167 8915 ME energy-swine kcal/kg – 2986 3210 3299 925 8400 NE-swine kcal/kg – 1903 1955 1992 – 6760 App. ME-broiler kcal/kg – 1929 1973 2147 – 8600 App. ME-adult kcal/kg – 2171 2208 2464 774 8805 ME-ruminants kcal/kg – 2831 2840 3010 1630 8180 NE-dairy kcal/kg – 1706 1748 1826 1001 4520 NE-beef kcal/kg – 1838 1847 1993 965 5022 Amino acids Lysine % 3.50 2.85 2.89 3.00 0.65 – Threonine % 2.21 1.80 1.84 1.90 0.30 – Methionine % 0.80 0.62 0.63 0.67 0.13 – Cystine % 0.77 0.68 0.73 0.73 0.14 – Tryptophane % 0.74 0.56 0.63 0.65 0.13 – Isoleucine % 2.88 2.26 2.17 2.30 041 – Valine % 2.73 2.19 2.30 2.38 0.38 – Leucine % 4.29 3.42 3.60 3.60 0.58 – Phenylalanine % 2.79 2.16 2.37 2.37 0.38 – Tyrosine % 1.52 1.61 1.68 1.64 0.23 – Histidine % 1.44 1.64 1.21 1.21 0.18 – Arginine % 3.98 2.99 3.48 3.53 0.75 – Alanine % 1.85 2.53 2.05 2.04 – – Aspartic acid % 5.16 4.03 5.49 5.55 – – Glutamine % 8.18 6.29 8.62 8.52 – – Glycine % 2.29 3.46 1.97 2.09 0.48 – Serine % 2.20 2.13 2.38 2.49 0.30 – Proline % 2.35 2.17 2.37 2.43 – – 108
  • 109. 12. Annex SBM SBM SBM SBM solvent solvent solvent Soybean mechanically extracted extracted extracted mill Soybean Nutrient Unit extracted 44 48 50 feed oil Minerals Calcium g/kg 2.96 3.12 3.07 2.68 4.05 – Phosphorus g/kg 6.64 6.37 6.37 6.36 1.75 – Magnesium g/kg 2.84 2.72 3.03 2.88 3.20 – Potasium g/kg 20.28 19.85 22.00 20.84 15.20 – Sodium g/kg 0.33 0.18 0.18 0.88 2.50 – Chloride g/kg 0.72 0.42 0.35 0.53 – – Sulfur g/kg 3.37 3.51 2.76 4.30 0.55 – Manganese mg/kg 40.86 37.85 43.11 33.92 290.00 – Zinc mg/kg 58.98 53.56 50.12 53.70 – – Copper mg/kg 21.90 20.03 18.04 17.10 – – Iron mg/kg 218.45 304.84 319.43 190.75 – – Selenium mg/kg 0.10 0.31 0.30 0.30 – – Cobalt mg/kg 0.18 0.14 0.17 0.09 – – Molybdenum mg/kg 3.80 – 2.45 3.56 – – Fatty acids Myristic acid-C14:0 % – 0.00 0.00 0.01 – 0.10 Palmitic acid-C16:0 % – 0.77 0.14 1.05 – 10.50 Palmitoleic acid-C16:1 % – 0.00 0.00 0.02 – 0.15 Stearic acid-C18:0 % – 0.28 0.05 0.38 – 4.20 Oleic acid-C18:1 % – 0.28 0.27 0.21 – 23.30 Linoleic acid-C18:2 % 2.87 0.64 0.80 0.56 – 52.00 Linolenic acid-C18:3 % 0.42 0.55 0.12 0.08 – 6.90 FF Soybean is Full Fat Soybean; SBM = Soybean meal. Source: compilation on NRC, INRA-AFZ, CVB, SRTNA and selected suppliers. 109
  • 110. 12. Annex Appendix 3 Sampling patterns for bulk carriers (From: Herrman, 2001) A. Sampling pattern for bulk carriers containing a homogeneous load Sampling pattern as A C F recommended by GIPSA (1995) for the sampling of bulk truck or rail D shipments of soybean seeds or soybean meals using a hand-held B E G sampling devise or an automatic sampler. Site A: Probe the grain approx. 0.6 m. from the front and side. Site B: Probe approx. half-way between the front and center; Site C: Probe approx. three-quarter of the way between the front and center; Site D: Probe grain in the center of the carrier. Site E,F,G: follow a similar pattern described above for the back part of the carrier. B. Sampling pattern for bulk carriers containing areas with damaged material Recommended stratified sampling patterns for carriers containing inferior or damaged portions of soybean seeds or soybean meals. In this case a three A B C step procedure is recommended. A: Probe the carrier as a whole (inferior and sound portions) as if the load was homogeneous. B: Probe the portion or portions containing the inferior grain thoroughly so as a representative cross section is obtained of the damaged or inferior material. C: Probe the portion or portions with the sound material to collect a representative sample. The sample of each step should be a minimum of 2 kg. Samples should be analyzed individually and proportions of sound to inferior material noted. 110
  • 111. 12. Annex Appendix 4 Sampling devices for soy bean products (From: Hermann, 2001) Figure 1A Figure 1B Figure 1C Figure 1D Grain probes Tapered bag triers Bomb Pelican grain probe sampler sampler Appendix 5 Sampling guidelines for bagged material Sampling of 1 bag: Stand bag up and insert sampling probe in top corner of the bag. Lower the probe diagonally through the bag to reach the opposite corner and withdraw sample. For lots up to 10 bags, each bag should be samples. Sampling of more than 10 bags: sample 10 bags selected at random. Enough material should be collected to perform the necessary assays and retain a sample. Generally a 0.5 kg sample is adequate. Appendix 6 Devices for splitting of samples (From: Hermann, 2001) Figure 2A Figure 2B Riffle sample splitter Boerner divider 111
  • 112. 12. Annex Appendix 7 Student's t test: tp(df) Degrees of freedom Probability, p 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.05 0.025 0.01 0.005 0.0005 1 0.324920 1.000000 3.077684 6.313752 12.70620 31.82052 63.65674 636.6192 2 0.288675 0.816497 1.885618 2.919986 4.30265 6.96456 9.92484 31.5991 3 0.276671 0.764892 1.637744 2.353363 3.18245 4.54070 5.84091 12.9240 4 0.270722 0.740697 1.533206 2.131847 2.77645 3.74695 4.60409 8.6103 5 0.267181 0.726687 1.475884 2.015048 2.57058 3.36493 4.03214 6.8688 6 0.264835 0.717558 1.439756 1.943180 2.44691 3.14267 3.70743 5.9588 7 0.263167 0.711142 1.414924 1.894579 2.36462 2.99795 3.49948 5.4079 8 0.261921 0.706387 1.396815 1.859548 2.30600 2.89646 3.35539 5.0413 9 0.260955 0.702722 1.383029 1.833113 2.26216 2.82144 3.24984 4.7809 10 0.260185 0.699812 1.372184 1.812461 2.22814 2.76377 3.16927 4.5869 11 0.259556 0.697445 1.363430 1.795885 2.20099 2.71808 3.10581 4.4370 12 0.259033 0.695483 1.356217 1.782288 2.17881 2.68100 3.05454 4.3178 13 0.258591 0.693829 1.350171 1.770933 2.16037 2.65031 3.01228 4.2208 14 0.258213 0.692417 1.345030 1.761310 2.14479 2.62449 2.97684 4.1405 15 0.257885 0.691197 1.340606 1.753050 2.13145 2.60248 2.94671 4.0728 16 0.257599 0.690132 1.336757 1.745884 2.11991 2.58349 2.92078 4.0150 17 0.257347 0.689195 1.333379 1.739607 2.10982 2.56693 2.89823 3.9651 18 0.257123 0.688364 1.330391 1.734064 2.10092 2.55238 2.87844 3.9216 19 0.256923 0.687621 1.327728 1.729133 2.09302 2.53948 2.86093 3.8834 20 0.256743 0.686954 1.325341 1.724718 2.08596 2.52798 2.84534 3.8495 21 0.256580 0.686352 1.323188 1.720743 2.07961 2.51765 2.83136 3.8193 22 0.256432 0.685805 1.321237 1.717144 2.07387 2.50832 2.81876 3.7921 23 0.256297 0.685306 1.319460 1.713872 2.06866 2.49987 2.80734 3.7676 24 0.256173 0.684850 1.317836 1.710882 2.06390 2.49216 2.79694 3.7454 25 0.256060 0.684430 1.316345 1.708141 2.05954 2.48511 2.78744 3.7251 26 0.255955 0.684043 1.314972 1.705618 2.05553 2.47863 2.77871 3.7066 27 0.255858 0.683685 1.313703 1.703288 2.05183 2.47266 2.77068 3.6896 28 0.255768 0.683353 1.312527 1.701131 2.04841 2.46714 2.76326 3.6739 29 0.255684 0.683044 1.311434 1.699127 2.04523 2.46202 2.75639 3.6594 30 0.255605 0.682756 1.310415 1.697261 2.04227 2.45726 2.75000 3.6460 ∞ 0.253347 0.674490 1.281552 1.644854 1.95996 2.32635 2.57583 3.2905 112
  • 113. 12. Annex Appendix 8 Standard normal Z table z 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.0 0.0000 0.0040 0.0080 0.0120 0.0160 0.0199 0.0239 0.0279 0.0319 0.0359 0.1 0.0398 0.0438 0.0478 0.0517 0.0557 0.0596 0.0636 0.0675 0.0714 0.0753 0.2 0.0793 0.0832 0.0871 0.0910 0.0948 0.0987 0.1026 0.1064 0.1103 0.1141 0.3 0.1179 0.1217 0.1255 0.1293 0.1331 0.1368 0.1406 0.1443 0.1480 0.1517 0.4 0.1554 0.1591 0.1628 0.1664 0.1700 0.1736 0.1772 0.1808 0.1844 0.1879 0.5 0.1915 0.1950 0.1985 0.2019 0.2054 0.2088 0.2123 0.2157 0.2190 0.2224 0.6 0.2257 0.2291 0.2324 0.2357 0.2389 0.2422 0.2454 0.2486 0.2517 0.2549 0.7 0.2580 0.2611 0.2642 0.2673 0.2704 0.2734 0.2764 0.2794 0.2823 0.2852 0.8 0.2881 0.2910 0.2939 0.2967 0.2995 0.3023 0.3051 0.3078 0.3106 0.3133 0.9 0.3159 0.3186 0.3212 0.3238 0.3264 0.3289 0.3315 0.3340 0.3365 0.3389 1.0 0.3413 0.3438 0.3461 0.3485 0.3508 0.3531 0.3554 0.3577 0.3599 0.3621 1.1 0.3643 0.3665 0.3686 0.3708 0.3729 0.3749 0.3770 0.3790 0.3810 0.3830 1.2 0.3849 0.3869 0.3888 0.3907 0.3925 0.3944 0.3962 0.3980 0.3997 0.4015 1.3 0.4032 0.4049 0.4066 0.4082 0.4099 0.4115 0.4131 0.4147 0.4162 0.4177 1.4 0.4192 0.4207 0.4222 0.4236 0.4251 0.4265 0.4279 0.4292 0.4306 0.4319 1.5 0.4332 0.4345 0.4357 0.4370 0.4382 0.4394 0.4406 0.4418 0.4429 0.4441 1.6 0.4452 0.4463 0.4474 0.4484 0.4495 0.4505 0.4515 0.4525 0.4535 0.4545 1.7 0.4554 0.4564 0.4573 0.4582 0.4591 0.4599 0.4608 0.4616 0.4625 0.4633 1.8 0.4641 0.4649 0.4656 0.4664 0.4671 0.4678 0.4686 0.4693 0.4699 0.4706 1.9 0.4713 0.4719 0.4726 0.4732 0.4738 0.4744 0.4750 0.4756 0.4761 0.4767 2.0 0.4772 0.4778 0.4783 0.4788 0.4793 0.4798 0.4803 0.4808 0.4812 0.4817 2.1 0.4821 0.4826 0.4830 0.4834 0.4838 0.4842 0.4846 0.4850 0.4854 0.4857 2.2 0.4861 0.4864 0.4868 0.4871 0.4875 0.4878 0.4881 0.4884 0.4887 0.4890 2.3 0.4893 0.4896 0.4898 0.4901 0.4904 0.4906 0.4909 0.4911 0.4913 0.4916 2.4 0.4918 0.4920 0.4922 0.4925 0.4927 0.4929 0.4931 0.4932 0.4934 0.4936 2.5 0.4938 0.4940 0.4941 0.4943 0.4945 0.4946 0.4948 0.4949 0.4951 0.4952 2.6 0.4953 0.4955 0.4956 0.4957 0.4959 0.4960 0.4961 0.4962 0.4963 0.4964 2.7 0.4965 0.4966 0.4967 0.4968 0.4969 0.4970 0.4971 0.4972 0.4973 0.4974 2.8 0.4974 0.4975 0.4976 0.4977 0.4977 0.4978 0.4979 0.4979 0.4980 0.4981 2.9 0.4981 0.4982 0.4982 0.4983 0.4984 0.4984 0.4985 0.4985 0.4986 0.4986 3.0 0.4987 0.4987 0.4987 0.4988 0.4988 0.4989 0.4989 0.4989 0.4990 0.4990 CONTENTS 113
  • 114. Disclaimer. Products and services referred to in this publication are for identification and as a general example only. No endorsement of any type is intended, nor is criticism of similar products or services not mentioned. Persons using products referred to in this publication assume full responsibility for their use in accordance with label directions provided by the manufacturer or supplier. CONTENTS
  • 115. F04CX14804-042004-500 Rue du Luxembourg 16-B • 1000 Brussels - Belgium Tel: +32 2 548 93 80 • Fax: +32 2 502 68 66 Email: soyabru@coditel.net • www.asa-europe.org CONTENTS